JP2020018709A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving improvement in amusement of games.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, after a bet operation is performed, rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started on the basis of an operation of a start lever 41. Then, by the operation of stop switches 42 to 44, respective reels are stopped and stop symbols corresponding to the result of a lottery can be stopped. As a game state, RT states that may have different replay probabilities are provided. As a mode in which a pressing order notification may occur, an AT mode is provided. During the AT mode, if a shift is made to a fourth RT state as an RT state in which a shift lottery to the AT mode is likely to be won in a lottery, the AT mode is finished.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Pachinko machines, slot machines and the like are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied, and a bonus is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

  More specifically, when the start lever is operated in a situation in which a medal as a game medium is bet, an internal lottery is performed, the rotation of the reel is started, and the stop is performed during the rotation of the reel. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reel stops. Then, when the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege according to the result is given (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
A plurality of orbiting bodies in which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies,
Starting operation means by which the circling of each circulating body is started when operated;
Stop operation means for stopping rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
A drive control unit that starts circling of each of the circulating bodies when the start operating unit is operated, and stops circling of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation unit is operated.
Lottery means for performing a lottery on whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state and a first specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal gaming state, a first transitional lottery means for executing a first transitional lottery as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state,
Based on that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state, 1 specific transition means,
A second shift lottery means for executing a second shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is a second transition result corresponding to transition to the second specific game state, a step of transitioning to the second specific game state 2 specific transition means,
With
As the game state, a first special state and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is different, are set. ,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained at the first probability in the first special state, while the second transition lottery means is greater than the first probability in the second special state. The second transfer lottery can be executed so that the second transfer result is obtained with a high second probability;
In the second specific gaming state, a specific ending means for ending the second specific gaming state based on the transition to the second special state is provided.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing the state where the front door was closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing the state where the front door was opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing. It is a figure showing the symbol arrangement of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the pattern which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the pattern which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be given. It is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be given. It is an explanatory view showing a relationship between a winning mode and a privilege to be given. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a main control device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a timer interrupt process performed by a main control device. 5 is a flowchart illustrating a normal process performed by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the normal game state. It is a flowchart which shows a reel control process. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is an explanatory view for explaining stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the 1st RT state. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the 2nd RT state. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of each state. It is a flowchart showing a bonus state process. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the operation order of the stop switch and the winning mode that is established. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for BB state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relation of each state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an outline of a display mode. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery result correspondence process. It is a flow chart which shows an advantageous section shift lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st specific combination process. It is a flow chart which shows a 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an addition notification process. It is a flowchart showing a third specific combination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specialized zones. It is a figure for explaining a main result of performing a lottery about an instruction function, and a setting difference of a winning probability. It is a figure showing an example of an advantageous section shift lottery table and an AT mode shift lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of a precursor game number table. It is a figure showing an example of an additional lottery table and an additional game number lottery table. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the number of remaining games of an actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on a display. It is a figure showing an example of a post loading lottery table. It is a figure showing an example of an addition information timing table. It is a flowchart which shows a mode transition notification process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the press order notification effect performed by an auxiliary display part. It is a flowchart which shows a press order process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning result correspondence process. It is a flowchart which shows the game number management processing. It is a flowchart which shows an end determination process. It is a figure for explaining an outline of an instruction monitor and a section display. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flowchart which shows a section display 2nd process. It is a flowchart which shows the remaining game number management processing. It is a flowchart which shows a remaining number management process. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the start game and end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section indicator. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process by the display control apparatus of a sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the betting effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production effect setting process at the time of a start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for press order notification. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting processing at the time of all the stops. It is a flowchart showing a bonus effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a transition trigger combination notification process. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous effect setting process. It is a figure showing the relation between information timing and an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is an explanatory view for explaining an example of a continuous production. It is a figure showing an example of AT mode change lottery table in each RT state. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the 4th RT state. It is a flowchart which shows fixed RT game number setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RT transfer. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process for RT transfer. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by an auxiliary display part. It is a figure showing the relation between AT mode change lottery and RT state. It is a figure showing the relation between AT mode change lottery and RT state. It is a figure showing the relation between AT mode change lottery and RT state. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of an advantageous section transfer winning. It is a flowchart which shows 1st processing at the time of AT non-winning. It is a flowchart which shows 2nd processing at the time of AT non-winning. It is a flow chart which shows the 3rd processing at the time of AT non-winning. It is a figure showing the relation between an advantageous section shift lottery and AT mode shift lottery. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an RT shift process according to a first modification. In Modification Example 2, (a) is a flowchart showing the game number adding process, and (b) is a flowchart showing the RT shift process. In Modification 3, (a) is a diagram illustrating a setting difference of a winning probability of a transfer replay, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a setting difference of a pressing order notification occurrence rate at the time of a transfer replay winning. In Modification 4, (a) is a diagram illustrating an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a transition timing of a fourth RT state and the number of games in the AT mode. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a post-addition notification process according to a fifth modification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for RT transfer. It is a flowchart which shows a press order process. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a freeze timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for freezes. It is a figure for explaining an outline of a freeze production. FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between each state in a modification 6. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the 3rd RT state. It is a flow chart which shows a 2nd specific combination processing. It is a flowchart which shows a winning result correspondence process. It is a figure showing the relation between AT mode change lottery and RT state. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of an AT mode shift lottery table in each RT state in Modification Example 7. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of an AT mode shift lottery table in each RT state in Modification Example 8. 20 is a flowchart illustrating a part of a first specific combination process and an advantageous section shift winning process in Modification Example 9. It is a figure in modification 10 showing an example of the AT mode shift lottery table in each RT state. It is a figure showing an example of AT mode change lottery table in each RT state. It is a figure showing an example of AT mode change lottery table in each RT state. In the eleventh modification, (a) is a flowchart showing a part of the first specified combination process, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the presence or absence of the AT mode destination lottery in the RT state. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating an example of an AT mode shift lottery table in each RT state according to a twelfth modification. It is a flow chart which shows the advantageous section shift lottery processing in modification 13. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a second process at the time of non-AT winning, and (b) is a diagram for explaining a relationship between a start game and an end game of an advantageous section and a display on a section display. It is explanatory drawing in 2nd Embodiment which shows the transition relation of each state. It is a flowchart which shows RT state processing. It is a figure showing an example of the lottery table for the 4th RT state. It is a figure in modification 1 showing an example of the 4th RT state lottery table. FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship between each state in Modification Example 2. (A) is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 4RT state, (b) is a figure for demonstrating the route when AT mode is started from 4th RT state. It is a flowchart which shows a press order process. It is a figure in modification 3 showing an example of the 4th RT state lottery table. It is a figure in modification 4 showing an example of the 4th RT state lottery table. In the third embodiment, (a) is a flowchart showing an advantageous section shift winning process, and (b) is a diagram showing a configuration of a RAM in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st specific combination process. It is a figure for explaining the relation between the start game and end game of an advantageous section, and the display of a section indicator. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a first specific combination process according to a first modification. It is a figure showing an example of AT mode change lottery table. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a first specific combination process in Modification Example 2.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a spinning-type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11, and FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 forming an outer shell thereof. The housing 11 is formed in a box shape with an open front surface as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by hitting a nail or the like when installed in a game hall.

  On the front side of the housing 11, a front door 12 is attached so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has bearing portions 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates around the opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. It is movably supported, and the front opening side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by the rotation of the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked by a locking device 20 provided on the rear surface thereof so that the front door 12 cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 that informs a player of a game state is provided near the center of the front door 12. In the gaming panel 25, three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, 26R are formed side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is mounted above the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are disposed on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on a one-to-one basis. . Therefore, a part of the surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be visually recognized through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be driven to rotate individually, that is, independently, by driving each stepping motor. . The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal of, for example, 504 pulses (hereinafter, also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel, is set by the excitation pulse. Controlled. In the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is output to a main control device 101 described later each time the detection is performed. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each of reels 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch a symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output an excitation pulse of 24 pulses (= 504 pulses 励 21 symbols). Further, main controller 101 grasps a symbol visible from display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, and displays the display window. Control for stopping a predetermined symbol at a position visible from 26L, 26M, 26R can be performed.

  Next, the symbols drawn on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

  FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively, and these numbers are symbols that can be visually recognized by the main control device 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Is not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the following description will be made using the numbers.

  The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the seventh on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the twentieth on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). No.), "2nd replay" symbol (for example, 6th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (for example, 10th on left reel 32L), "watermelon" symbol (for example, 8th on left reel 32L) , "Cherry" symbol (for example, fourth on left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (for example, eighteenth on left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (for example, seventeenth on left reel 32L), "LUCKY" There are eleven types of "design" (for example, the fifth on the left reel 32L) and "Youth" symbol (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed such that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are such that the entire symbol can be visually recognized. Therefore, in a state where all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols can be visually recognized through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified using a combination of three symbols, one symbol each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be viewed. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols become visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are connected. A combination of each symbol stopped on the upper line L1, a combination of each symbol stopped on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and a lower symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are linked. There is a combination of each symbol stopped at the lower line L3. In addition, a combination of the respective symbols stopped on the lower right line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, and the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol stopped at an upward line L5 connecting the symbol and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is a combination of each symbol stopped at a bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The above-mentioned lines L1 to L5 are lines that are straight when the respective symbols are arranged, and the bent line L6 is a line where the symbols are bent in the middle when the respective symbols are arranged. In addition, as a combination of the respective symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, there is a combination other than the bending line L6, but the description is omitted here.

  Among these lines L1 to L6, a line activated by the number of medals and a line not activated are set, and when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line. As a prize winning, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of medals as game media is provided, or a privilege for shifting a gaming state is provided. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, a winning is not established and the above-mentioned benefit is not given.

  In the slot machine 10, only the lower right line L4 is regarded as an effective line as shown in FIG. 8A, and the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 as shown in FIG. 8B. There are a case where the combination line is an effective line and a case where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the game is started with three medals bet, only the lower right line L4 is set as an active line, and when the game is started with two medals bet, the lower line is used. The line L3 and the lower right line L4 are effective lines. In addition, when the game is started with one bet, a bent line L6 alone is set as an active line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the rising line L5 are not regarded as valid lines. In the following, a game started by betting three medals is called a 3-bet game, a game started by betting two medals is called a 2-bet game, and a game started by betting one medal is started. Also called a 1-bet game.

  FIG. 9 to FIG. 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols to be awarded and a privilege to be given in the event of a win.

  The small winning combinations in which the medals are paid out include first small winning combinations to 41st small winning combinations.

  The "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol of the right reel 32R are on the active line. If stopped, the first small role prize is won. When the first small winning combination is established, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The second to 26th small winning combinations have different winning combinations, but in the three-bet game, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M. "White BAR" symbol, "Red 7" symbol, "Cherry" symbol, "White bell" symbol or "LUCKKY" symbol, "White BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "White bell" symbol on the right reel 32R, The “red 7” symbol or the “second replay” symbol is a winning mode in which the “bell” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. In this case, an eighth small role prize is won. As shown in FIG. 6, the “cherry” symbol (No. 11) and the “red bell” symbol are arranged at an adjacent position (no. 12) on the upstream side on the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R has A "red bell" symbol is arranged at a position (no. 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (no. 18) on the upstream side. For this reason, when the eighth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R stops on the upper line L1. When the second small win to the 26th small win are established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 27th small winning combination is a winning combination determined as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on a stop symbol of the left reel 32L. Specifically, the "cherry" of the left reel 32L is determined. When the symbol stops in the upper or lower tier, the 27th small prize winning is established. In this case, the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops or stops, that is, the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol is on the activated line. By stopping, the 27th small winning combination is established. When the 27th small win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 28th small win is a case where the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower stage, and is a prize mode in which the "Cherry" symbol stops on the right-downline L4. More specifically, a "cherry" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "1st replay" symbol or the "2nd replay" symbol stops, the 28th small win is awarded. When the 28th small win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  A supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small win and the 28th small win is as follows. When the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. Although the 27th small win is established, the 28th small win may be established instead of the 27th small win depending on the stop symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. That is, although the prize mode of the 27th small role prize includes the prize mode of the 28th small role prize, the 27th small role prize and the 28th small role prize are clearly distinguished from each other, and the prize determination is performed. Is performed.

  The 29th small win is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the lower right line L4 is an effective line, the "watermelon" symbol stops at the lower right to complete the 29th small win. When the 29th small role prize is established, five medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 30th small winning combination is a winning mode in which the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, if the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the payline, the 30th small Wins a role. When the 30th small win is established, five medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  "Black BAR" symbol, "Youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "Red Bell" symbol or "White" on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and the symbol stop on the activated line, the 31st small win is awarded. When the 31st small win is established, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  In the case of winning the 32nd small win to the 35th small win, in the case of a 3-betting game, three medals are paid out, and in the 2-bet game, 14 medals are paid out.

  The 36th small role prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 for the “watermelon” symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, when the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. In this case, the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the “watermelon” symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th small win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  A "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "black BAR" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, a "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol, "white" on the right reel 32R. If the "bell" symbol and the "youth" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a “second replay” symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the “red bell” symbol (number 7) on the downstream side (number 6). The "1st replay" symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the "bell" symbol (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) on the downstream side (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th). On the right reel 32R, the main “red bell” symbols (No. 2, 5, 12, and 20) and “1st, 6th, 16th, 0th” adjacent to the upstream position A “replay” symbol or a “second replay” symbol is arranged, and a “first replay” symbol is arranged at a position adjacent to the “white bell” symbol (number 10) on the upstream side (number 11). For this reason, when the 37th small win is established on the downward-sloping line L4, mainly, while the “bell” symbol and the “replay” symbol are tempered on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, the middle reel 32M The "bell" symbol and the "replay" symbol do not stop. When the 37th small win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  A "white BAR" symbol, a "youth" symbol, a "watermelon" symbol, a "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the “watermelon” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol stop on the activated line, the 38th small role prize is won. If the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "Cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the upper stage to the lower stage in the 3-bet game, if the 38th small win is established, the left The “red bell” symbol on the reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. When the 38th small win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, The 39th small role prize is won. The 39th small role winning is a winning mode established only in the 3-bet game. When the 39th small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

  When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol of the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, The 40th small role prize is won. The 40th small win is a winning mode established only in the 3-bet game. When the 40th small win is established, nine medals are paid out.

  If the “watermelon” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “black BAR” symbol or “cherry” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 41st small Wins a role. When the 41st small win is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The prize to which the re-game privilege that allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal is given includes a first to a twelfth re-game prize. Also, when the second re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth re-gaming is performed. When a prize or a fifth re-game prize is established, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. When the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state.

  The state transition prize in which only the transition of the gaming state is performed includes a first BB prize, a second BB prize, and a CB prize.

  When the "red 7" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line, the first BB wins, and when the "white BAR" symbol on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the activated line. Will be a second BB prize. When these BB winnings are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Also, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "watermelon" symbol, a "first replay" symbol, and a "black BAR" on the right reel 32R. If the symbol stops on the activated line, a CB winning is achieved. When the CB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop roll in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "white BAR" symbol, a "LUCKY" symbol, a "red 7" symbol, a "white bell" symbol, a "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M. When the “cherry” symbol, the “watermelon” symbol and the “first replay” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "white BAR" symbol, a "youth" symbol, a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R. , The “red 7” symbol and the “second replay” symbol also stop on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, a combination of the above symbols is referred to as a transition outcome.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 operated to start rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of medals are inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-shaped stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R are provided. The stop switches 42 to 44 are respectively disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

  The stop switches 42 to 44 are connected to stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12), respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to a main controller 101 described later. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, a detection signal of a LOW signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal switches from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of the signal and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. When the main control device 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

  That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop variable display of symbols based on rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium. In addition, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 involves an operation of directly inserting a medal by a player, it can be said that the medal insertion port 45 constitutes a direct input unit for directly inputting a game medium.

  The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 provided as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge passage 48 side. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided at a lower part of the front surface of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to a player. The payout device 53 discharges medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 by rotating a medal payout rotating plate (not shown), and pays out medals to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided to prevent a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the spare tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored at a height equal to or higher than the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the spare tank 54.

  Below the medal slot 45, a button-shaped return switch 55 is provided. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically operated in conjunction with the medal, and the medals stuck in the selector 46 are medaled. It is designed to be returned from the outlet 49.

  A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit switch 56, and a third credit switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes an input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. Also, note that while the medal insertion slot 45 involves an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 merely involves an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

  Between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs is provided. That is, the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and the second credit input switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. I have.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals and payout medals at the time of winning as a virtual medal until a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) is reached. When the settlement switch 59 is operated in the state where the data is stored and stored, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal outlet 49 as a real medal. In this case, paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes a settlement operation means for actually paying out the game media stored and stored.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals that have been credited, and a remaining payout number that displays the remaining number of medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are constituted by seven-segment displays, they can be replaced by liquid crystal displays or the like.

  A push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and a notification of the operation order below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 and to the right of the number-of-payouts display portion 62. There is provided a section display for indicating a favorable section which is a section in which the winning rate of the small role is changed and the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player, and an instruction monitor 68 having the section display. The instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

  On the upper part of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of right and left that emits various sound effects as the game progresses and informs the player of the game state. Speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for performing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game using the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be the main display unit. This is referred to as an auxiliary display section 65. On the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is provided.

  A power supply box 70 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the medal pitching. That is, the hole manager or the like inserts a setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and performs an ON operation, whereby the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state, but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for integrally managing a game is attached to the housing 11.

  The main control device 101 is provided with a winning ratio monitor 77 for specifying a ratio between a gaming state that is advantageous for the player and a state that is not so. The main control device is configured such that the role ratio monitor 77 can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. It is installed on the side facing the front of the gaming machine in 101, and more specifically, in the board box so that the display surface of the duty ratio monitor 77 becomes visible through the board box in which the main controller 101 is housed. Is housed. By the way, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the duty ratio monitor 77 is invisible from the gap between the display windows 26L to 26R, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21. Unless the front door 12 is in the open state, it is impossible to check the duty ratio monitor 77. The role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS.

  The main controller 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main base built in the slot machine 10.

  The input side of the main controller 101 includes a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, and detecting medals paid out from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a for individually detecting the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a for individually detecting the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit Detecting the operation of the closing switch 58 individually 3-credit insertion sensor 58a, settlement detection sensor 59a for detecting operation of settlement switch 59, reset detection sensor 72a for detecting operation of reset switch 72, setting key inserted into setting key insertion hole 73, and ON operation performed Various sensors, such as a setting key detection sensor 73a, for detecting an error are connected, and signals from these sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

  A power supply 91 is connected to the input side of the main controller 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply unit 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main control unit 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cutoff state and generates a power failure signal when the power supply is switched off by the power supply switch 71 as well as during a power failure. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power has been cut off when the drive voltage has dropped to, for example, less than 10 volts. And a power failure signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes the power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 101 even when the output voltage drops to less than 10 volts. As a time during which the stabilized voltage is output, a time sufficient for executing the power failure process by the main control device 101 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R), a medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a duty ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hole management device (not shown), and the like are included. It is connected via an output port 104.

  The above-mentioned CPU 102 has a ROM 105 storing various control programs executed by the CPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing the data, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, and a credit counter for counting the number of credits. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 as a part of a control program.

  The RAM 106 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 91 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of winning combinations, and stop information used when performing stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to a stop information storage area 106b for storing the game state, a state information storage area 106c for storing a game state such as a BB state, and the like.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter) when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Yes, when the power failure is turned off (including turning on the power by operating the power switch 71. The same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information of the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is executed when power is turned off by a power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in main processing when the power is turned on.

  In addition, a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to an NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer mainly including a CPU 181 which is an arithmetic processing unit. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 181 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing the information are incorporated.

  The display control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are connected to the output side. I have. Then, based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65 are drive-controlled. That is, the display control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is a main base that comprehensively manages the game. That is, by providing a sub-base for sounds, lamps, and displays related to indirect games, the burden on the main base is reduced.

  An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects an operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to an input side of the display control device 81. In addition, the various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the display control device 81.

  Subsequently, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 is roughly divided into a main processing started upon power-on, a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 1.49 msec), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started in response to the input of "." Hereinafter, of these processes, processes relating to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

  First, in the register save processing shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 used in the later-described normal processing are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute the power failure processing.

  Here, an outline of the power failure process will be described.

  When the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether or not the transmission of the command has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, the present process is terminated, the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port at the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal at the time of the blackout is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting the subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, a case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until an infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal has not been output, it means that the device has recovered from the power failure state. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the output of the power failure signal is continuously performed, the operation enters an infinite loop. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is output even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process shifts to the main processing.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 are performed.

  That is, in step S104, a clearing process of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process for enabling the next timer interrupt to be set for the CPU 102 itself is performed. In step S106, in order to rotate each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving the stepping motors, which are the respective drum drive motors, is performed. In step S107, the state of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 is read, and whether the read result is normal or not is determined. Sensor monitoring processing for monitoring whether In step S108, a timer calculation process for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process of outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentrated terminal board 121 is performed.

  In step S110, a command output process of transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command described later to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, the segment data set in the segment data setting process is supplied to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 to perform a segment data display process of displaying the corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, a port output process for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 is returned to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and the series of timer interrupt processes ends.

  Next, a normal process for performing main control related to a game will be described with reference to a flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S201, an interrupt permitting process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling the game is performed. In the pre-start processing, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like completes the initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, a game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

  In the game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random number value used in a previous game) is cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, a start waiting process is performed.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any re-game winning has been achieved in the previous game. If any of the replay winnings has been established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process ends. Specifically, for example, when a re-game winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, processing for automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed, and when a re-game winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, one game is won. To automatically insert virtual medals.

  In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, when any re-game winning is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interruption process. If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is set to an error state, and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the reading result of the sensor is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. If the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process for paying out the same number of medals as credited virtual medals. I do.

  After the end of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. Then, if any of them is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the bet number and the like is performed, and the start waiting process ends. If neither the insertion of medals nor the operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the present start wait process, the start wait process ends.

  After the end of the start waiting process, in a step S205, it is determined whether or not the number of medals bet has reached a specified number. In the present slot machine 10, "2" is set as the prescribed number in the CB state, and the gaming states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, “1” and “3” are set as the prescribed numbers in the 4RT state and the BB state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is “2”, and on the condition other than the CB state, the bet number is “1” or “3”. A positive determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if a medal is not bet or if the bet is "2" even if a bet is made, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  If the bet number has reached the specified number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification processing will be described later in detail.

  After performing the processing in step S206, the bet command including the information on the processing result in step S206 and the information on the number of bets determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as the sub-side control device. Set as the output target of. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt processing. The process of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described later in detail.

  After executing the processing in step S207, it is determined in step S208 whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process in the processes are performed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a predetermined number of medals are bet. Indicates that a command has been issued. In such a case, in step S209, an effective line setting process of setting a combination line corresponding to the bet number as an effective line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the lower right line L4 is set as an active line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are set as active lines. In the 1-bet game, the bend line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process of step S211, the reel control process of step S212, the medal payout process of step S213, the RT state process of step S214, and the bonus state process of step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

  Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S301, a random number to be used when making a winning / non-winning determination is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535. After confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After obtaining the random number, in a step S302, a lottery table for performing the determination of winning / losing of the winning combination is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of gaming states, which are roughly classified into a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The table is set for each game state.

  That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the bet number is “3” and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the normal game state lottery table is displayed. select. In the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into a setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and perform a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to set which of the winning probabilities the internal processing is executed. In step S302, the lottery table with the lowest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is “setting 1”, and the lottery table with the highest expected medal payout value is selected when the setting state is “setting 6”.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the process regarding the setting of the winning probability.

  The winning probability setting process is executed in a main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the setting process of the winning probability is performed when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and the ON operation is performed. Invoked after initialization processing. In the setting process of the winning probability, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated one by one every time the start lever 41 is operated. For example, every time the start lever 41 is operated once, “Setting 1” → “Setting 2” The setting value is updated so that "Setting 3" → "Setting 4" → "Setting 5" → "Setting 6" → "Setting 1". Each set value is displayed on, for example, the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. Then, based on the fact that the setting key detection sensor 73a has been turned off, the set value at that point is set as the current set value, and the winning probability setting process ends. The display of the credit display unit 60 also ends based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The setting values set in the winning probability setting process are stored and held in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a process of selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

  The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a normal game state lottery table selected in the normal game state of “Setting 3”. In the lottery table, index values IV are set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

  After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and a determination value DV used in determining whether or not a winning combination is set in subsequent step S304. In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the first determination value setting process, the random number value obtained in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a point value PV corresponding to 1, which is the current index value IV, is added to this random number value to generate a new value. The determination value is DV.

  After that, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the role corresponding to the index value IV is correct. In the determination of the winning or losing of the role, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether any one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with the index value IV (IV = 34 to 54) including any one of the first BB, the second BB, and the CB. If an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting the corresponding bonus winning flag (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306, or after the processing in step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each small win according to the index value IV determined in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. The processing for setting to 106a is executed. For example, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 34, the first BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small role winning flag, the 33rd small role winning flag, The 35 small role winning flag is set. If the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 17, a winning flag indicating that the small winning combination of the 30th and 41st winning combinations has been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

  Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (first BB winning flag) indicating that the first BB has been won or a winning flag (second BB winning flag) indicating that the second BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a is displayed. The set winning flag is reset after the game in which the selected flag is set ends (see S203 in the normal processing). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on condition that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

  In steps S306 to S308 in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if a winning other than the first BB, the second BB, and the CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first BB, the first BB, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB has not been won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

  That is, for example, in a state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV is 34, the first BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small role winning flag is set. , The 33rd small role winning flag and the 35th small role winning flag are set. Further, in a state where the first BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV is 35, the second BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small role winning flag and the 33rd The small role winning flag and the 35th small role winning flag are set.

  In addition, a lottery table in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over is separately prepared, and in a state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed using the separately prepared lottery table. May be performed. In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV may be set so as not to win the first BB, the second BB, and the CB.

  When the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV has been lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a role corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the incremented index value IV has exceeded the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S304, and the determination of the combination of the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV used for the previous combination determination (that is, the current determination value DV) to obtain a new determination value DV. In step S305, a winning combination determination is performed based on the determination value DV. By the way, in the case of judging the winning or losing of the hand using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning in normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 7.3, strong cherry The probability of winning (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the weak cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. is there. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218 minutes 1. The probability of winning the chance A (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1/25, and the probability of winning the chance B (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 252. It's a fraction. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1 / 32,800, and the probability of winning the bell of any question (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65500 minutes It is one. The probability of winning in the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 23 to 26) is about 1/43, and the middle push bell, respectively. The probability of being elected to 1, the middle-pressed bell 2, the right-pressed bell 1, and the right-pressed bell 2 (the probability of being elected when IV = 27 to 30) is about 1 / 1.8. The probability of winning in strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning in strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning in IV = 35) is Approximately 1 in 1800, probability of winning in weak cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is approximately 1/32800, probability of winning in weak cherry duplication 2 (in the case of IV = 37 The probability of winning) is about 1 / 32,800. The probability of winning in strong watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning in strong watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning in IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning a weak watermelon duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1 in 65,500, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is about 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning in the chance A overlap 1, the chance A overlap 2, the chance B overlap 1, and the chance B overlap 2 (the probability of winning in the case of IV = 42 to 45) is about 1 / 32,800. The probability of winning in the middle bell overlap 1 and the middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 46, 47) is about 1/21800. The probability of winning the special lip A overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, and the probability of winning the special lip A overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) Is about 1 in 1310. The probability of winning the special lip AB duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, and the probability of winning the special lip AB duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) Is about 1 in 1310. The probability that the first BB and the second BB are independently won (the probability of being won when IV = 52, 53) is about 1 / 32,800. The probability of winning the CB (probability of winning when IV = 54) is approximately 1 / 9.9. In addition, the probability of a miss not winning any role is approximately 1.96.

  In the lottery table for the normal gaming state, 0 is set for the point value PV of IV = 2 to 14, 31 to 33, 55 to 58. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, no win is made at these index values IV.

  After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning or losing of the hand has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect in which the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is invalidated for a predetermined period.

  In a succeeding step S312, a lottery result corresponding process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process of determining whether or not to shift the gaming state in accordance with the result of the lottery in steps S301 to S311, a process of notifying the pressing sequence, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After executing the processing in step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the determination of the winning or losing of the combination. However, in the normal processing, only various commands such as the lottery result command are set in the ring buffer, and no command is transmitted to the display control device 81. The command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

  Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing for setting a symbol that can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the result of the current lottery is executed. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to a winning combination is set based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when the strong cherry is won (win when IV = 15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small win, the 32nd small win to the 35th small win, and the reels 32L are displayed. , 32M, and 32R, the stop symbol information is set so that it can be stopped. When the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (win when IV = 34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the first BB winning flag are set, the 28th small role, the 33rd small role, the 35th small role and the Stop symbol information is set so that the symbol corresponding to the 1BB winning can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In the following step S315, when a plurality of stoppable symbol information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting a priority order is executed. For example, when a plurality of role types among small role, replay, and bonus are won, the following priority order is set. If a small role and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that if the small role can not be won, the bonus will be won if the small role can not be won . When the re-game and the bonus have been won, the priority is set so that the re-game winning is established with priority.

  For example, when winning is made in the strong cherry duplication 1 and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small win, the 33rd small win, the 35th small win and the 1st BB winning is set, the 28th win is more than the 1st BB winning. The priority is set so that the small combination, the 33rd small combination, and the 35th small combination winning are established with priority. In addition, when the special lip A duplication 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the ninth replay and the first BB prize is set, the ninth replay prize is established with priority over the first BB prize. Priority is set as follows. Then, for example, in a situation where the first BB prize has been carried over, if a normal replay is won and stop symbol information corresponding to the first BB prize and the first replay prize has been set, the first BB prize is more than the first BB prize. The priority order is set so that one re-game winning is preferentially established.

  Here, when the player has won a replay, a combination of winning symbols is set so that any of the replays that have been won will always win. In other words, when the player has won the re-game, a re-game winning is always established, and no miss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information of the re-game and the bonus is set, any re-game winning of the set re-game is always established, and the bonus won is not established.

  Further, when a plurality of small wins and a plurality of replays are won simultaneously, a symbol corresponding to any of the small wins or the replays stops on the activated line, depending on the timing at which the stop operation is performed. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th small win and the 41st small win is set, the 30th small win and the 41st small win are left as described above. The target design of the reel 32L is common to the “watermelon” design. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small winning combination is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both “red bell” symbols in the 30th small role, and the “cherry” symbol and the “black BAR” symbol in the 41st small role. , The right reel 32R is a “watermelon” symbol. For example, in the three-bet game, when the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the seventh “red bell” symbol reaches the middle stage from the fourth “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, Both the 7th "Red Bell" symbol which is the target symbol of the small hand and the "Black BAR" symbol which is the target symbol of the 41st small portion can be stopped at the middle line which is on the active line. Becomes In this case, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol having the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, the stop drive control is performed so that the “red bell” symbol stops at the middle stage, the 41st small win is not established, and the 30th small win can be won.

  On the other hand, when the stop operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the twelfth “red bell” symbol reaches the middle stage from the eighth “black BAR” symbol on the middle reel 32M, Stop at the middle stage any of the eighth "Black BAR" symbol and the eleventh "Cherry" symbol and the twelfth "Red Bell" symbol which is the target symbol of the 30th small role. Becomes possible. Also in this case, since the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped, the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops at the middle stage, The 30th small win is no longer established, and the 41st small win can be awarded.

  The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "Red Bell" symbol which is the target symbol of the 30th small win and the "watermelon" which is the target symbol of the 41st small win The stop symbol information is set such that the symbol having a small number of slips with the symbol stops at the lower stage which is an effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed at the timing when the sixth “first replay” symbol and the seventh “black BAR” symbol reach the effective positions, “watermelon” Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped, and in this case, no so-called small portion prize is won and so-called missed.

  After executing the processing of step S315, the section display first processing is executed in step S316, and then the lottery processing ends. The section display first process is a process related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and such a process will be described later in detail.

  Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311 and the like. In a succeeding step S402, a rotation start process for starting rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

  In the rotation start processing, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game, and if not, the wait time has elapsed. Wait until you do. When the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in a motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating. For this reason, even if the player bets the specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating. After that, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stand by until they rotate at a predetermined rotation speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. When the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by lighting and displaying lamps (not shown) of the stop switches 42 to 44. Is notified to the player or the like.

  Subsequent to the rotation start processing, in a step S403, it is determined whether or not any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. I do. If the stop command has not been issued, the process returns to step S403 and waits until one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If a stop command has been issued, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 to grasp which stop switch has been operated and the stop command has been generated. When the stop command command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

  In step S406, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base position (the lower stage in the present embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the symbol that has reached the base point position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output since the detection signal of the reel index sensor was input. In the following step S407, the slip number of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to a stop mode in which, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is directly stopped. A stop mode in which the reel to be slid for one symbol is stopped after sliding, a stop mode in which the reel is slid for two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is slid for three symbols, and a stop mode after slid for four symbols There are prepared five stop modes including a stop mode to be stopped. Therefore, in step S407, any one of 0 to 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. Then, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the attained symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol actually stopped at the base position is determined. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol. If the symbol numbers are equal, a reel stop process for stopping the rotation of the reel is performed in step S410. Do. Then, in a step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, the second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

  Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reel stops. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop appearance of the stopped reel. In the slot machine 10, for example, when the winning is achieved when IV = 23 to 30, that is, the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and the right push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are turned off. The stop information second setting process is performed to change the winning mode established according to the operation order.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination, an operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a winning mode that is established. For example, when the middle press bell 1 has been won, stop information is set so that the second small win, the seventh small win, or the ninth small win is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, stop information is set so as to establish the first small win, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the second small win and the seventh small win are set. Stop information is set so that a winning combination or a ninth small winning combination is established. However, even when the stop information is set in this way, a corresponding winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in the gaming state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing at which the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , Only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of four or less symbols, the winning symbol is effective when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on line. On the other hand, in the case of a symbol arranged so that a section separated by 5 symbols or more is formed, when stopping on the activated line, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbol.

  The case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second small winning, the seventh small winning, or the ninth small winning.

  The second small winning symbols on the left reel 32L are a “red bell” symbol and a “white bell” symbol. Further, the “red bell” symbol and the “white bell” symbol also have a function as a seventh small winning symbol, and also have a function as a ninth small winning symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second small winning symbols (seven small winning symbols, ninth small winning symbols) are arranged so that the interval between them is four or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "Cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle stage, as shown in FIG. 20A, the number 7 "red bell" The symbol stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for the second small-prize win, the seventh small-prize win, or the ninth small-prize win on the right-downward line L4.

  The second small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “white BAR” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, a “white BAR” symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The seventh small symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “red 7” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth small win symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “cherry” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the eleventh position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol, or the ninth small symbol is stopped on the activated line, or the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol, and the like. None of the ninth small win symbols may stop on the active line.

  Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the 13th “1st replay” symbol to the 17th “1st replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, the second small role The "white BAR" symbol, which is a symbol, stops at the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the second small winning combination on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any of the ninth “second replay” symbol to the thirteenth “first replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. Then, the "red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small symbol, stops at the middle stage. As a result, there remains room for the seventh small winning combination on the downward-sloping line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the sixth “white bell” symbol to the tenth “young man” symbol has reached the lower stage, the ninth small symbol “cherry” symbol is the middle stage. To stop. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding by four symbols, the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol, and the ninth small symbol are changed. It cannot be stopped in the middle. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second “LUCKKY” symbol or the sixth “white bell” symbol stops at the middle stage.

  When the seventh small win symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the seventh small win can be established.

  The seventh small symbol symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white bell” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a “white bell” symbol is arranged only at the tenth position. Therefore, the seventh small win symbol may or may not stop on the activated line depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any of the sixth “first replay” symbol to the tenth “white bell” symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in the figure, the "white bell" symbol as the seventh small symbol symbol stops at the lower part. As a result, the seventh small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the third “second replay” symbol has reached the lower stage, the fourth “watermelon” symbol is displayed as shown in FIG. Stop at the bottom. From the left, the combination of the “red bell” symbol, the “red 7” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol is the transition outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the ninth small win symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the ninth small win can be achieved.

  The ninth small winning symbol on the right reel 32R is a “youth” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a "youth" symbol is arranged at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth small winning symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the eleventh “first replay” symbol to the fifteenth “youth” symbol has reached the lower stage, it is a ninth small symbol. The "Youth" symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, a ninth small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol (the “red bell” symbol), the “cherry” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol (the “first replay” symbol) is a transition outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the second small symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, in the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed so that the second small winning combination can be established.

  The second small winning symbol of the right reel 32R is a “white BAR” symbol. On the right reel 32R, a “white BAR” symbol is arranged at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small winning symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 14th “watermelon” symbol to the 18th “white BAR” symbol has reached the lower stage, the second small symbol symbol “ The “white BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the downward-sloping line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol (the “red bell” symbol), the “white BAR” symbol, and the “watermelon” symbol (the “first replay” symbol) is a transition outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the second small symbol, the seventh small symbol, and the ninth small symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle, that is, the "LUCKKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage.

  The “watermelon” symbol and the “first replay” symbol are arranged on the right reel 32R such that the interval between the “watermelon” symbol and the “first replay” is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the “watermelon” symbol or the “first replay” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. From left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol (“red bell” symbol), the “LUCKKY” symbol (“white bell” symbol), and the “watermelon” symbol (“first replay” symbol) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a roll.

  As described above, when the middle press bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small role winning is established and the seventh small role winning is achieved. Either a case where a winning is achieved, a case where a ninth small role winning is realized, or a case where the transition outcome is stopped.

  Next, a case where the middle press bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in the order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is performed in order to achieve the first small winning combination.

  On the middle reel 32M, a "red bell" symbol, which is a first small winning symbol, is arranged such that an interval between the "red bell" symbols is four or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol stops at the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the left reel 32L, a first red symbol symbol, a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, are arranged such that the interval between the first small symbol symbols is four or less. For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the right reel 32R, a "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first small winning symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first small winning symbols is four or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

  In the case where the push order bell is won, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation orders, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. In the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, a small winning combination is established or the transition to the active line is stopped depending on the operation timing. By the way, when the middle bell is won, the 38th small role prize is established regardless of the operation order and the operation timing. One small role prize is established.

  Returning to the description of the reel control processing, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, the payout determination processing is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of paid out medals on condition that one of the winning symbol combinations is arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the activated line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning has been established on the activated line. judge. If a winning has been achieved, it is further determined whether or not the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, an error occurrence process is performed to set the slot machine 10 to an error state and to notify the occurrence of an error. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After performing the winning result corresponding processing, the section display second processing is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process relating to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such a process will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process ends.

  Next, an outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

  In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. When the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination processing that the small winning combination has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first to eighth re-game winnings has been established based on the winning-winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the re-game winnings has been established, the medal payout process is terminated as it is, and if any of the re-game winnings has been established, a re-game setting process for setting the game state to the re-game state is performed. Then, the medal payout process ends. In the start waiting process (step S204) described above, the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the re-game state.

  On the other hand, when the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts are paid out, and the medal payout process ends. For the payout of medals, specifically, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. When the count value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit, or when the count value has reached the upper limit during the addition of the number of payouts, the medal payout rotating plate is driven and medals are ejected from the hopper device 51. Payout to the medal tray 50 via the exit 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout amount display unit 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. When the current gaming state is the BB state, a process of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the remaining number-of-payout counter described below and subtracting the number of remaining payouts displayed on the remaining number-of-payouts display section 61 is performed. .

  Next, the RT state process in step S214 will be described based on the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether the gaming state is the fourth RT state by checking whether the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106. If it is the fourth RT state, the process proceeds to step S502, and a process of subtracting the number of fixed RT games is performed. Although a detailed description will be given later, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. is there. In a succeeding step S503, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining executable games in the fourth RT state has become 0 based on the processing result of the step S502. If the value becomes 0, a process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is performed in step S504, and then the present RT state process ends. By performing the processing in step S504, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the present RT state process ends. In this case, the fourth RT state is continued.

  If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the active line. If the transition outcome has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S507. After that, the process ends. If it is determined in step S505 that the transition roll has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S508, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, the second replay winning is determined. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. After that, the process ends. Further, in the case where the transition roll on the activated line is stopped in a game state other than the fourth RT state and the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and In step S507, the first RT setting flag is set, and the process ends.

  When the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the first RT state lottery table is selected. I do.

  FIG. 22 is a drawing table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of “Setting 3”. The first RT state lottery table differs from the normal game state lottery table (see FIG. 17) in that the point values PV of IV = 1 to 5 are different and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when the winning or non-winning of the combination is determined using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal gaming state, and the winning when IV = 1. Is about 1/67, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 is about 1 / 2.8. The odds of not winning any role are about 1.94.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22, when the winning is achieved when IV = 1, the normal replay winning is achieved, and when the winning is achieved when IV = 2, the first promotion replay 1 winning is achieved. = 3, the first promotion replay 2 wins, if IV = 4, the first promotion replay 3 wins, and IV = 5 wins In this case, the first promotion replay 4 wins. The probability of winning in any one of IV = 1 to 5 is approximately 7.30. The normal replay winning probability in the normal game state is also about 7.30. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, the winning combination is obtained with the same probability as that of the normal gaming state for each of the small role, re-game, and bonus roles, while the bonus of the re-game is given. Changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-game prize that does not shift to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize, a third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state is formed. To establish.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is generated not only when the push order bell is won, but also when the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established according to the operating sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have been performed.

  FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination, an operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a winning mode to be established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay winning or The third replay prize is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one of the six operation orders, and the first replay is associated with the other operation order. It is attached.

  In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, none of the above six operation sequences is associated with the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game. Therefore, in the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game, no win is made regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 even if the first promotion replays 2 to 4 are won.

  More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned to the first replay and the third replay, respectively, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned to the first replay and the first replay. In addition to the 3 re-games, the 6th re-game is sorted, the first promoted replay 3 is the 7th re-game in addition to the first and third re-games, and the first promoted replay 4 Although the eighth re-game is allocated in addition to the first re-game and the third re-game, in any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the re-game to be won is the first re-game and the third re-game. One of the games. This is for making it difficult to understand the operation order in which the third replay winning is achieved. That is, for example, if the first promotion replay is one type, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is also one type, and the third replay winning is intentionally established at the time of the first promotion replay winning. This may be possible. Note that this relationship is not limited to only the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, but the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S508 that the second replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S510, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay winning is established. If the third replay prize has been established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, and the process ends. I do.

  When the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. I do.

  FIG. 24 is a second RT state lottery table selected in the second RT state of “Setting 3”. The second RT state lottery table differs from the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22) in that the point values PV of IV = 1 to 10, 13, and 14 are different and are the same as the other index values IV. Are set. For this reason, when the winning or losing of the combination is determined using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 11, 12, 15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and IV = 1. The probability of winning at the time of is about 13.2, the winning is not at the time of IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning at the time of IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/5 of each. , IV = 9,10, the probability of winning is about 8.90. The probability of winning when IV = 13 is approximately 1/90, and the probability of winning when IV = 14 is approximately 1/131. The odds of not winning any role are about 1/150. That is, in the case of transition to the second RT state, the probability of departure is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize in which the game state does not shift, a second re-game prize in which the game shifts to the first RT state, a fourth re-game prize in which the game shifts to the third RT state, and a fifth re-game. The winning, the eleventh re-game winning, and the twelfth re-game winning that shift to the fourth RT state are established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won, the fall promotion replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, and the second promotion replay 1 Even when the player wins the 2 promotion replay 2, the transfer replay 1, and the transfer replay 2, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

  FIG. 23 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. In the case where the player has won the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the first replay prize or the second replay prize is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, any one of the first re-game winning, the fourth re-game winning, and the fifth re-game winning is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is always established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  In addition, the number given to the fourth re-game in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth re-game winning is established. “1” corresponds to a symbol combination that is a disjointed pattern, and “2” corresponds to a symbol combination in which the red 7, red 7, and black BAR are stopped in the middle stage (see FIG. 11). For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination which becomes a jumble is stopped and the fourth re-game winning prize is established, or the red 7 -The symbol combination that stops the middle stage of red 7 and black BAR stops, and the fourth re-game winning is established.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23D, when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay winning, the second replay winning, And the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning is established. In other words, when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, whether the first replay winning is established and the transition of the game state does not occur, or the second replay is performed. Either a winning is established and a transition to the first RT state occurs, or an eleventh re-game winning or a twelfth re-game winning is established and a transition to the fourth RT state occurs.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S510 that the third replay winning has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S513, and based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning has been achieved. When the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515. Then, the present process ends.

  When the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. I do.

  FIG. 25 is a drawing table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of “Setting 3”. The third RT state lottery table differs from the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24) in that point values PV of IV = 9 to 12 are different, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when the winning / non-winning determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9, 10 In the case of IV = 11 and 12, the probability of winning is 1 / 7.00 each. The odds of not winning any role are about 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the winning combination is obtained with the same probability as that of the second RT state for each of the small role, re-game, and bonus roles, while a prize of the re-game is given. Changes to a state different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, a first re-game prize that does not shift to the game state, a second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, and an eleventh and twelfth re-game prize that shifts to the fourth RT state. In addition to the above, a sixth re-game winning, a seventh re-game winning, and an eighth re-game winning where the gaming state does not shift, and a third re-game winning which shifts to the second RT state are established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Stop information is set as needed.

  FIG. 23 (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, one of the first re-game winning, the sixth re-game winning, the seventh re-game winning, and the third re-game winning regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Always holds. When the BAR replay 2 is won, one of the first re-game winning, the sixth re-game winning, the eighth re-game winning, and the third re-game winning regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Always holds.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S513 that the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S516, and the winning set in the previous payout determination process. Based on the winning combination, it is determined whether or not the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning has been achieved. If neither the eleventh replay prize nor the twelfth replay prize has been established, the RT state process ends. When the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, and the fourth RT setting flag is set in step S518. Then, after performing the fixed RT game number setting process in step S519, the process ends. Step S519 is processing for setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state, and this processing will be described later in detail together with the description of the fourth RT state.

  As described above, the transition to the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the fourth RT state is performed by the RT state processing. FIG. 26 collectively shows whether or not there is a transition between the states, as well as the transition and end moments of each state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT state, and the fourth RT state, the probability of being any one of the replay winnings except for IV = 48 to 51 (special lip A overlapping 1 etc.), which is an overlapping winning with the bonus (hereinafter, referred to as “1”) In the description, the “replay probability” is simply about 7.30. On the other hand, in the second RT state and the third RT state, the replay probability is about 1.53, which makes it possible to play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of medals held in the normal game state, the first RT state, and the fourth RT state. Become. The transition from the normal gaming state to the first RT state is made by stopping the transition roll, and the transition to the second RT state is made by the third re-game winning. In the second RT state, when the second re-game winning is established, the game shifts to the first RT state, and in a normal state, basically, the game stays in the normal game state and the first RT state. In the following description, for comparison with the first RT state to the fourth RT state, the normal gaming state is also referred to as the 0th RT state.

  In the second RT state and the third RT state, the RT state continues until the second re-game winning is established. The configuration for preventing the second re-game winning from being established will be described later. However, the number of staying games in the second RT state or the third RT state is variable as the number of games until the second re-game winning is established. Therefore, the second RT state and the third RT state are also called an infinite RT state. On the other hand, in the fourth RT state to be shifted by the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning, the staying game number is a fixed type of 10 games or 30 games, and is also referred to as a fixed RT state.

  In the following description, the 0th RT state (normal gaming state) and the 1st RT state are referred to as a normal RT state, as compared with the infinite RT state and the fixed RT state. Further, in order to easily understand that the replay probability is higher in the second RT state and the third RT state than in the 0th RT state, the first RT state, and the fourth RT state, the second RT state and the third RT state are referred to as a high RT state. The 0th RT state, the 1st RT state, and the 4th RT state are also referred to as a low RT state.

  Incidentally, the 0th RT state and the 1st RT state are also included in the infinite RT state because the number of staying games is variable. However, for ease of explanation, they will be classified and described as above.

  The normal RT state and the infinite RT state (the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state) can be shifted from the staying state to another infinite RT state, while the fixed RT state (the 4th RT state) is the infinite RT state. Transition to is not possible. In addition, the transition to the fixed RT state (the fourth RT state) is set so that it does not occur in the normal RT state (the 0th RT state and the first RT state), but can occur in the infinite RT state (the second RT state and the third RT state). Have been.

  Incidentally, the slot machine 10 has a characteristic configuration for the fourth RT state, and in the following description, the fourth RT state may also be referred to as a special RT state.

  Next, the bonus state process of step S215 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If the state is not the bonus state, a bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

  In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any one of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag has been set. If any of the winning flags has been set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning has been achieved based on the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning has been achieved, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set to the remaining number-of-payouts counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

  A "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, a "watermelon" symbol, a "first replay" symbol or a "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R. , Stop on the active line, a CB winning is achieved. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, a CB win is achieved regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached “2” instead of “3”. In the effective line setting process (step S209), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 Is set as an active line.

  In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 52, and “16384” is set as the point value of IV = 55 to 58. (For the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination, see FIG. 17 and the like). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 1 (probability of winning when IV = 55) is about 1 / 4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 2 (IV = 56). At the time of winning) is about 1 / 4.00, the probability of winning at CB middle and small role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1 / 4.00, and CB The probability of winning the small and medium role 4 (probability of winning when IV = 58) is about 1 / 4.00. No off event occurs.

  FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination, an operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a winning mode that is established. Although a detailed description is omitted, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, even if any of the CB small to medium role 1 to the CB small and medium role 4 is won, some small role prize is won. It always holds. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals are obtained when the first small win, the 27th small win, the 31st small win, the 36th small win to the 38th small win are established. When the payout is made and the second small part prize to the 26th small part prize, the 28th small part prize to the 30th small part prize, and the 32nd small part prize to the 35th small part prize, 14 sheets Medal payout is performed. That is, in the case of shifting to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables execution of a game (JAC game) of one game as a winning combination, and the single bonus winning (prize) ) May be provided.

  Returning to the description of the bonus state process, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB winning has not been established, it means that a bonus winning flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB prize or the second BB prize has been established.

  If any one of the BB winnings is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the BB setting is performed in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, the remaining payout number counter is set to 216, and the remaining payout number display section 61 displays 216. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals have been paid out in the BB state.

  By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the BB setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

  FIG. 29 is a BB state lottery table selected in the BB state to which the first BB or the second BB shifts. In the BB state lottery table, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 30, 34 to 58, and “21845” is set as the point value of IV = 31 to 33. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the first role during BB (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1/11, and the probability of winning the second role during BB (IV = 32, the probability of winning is about 1/20, and the probability of winning the third role in the BB (IV = 33, the probability of winning) is about 1 / 0.0 Becomes The odds of not winning any role are about 1 in 65,500.

  The winning probabilities of the first role in the BB, the second role in the BB, and the third role in the BB are common winning probabilities in the first BB and the second BB. In addition, the winning probability of the first role during BB, the second role during BB, and the third role during BB is a common winning probability regardless of the transition timing of the first BB or the second BB to the BB state. The winning probability of the third role in the BB in the first BB based on the special lip A duplication 1 winning and the third role in the BB in the first BB based on the special lip AB overlapping 1 winning are the same probability. That is, in any BB state, the lottery process is performed with reference to the common BB state lottery table.

  FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a winning combination, an operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a winning mode that is established. As described above, the first small winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the first role is won in the BB, one of the first small role prize, the 39th small prize prize, and the 40th small prize prize is won regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. It always holds. The ninth replay winning is also a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, when the second role is won during the BB, the ninth replay winning is always established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The third role in the BB in which the ninth re-game winning and the tenth re-game winning can be performed is different depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, which re-game winning is established. When the stop operation is performed, if any of the winnings can be made, the stop driving control is performed so that the replay game with the smaller number of slips wins. More specifically, the combination of the symbols in which the ninth re-game and the tenth re-game are won is common to the “first replay” symbol and the “second replay” symbol in the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. On the other hand, the left reel 32L is different. That is, on the left reel 32L, the target symbols of the ninth re-game are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, while the target symbols of the tenth re-game are the "youth" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol. .

  For example, in the three-bet game, when the left stop switch 42 is stopped at the timing when the seventh “red bell” symbol from the fourth “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper stage, the ninth replay is performed. Although both the seventh "Red Bell" symbol, which is the target symbol, and the eighth "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol of the tenth replay, can be stopped at the upper line on the activated line. In this case, stop drive control is performed so as to stop the seventh “red bell” symbol with a small number of slips in the upper stage. As a result, the ninth re-game winning can be established instead of the tenth re-game winning. Similarly, when the left stop switch 42 is operated to stop at the timing when the twelfth “white 7” symbol reaches the upper stage from the ninth “red 7” symbol on the left reel 32L, similarly, the thirteenth “young man” The ninth re-game is set to be easier to win than the tenth re-game, for example, the drive control is performed so that the twelfth "white bell" symbol, not the symbol, is stopped at the upper stage. In other words, if the player wishes to win the tenth replay, at the timing when the 0th "young" symbol, the 8th "watermelon" symbol, and the 13th "young" symbol arrive at the upper stage of the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation of the stop switch 42, and at another timing, a ninth replay prize is established.

  Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, the first role is won during the BB, and if the first small role winning, the 39th small role winning, and the 40th small role winning are achieved, nine medals are paid out. . Further, when the second role is won during the BB, the ninth re-game winning is established, and even when the third role is won during the BB, the ninth re-game winning is established. That is, in the BB state, one of the bell prize and the ninth replay, ie, the replay prize, is mainly established frequently. When a replay winning is established, medals are not paid out, but replays are given, so that the next game can be executed without the need for medals. Since the probability of departure in the BB state is about 1 / 65,500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

  If a negative determination is made in step S609 and one of the BB winnings is established, processing for setting a carryover command is performed in step S613. The carry-over command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to recognize that the bonus prize has not been established in the bonus winning game and a so-called carry-over state has been reached. Is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

  As described above, in a game played in the carryover state, winning of another bonus is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal gaming state (FIG. 17), when the player wins an overlapping role with the bonus (first BB, second BB, CB) of IV = 34 to 51, these bonuses are handled. The winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when the winning combination of each small role of IV = 34 to 51 or the replaying game is won, the winning flag of each of the small winning combinations and the replaying game is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is Not set, only the winning small part is valid. That is, the carry-over state can be said to be a state in which the lottery of the bonus is restricted.

  When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining number-of-payouts counter has become 0, and when it has become 0, a process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. In the end determination processing, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. The end determination processing will be described later in detail.

  As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the player wins the CB and wins the CB, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state returns to the gaming state at the time when the CB winning is achieved. For example, when the CB win is established in the normal game state, the game returns to the normal game state after the end of the CB state, and when the CB win is established in the third RT state, the third RT state is executed after the end of the CB state. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 irrespective of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. For this reason, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the game shifts to the normal game state. When shifting to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the CB state ends. When shifting to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24−3 × 24) medals until the BB state ends.

  Incidentally, in the BB state, when the player wins the second role during BB or the third role during BB and is given a replay, the remaining payout number counter is not subtracted. That is, the number of wins in the BB state for the second role during the BB or the third role during the BB does not affect the expected number of medals in the BB state.

  If none of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), the first BB winning, the second BB winning, and the CB winning are not established, and the carryover is performed. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set to the remaining number-of-payouts counter in steps S605 and S612, when the end determination processing is performed in step S614, In step S606, the state command is set. Here, the state command is a command transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). The status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c is set. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, the process ends.

<Outline of transition of game state and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

  When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the medal payout number in the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the transition outcome on the activated line, and the game state shifts to the BB state by the establishment of the BB winning. The transition is stopped on the activated line when a game is missed in the pushing order bell and the game is missed. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal gaming state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state, and the fourth RT Since transition replays 1 and 2 which are transition triggers to the state are not won, the transition from the normal gaming state to the second RT state to the fourth RT state does not occur (see FIG. 17).

  When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23A). . In the lottery process using the lottery table for the first RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state and the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the fourth RT state are not won. From the 1RT state, the state does not shift to the third RT state and the fourth RT state.

  When the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state by establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome stops on the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay prize is established when one of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the activated line when a game is missed in the pushing order bell and the game is missed. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is changed. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state by establishing a third re-game winning. In addition, when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome stops on the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay winning is established when the player wins the BAR replay 1 or the BAR replay 2 and operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23C). The second replay prize is established when one of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the activated line when a game is missed in the pushing order bell and the game is missed. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  Further, when the gaming state is the second RT state or the third RT state, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state by establishing the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning. The eleventh replay prize and the twelfth replay prize are established when the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23D). . As described above, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed. Therefore, even if the transition roll stops in the fourth RT state, the state does not transition to the first RT state. The lottery table for the fourth RT state will be described later, but in the fourth RT state, the second replay is not won. Therefore, the transition to the first RT state due to the second replay winning does not occur. When the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is set. The point where the gaming state shifts to the BB state when the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game is the same as the first RT state to the third RT state.

  In the present slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six types of gaming states: a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: a mode, an AT mode (assist time mode), a VB mode (virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), and a BB mode.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

  The BB mode is a display mode in which a transition is made when a first BB prize or a second BB prize is established, and is terminated when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

  When the mode shifts from the normal mode to the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be performed in the BB mode. Transition to AT Mode When the lottery is won, the mode is switched to the AT mode after the end of the BB mode. When the lottery to the AT mode has not been won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the end of the BB mode. When the mode is shifted from the AT mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the AT mode after the end of the BB mode. When the mode shifts from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VB mode after the end of the BB mode.

  The normal mode means that the push order bell is won, the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second promotion replay 2, the BAR replay 1, and the BAR replay. 2, a transition replay 1 and a transition replay 2 (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as “push order replay”), and the display mode is such that the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode is performed. Shift to AT Mode When the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the AT mode. It does not shift from the normal mode to the VB mode.

  The normal mode corresponds to each of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of the pressing order bell winning and at the time of the pressing order replay winning, so that it is rare to shift from the second RT state to the fourth RT state. It almost corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is In the second RT state to the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals is reduced by about 0.06 each time one game is performed.

  The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the pressing order bell win and the pressing order replay winning. In the AT mode, the LV. 1 mode to LV. The AT mode includes four AT modes, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in any of the AT modes than in the normal mode. Shift to VB Mode When the lottery is won, the mode shifts from the AT mode to the VB mode. Transition to VB Mode If the game has been played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the mode transitions from the AT mode to the normal mode.

  LV. 1 mode to LV. The four modes are set so that the probabilities of winning the shift to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery transition to the VB mode is LV. 4 mode is the highest, and LV. 1 mode is set to be lowest, and LV. 1 mode, LV. 2 mode, LV. 3 mode, LV. The setting is made so that the probability of winning the lottery transition to the VB mode is increased in the order of the four modes.

  The AT mode corresponds to each of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, and the CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the pressing order bell winning and the pressing order replay winning, so that the stop switch 42 is instructed by the player in the notified operating order. When the user operates the buttons # 44 to # 44, they correspond to the second RT state and the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is In the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is performed. In the AT mode, since at least 50 games continue after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, when shifting to the AT mode, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals. In the AT mode and in the second RT state or the third RT state, when the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won, the operation order to be the first replay winning is notified, and the eleventh replay winning or the There may be a case where the operation order for winning the 12 re-games is announced, and there are cases where the transition to the fourth RT state is not made and cases where the transition is made. These configurations will be described later in detail, but in the present slot machine 10, the AT mode ends by shifting to the fourth RT state.

  The VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the pressing order bell win and the pressing order replay winning, as in the AT mode. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that, when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize in the AT mode is notified in the AT mode. In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23B).

  The VB mode corresponds to each of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the fourth RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is reported both when the pressing order bell is won and when the pressing order replay is won. Thus, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation order. In the VB mode, when the gaming state at that time is the normal gaming state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is In the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is performed. In the VB mode, at least 25 games are continued after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. Therefore, when shifting to the VB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals. Also in the VB mode, when the transition replay 1 or the transition replay 2 is won, there is a case where the transition to the fourth RT state is not performed and a case where the transition is made according to the notification of the operation order. The point that the VB mode ends by shifting to the fourth RT state is the same as the AT mode, and such a configuration will be described later in detail.

  The transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player is increased will be described. Generally, the flow is to transition from the normal mode to the AT mode and return from the AT mode to the normal mode. In the AT mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, if a loop occurs in which the mode shifts from the AT mode to the VB mode and the mode returns to the AT mode from the VB mode, the player expects a greater increase in possessed medals. it can.

  In the AT mode, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four modes are set, and in each AT mode, the winning probability of the shift to the VB mode is different. When shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, basically, the LV. Shift to 1 mode. LV. In the first mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and the LV. A lottery for shifting to the two modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery transition to 2 mode, LV. The mode is shifted to the 2nd mode, and the winning probability of the shift to the VB mode is increased. LV. In the 2nd mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and the LV. A lottery for shifting to the three modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery transition to 3 mode, LV. The mode shifts to the 3 mode, and the winning probability of the shift lottery to the VB mode increases. And LV. In the 3 mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and the LV. A lottery for shifting to the 4 mode is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery transition to 4 mode, LV. The mode is shifted to the 4 mode, and the winning probability of the shift to the VB mode is increased.

  Therefore, when the mode is shifted to the AT mode, the LV. 1 mode → LV. 2 mode → LV. 3 mode → LV. By performing the promotion of the 4 mode and the AT mode, the transition probability to the VB mode is increased, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode is easily generated.

  As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player increases the number of owned medals in each of the display modes of the AT mode, the VB mode, and the BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of RT states and a plurality of states such as a BB state and a CB state are switched back and forth due to winning of each replay or stop of the transition. As described above, depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 at the time of the pressing order replay winning or the pressing order bell winning, the corresponding replay winning is established or the transition outcome is stopped. Further, in the AT mode or the VB mode, an increase in the number of possessed medals can be expected by notifying the operation order in which the first small winning combination can be established at the time of the pressing order bell winning.

  Here, when the display mode is the AT mode or the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified at the time of winning the push order bell or the push order replay as described above. There is no notification of the operation order at the time of the order bell or the push order replay winning. For this reason, the AT mode and the VB mode are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode from the viewpoint of whether or not the push order bell and the operation order at the time of the push order replay winning are notified. In other words, the AT mode and the VB mode are included in an advantageous section which is a section in which the operation order is notified and the winning rate of the small role or the like is changed, and the game can proceed in a situation advantageous to the player. . The slot machine 10 is configured so that a transition to the AT mode is performed by transitioning to the advantageous section, and a transition to the AT mode or the VB mode can occur. In other words, a normal section that is not an advantageous section In the AT mode or the VB mode.

  Note that while the lottery for transition to the AT mode is performed in the advantageous section, the transition lottery to the AT mode is not performed in the normal section. The state and the state before winning the AT mode can be referred to as a chance zone (CZ) as a state in which the transition to the AT mode is likely to occur.

  Hereinafter, the configuration regarding the display mode will be described.

  The configuration relating to the display mode is roughly divided into (1) a process relating to the shift lottery of the display mode, (2) a process for shifting the game state based on the result of the shift lottery of the display mode, and (3) a process based on the winning result. (4) Processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. Hereinafter, description will be made in order.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process relating to the display mode transition lottery of (1) is performed in the lottery result corresponding process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S701, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 as to whether or not the current game is an advantageous section. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section including the AT mode and the VB mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S702, executes the advantageous section shift lottery process, and ends the lottery result handling process.

  In the advantageous section shift lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 33, first, in step S801, the result of the current game lottery is grasped. Then, in step S802, an advantageous section shift lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 40, the advantageous section transition lottery table is set so that the transition rate to the advantageous section (the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery) differs depending on the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 39, the opportunity of the lottery shift to the advantageous section is as follows: strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, strong cherry overlap 1, weak cherry overlap 1 , Strong watermelon overlap 1, weak watermelon overlap 1, chance A overlap 1, chance B overlap 1, middle bell overlap 1, special lip A overlap 1, special lip A overlap 2, single first BB, single second BB (Hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). Regarding these transition triggers, the set point value PV is common regardless of the set value, and there is no setting difference in the winning probability. The winning probabilities of the advantageous section shift lottery are also set so that there is no setting difference. On the other hand, strong cherry overlap 2, weak cherry overlap 2, strong watermelon overlap 2, weak watermelon overlap 2, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 2, middle bell overlap 2, special lip AB overlap 1, special lip AB overlap 2 is set so that there is a setting difference in the winning probabilities. In general, the point value PV is set so that the setting 1 has the lowest winning probability and the setting 6 has the highest winning probability. Are collectively referred to as “non-motivating role”). Then, in the non-opportunistic roles in which there is a difference in the winning probabilities, the advantageous section shift lottery is not performed. In other words, an advantage section transition lottery is performed in which there is no difference in the winning probabilities when the transition opportunity has a common appearance rate, and the transition rate to the advantage section is common. In this way, regardless of the setting values of the gaming machines that can be installed in the gaming hall, the chances of shifting to the advantageous section become equal, and the inequality between the players can be eliminated. Become.

  After acquiring the lottery table in step S802, an advantageous section shift lottery is executed in step S803. Then, in step S804, it is determined whether or not the transfer lottery has been won. If not, the main lottery process ends. If the transfer lottery has been won, the process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed in step S805. By this processing, an affirmative determination can be made in step S701 of the lottery result corresponding processing (FIG. 32) after the next game. In a succeeding step S806, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the lottery to shift to the advantageous section has been won in the current game. Then, in step S807, the advantageous section shift winning process is executed, and then the advantageous section shift lottery process ends. The advantageous section shift winning process will be described later in detail.

  In the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S701 that the advantageous section flag has been set, that is, if the lottery transition to the advantageous section has been won before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether any of the AT mode winning flag and the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that it is in the state of winning the transition to the AT mode, and is set when the transition to the AT mode is won, and the operation mode is shifted to the AT mode. This flag is cleared at the time. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode, and is set when shifting to the AT mode, and when the AT mode is finally ended (from the AT mode to the VB mode or the like). This is a flag that is cleared during the transition to the specialization zone or the BB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First specified role processing>
The first specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the first specification combination process, a shift lottery is performed to determine whether to shift the display mode to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, an AT mode transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the transition probability to the AT mode is set according to the type of the lottery result (winning combination).

  Specifically, in the mode lottery table in the advantageous section stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning in each mode shift lottery is determined by the current display mode and the type of the game result that is the lottery trigger. It is set differently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 40, in addition to the above-mentioned shift trigger and non-trigger, the game result serving as the lottery trigger of the mode shift lottery during the advantageous section includes a normal replay, a push order replay, and a push order bell. Is set. In other words, the transfer lottery to the advantageous section is set so that there is no difference in the transfer rate due to the set value, while the transfer lottery to the AT mode etc. included in the advantageous section is different from the transfer rate according to the set value. Is set to be able to occur. In this manner, it is possible to make the chances of occurrence of the transition to the advantageous section equal and to make the medal increase / decrease mode and the increase rate in the advantageous section various. In the following description, these normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, transition trigger and non-trigger will be collectively referred to as a `` specific role '' as a role that triggers a lottery regarding the instruction function during the advantageous section. Name.

  In the transfer lottery table to the AT mode, the winning probability of the transfer lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. Further, in the transition lottery table to the AT mode, even if the same combination of the specified combination, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set to be different depending on the staying RT state. As shown in FIG. 40, for example, when the specific role is a strong cherry, the lottery to shift to the AT mode is won with a probability of 90% to 100%, while when the specific role is a weak cherry, 30% to 60%. It is set so that the player wins the transfer lottery to the AT mode with a probability of%, and the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the transfer lottery to the AT mode. A configuration in which the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the RT state in which the user is staying will be described later in detail.

  After acquiring the table for the AT mode shift lottery in step S901, an AT mode lottery process is executed in step S902. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and is compared with the lottery table acquired in step S901, thereby performing a lottery transition to the AT mode.

  In step S903, based on the processing result of step S902, it is determined whether or not a lottery transition to the AT mode has been won. If the lottery transition to the AT mode has been won, in step S904, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. By setting the AT mode winning flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S703 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32). In a succeeding step S905, a process of clearing the AT non-winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The AT non-winning flag is a flag that is set when an AT mode shift lottery is not won. In step S905, if the AT non-winning flag is set, it is cleared, and if it is not set, the state is maintained.

  In a succeeding step S906, it is determined whether or not the currently won AT mode is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that is started after passing through the additional specialization zone. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in the SAT mode, the AT mode is started with the number of games obtained by adding the number of games added in the additional specialization zone to the initial number of games 50. . Therefore, the advantage for the player is different between the normal AT mode and the SAT mode, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

  The shift lottery to the SAT mode is performed when the player wins the shift lottery to the AT mode (when the player wins in the lottery process of step S902), and the shift lottery is set according to the shift trigger and the type of display mode. This is performed based on the SAT mode transfer lottery table. As shown in FIG. 40, in the transfer lottery table for the SAT mode, the probability of winning the transfer lottery to the AT mode triggered by the strong watermelon is 50% to 100%, and 5% when the transfer lottery is won. Wins the -10% SAT mode.

  If it is determined in step S906 that the SAT mode has been won, a process of setting a specialized zone winning flag is executed in step S907. If a negative determination is made in step S906, or after the processing of step S907 is performed, the process proceeds to step S908. The processing in steps S908 to S911 is processing for setting the precursor mode.

  The precursor mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that indicates that the player has won the AT mode or the like is likely to occur. After each game in the precursor mode, a winning notification that the player has won the AT mode or the like is given. . The precursor mode is continued from 0 games to 32 games, and the number of continued games in the precursor mode is set to be different depending on the type of the winning AT mode or the like and whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won. If the AT mode or the like is simultaneously won with the bonus, a notification of the winning of the bonus is made after the precursor mode, and a notification that the AT mode or the like has been won after the completion of the bonus state. Done. When the number of precursor games is set to 0 games, the winning notification is performed without going through the precursor mode.

  Specifically, in step S908, first, a process of acquiring the precursor game number table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is performed. As shown in FIG. 41, in the precursor game number table, the number of precursor games to be selected is set to be different depending on whether or not the bonus and the bonus have been won. Specifically, for example, at the time of winning in the AT mode, if a bonus is simultaneously won, 0 games are selected at 80% and 1 to 5 games are selected at 20%, while simultaneous games are selected at the same time as the bonus. If no win is made, 0 game is always selected. Also, at the time of winning in the SAT mode, if the bonus is simultaneously won, 0 games are selected at 30% and 1 to 5 games are selected at 70%, while the bonus is not simultaneously won. 0 game is always selected. That is, in both the AT mode and the SAT mode, a winning notification is made in the winning game without going through the precursor mode if the winning is not performed simultaneously with the bonus. The number of games in the precursor mode is more likely to be greater than in the AT mode winning.

  In addition, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on the game result that has triggered the winning. For example, the duplication of the replay (ninth replay) and the bonus like the special lip A duplication 1 and the special lip A duplication 2 is a small role (strong cherry, A precursor mode longer than the overlapping role of the weak cherry and the bonus may be easily selected, or the relationship may be reversed.

  In step S909, based on the sign game number table acquired in step S908 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a process of lottery of the present sign mode game is performed. Then, in step S910, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The precursor counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game. When the precursor counter becomes 0, the precursor mode ends, and a winning notification that a transition lottery such as an AT mode has been won is performed.

  In step S911, a process of setting the precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81 as the sub-side control device is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described later in detail. After executing the processing of step S911, the first specific combination processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S903 that the lottery transition to the AT mode has not been won, the process advances to step S912 to execute the first processing when the AT is not won, and then ends the first specified combination processing. In the present embodiment, when the transfer lottery to the AT mode is performed, if the transfer lottery is not won, the advantageous section is terminated thereafter. This is a process for ending such an advantageous section. The AT non-winning first process will be described later in detail.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32), if the determination in step S703 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether any of the VB mode winning flag and the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when a shift lottery in the VB mode is won, and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, and is set when shifting to the VB mode, and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S705, a second specific combination process is executed in step S706. When an affirmative determination is made in step S705, a third specific combination process is executed in step S707.

<Second specified role processing>
The second specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the second specific combination process, an additional lottery in the AT mode is performed, or a shift lottery is performed to determine whether to shift the display mode to the VB mode or the additional specialization zone. In addition, the addition refers to adding (increasing) the number of remaining games (remaining number) in the AT mode or the like, and the number of added games corresponds to a value to be added to the number of continuing games (a value to be increased). . The additional specialization zone indicates a state in which the additional number of the continuous games in the AT mode occurs with a high probability over a plurality of games. In the second special combination process, the process of raising the level of the AT mode is performed, and the process of adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode is performed.

  That is, in step S1001, a process of grasping the AT mode level is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the LV. 1 mode to LV. Four AT mode levels are provided, and each level has a different transition probability to the VB mode. Therefore, step S1001 determines that the current AT mode level is LV. 1 mode to LV. It is determined which of the four modes it is.

  In step S1002, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level grasped in step S1001 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probability to the VB mode is set in accordance with the type of the game result which is a lottery trigger. As shown in FIG. 40, for example, in the strong cherry 1 and the weak cherry, the transition probability to the VB mode is set higher in the strong cherry 1 than in the weak cherry. In addition, in the VB mode lottery table of each level, the transition probability to the VB mode is different overall, and the LV. LV. The LV.2 mode has a higher transition probability to the VB mode so that the LV. LV. The LV.3 mode has a higher transition probability to the VB mode so that the LV. LV. The four modes are set so that the transition probability to the VB mode is higher.

  In step S1003, a VB mode shift lottery is performed using the table obtained in step S1002 and the lottery counter obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1003 corresponds to the VB mode winning. In the present embodiment, when the lottery for the transition to the VB mode is performed in response to the overlapping role with the bonus, the lottery for the transition to the VB mode is not won. That is, the transition to the BB mode and the transition to the VB mode are prevented from overlapping as much as possible, and the advantage of the overlapping role with these bonuses is not excessively increased.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a process of setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S1005. Thereafter, in steps S1006 to S1009, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, a precursor game number table is obtained in step S1006, the precursor game number is randomly selected in step S1007, the precursor game number is set in step S1008, and the precursor command is set in step S1009, and the second identification is performed. The winning combination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1004 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not the VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S1010. Steps S1010 to S1013 are processing for promoting the AT mode level.

  In step S1010, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a promotion lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. A plurality of tables for promotion lottery are provided according to the level of the AT mode. Table for one mode, LV. 2 mode table, LV. A table for three modes and a total of three tables (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation where the user stays in the LV.4 mode) are provided. In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set in accordance with the type of the game result that is a lottery trigger. For example, between the strong cherry and the weak cherry, the strong cherry has a higher probability of winning the promotion lottery than the weak cherry. Further, in the table for each AT mode, LV. LV.1 mode table. The LV.2 mode table has a lower promotion probability so that the LV. LV. The table for three modes is set so that the probability of promotion is lower, and is set so that it is difficult to be promoted to the next level as the level of the AT mode is promoted.

  In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1010 is a promotion win. If the promotion has been won, in step S1012, an AT mode promotion process is performed. In this process, the level flag provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level to the next higher level flag. After that, in step S1013, a process of setting the promotion command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode of the promotion destination. The display control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so as to perform the effect for the AT mode at the level of the promotion destination. As an effect for the AT mode in the auxiliary display unit 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set in accordance with the level of the AT mode. In addition to notifying that the level has been promoted, control is performed so that an effect for the AT mode is performed with a background color corresponding to the level to which the level is promoted.

  If it is determined in step S1011 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing in step S1013 has been performed, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode is performed in steps S1014 to S1021.

  That is, in step S1014, an additional lottery process is performed for the number of games in the AT mode. In the additional lottery process, an AT mode additional lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 42, the AT mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning in the additional lottery differs according to the type of the lottery result.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the additional lottery in the number of games in the AT mode is set such that a specific role including a push order bell, a push order replay, and a normal replay is set as a trigger for a transition trigger and a non-trigger. I have. As shown in FIG. 42, among the specific roles, the push order bell, the push order replay (hereinafter, also collectively referred to as “push order role”) and the normal replay are compared with the transition trigger role and the non-trigger role. The winning probability of the extra lottery in the AT mode is set low. For this reason, it is more probable that the number of games in the AT mode will be added when the transition opportunity or the non-opportunity appears than when the push role or the normal replay appears as the lottery result of each game. Then, it is considered that the player proceeds with the game while expecting the transition opportunity winning or the non- opportunity winning on the premise of this. On the other hand, the pushing sequence and the normal replay have a higher winning probability in each game as compared with the shift trigger and the non-trigger, and can be said to be relatively easy to appear game results. By adopting such a combination structure, it is possible to reduce the presence as an incentive role by adding a pushing sequence or a normal replay, and to enhance the surprisingness when the addition occurs. In addition, there is a chance that the extra time based on the pushing sequence or the normal replay can be actually generated in the AT mode (more specifically, once the initial game number of 50 games is executed two or three times, one time is given). Is an appearance rate that is likely to occur). Therefore, it is possible to preferably generate unexpected surprising additions such as the above-mentioned pushing sequence and the addition triggered by the normal replay.

  In a succeeding step S1015, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1016 whether or not the bonus winning flag has been set. If the bonus winning flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S1017 to perform a lottery process for the number of additional games in the AT mode. In the lottery process of the number of additional games, the table for the number of additional games in the AT mode is obtained from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and the counter for the lottery is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In the AT mode additional game number lottery table, as shown in FIG. 42, the number of additional games is set differently according to the type of the special combination. For example, in the strong cherry, the addition of the AT mode from 20 games to 200 games is performed, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, in the weak cherry, 300 games are added from 5 games, and the average number of added games is 20 games, and the number of games in which the weak cherry is larger than the strong cherry may be selected. The average value is set so that the strong cherry has a larger number of games.

  In step S1018, a process for adding the number of games in the AT mode is performed. In this processing, a value corresponding to the number of additional games randomly selected in step S1017 is stored in a counter for managing the number of continuous games in the AT mode (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). Perform the addition process. In a succeeding step S1019, an additional notification process for notifying that the additional lottery has been won and the number of games is performed.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in the present slot machine 10, a plurality of additional notification modes are set when an additional number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, as a mode of the additional notification, the game in which the additional notification is performed has a plurality of different modes, and the additional notification is performed in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional occurs or the game in which the additional occurs. When performing (in the following description, it is also referred to as “immediate notification”), when performing additional notification in which the notification game is determined after the game after the game in which additional information has been generated (“ Post notification).

  In the instant notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an additional occurs is, for example, a case in which a precursor mode occurs or a continuous effect occurs in response to a game in which an additional occurs, and A game that can be continued from the game in which the addition has occurred to a plurality of games is referred to as a series of games. The series of games also includes a case where a continuous effect does not occur.For example, a mode in which a corresponding effect does not occur in a game in which an additional game has occurred, and an additional notification occurs after the next game or a plurality of games, The game in which the additional information is generated and the game until the additional information is generated are a series of games, and the mode of the additional information is also included in the immediate information.

  On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the post-decision notification game that is a game after the game in which the extra load occurs is not determined in the game in which the extra load occurs, but is, for example, immediately before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the instant notification described above in that the notification timing is determined a posteriori with the progress of the AT mode such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an additional game has occurred.

  An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the immediate addition notification is for notifying the number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG), and the later addition notification is for the remaining games in the AT mode or the like. The number will be reported later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a remaining number counter HG for display and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining section remaining games ZG) is: It becomes equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the add-on counter BG. The remaining display counter HG is decremented by one each time the game is consumed, and the postponing counter BG is not decremented even if the game is consumed, unless a postponing notification is generated.

  As shown in FIG. 43, in the present embodiment, while the AT mode is being played, the remaining game number (remaining game number display ZGP) on the display displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is a predetermined number (1). , That is, when the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined number (1), a postponement notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is notified that the number of games (150 in the figure) corresponding to the post-addition counter BG has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the amount of the notification (representing 0 in the figure), and the display remaining counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount by the post-addition notification, and the remaining game in the auxiliary display unit 65 is updated. The number display ZGP is also a value corresponding to the remaining display counter HG (one game is exhausted in FIG. 150).

  As described above, when the additional notification is selected at the time of additional winning, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the remaining number of games (the advantageous section remaining game number ZG) in the actual AT mode or the like. On the other hand, when the immediate notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual remaining game number in the AT mode or the like (advantage section remaining game number ZG). In the slot machine 10, the post-addition counter BG is referred to at the time of additional winning, and whether the post-addition notification or the immediate addition notification is selected differs depending on the current value of the post-addition counter BG.

  In the additional notification processing in step S1019, a game for performing additional notification is set, and when additional notification is performed in the game, the execution timing of the additional notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 36, first, in step S1101, a process of grasping the post counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In a succeeding step S1102, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process of determining whether the additional notification this time is the post notification or the immediate notification. In the notification game lottery process, a post-load lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not post-load notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-load counter BG grasped in step S1101.

  As shown in FIG. 44, the post-addition lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the post-addition notification differs depending on the value of the post-addition counter BG and the type of the specific combination that has triggered the additional win. I have. For example, at the time of additional loading triggered by a strong cherry, if the additional loading counter BG is less than 30, the additional loading notification is selected at 20% (immediate loading notification is selected at 80%), while If the additional counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the additional information is selected at 10%, and if the additional counter BG is 100 or more, the additional information is selected at 5%, and so on. The setting is such that the selection rate of the post-notification becomes lower as the post-addition information becomes lower.

  In addition, the types of specific roles that triggered the additional winning are more various than so-called rare roles (low-probability trigger results, low-probability results) with relatively low winning probabilities such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. A so-called normal role (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) having a relatively high winning probability, such as a push order replay or various push order bells, has a higher post-selection selectivity when the value of the post-addition counter BG is small. Is set. More specifically, in the notification game lottery process triggered by the various push order replays and the various push order bells, when the add-on counter BG is less than 30, the add-on notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

  As described above, the additional counter BG is given an additional notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number, and the additional notification is subtracted. Therefore, basically, as the game in the AT mode progresses, the value of the add-on counter BG often increases. Conversely, in the early stage of the game in the AT mode, the value of the add-on counter BG becomes 0 or It is likely that the value is small.

  In other words, if the player wins at the beginning of the game in the AT mode, there is a high probability that the post notification will be selected. In the early stage of the AT mode, the post notification is always selected. As a result, after the start of the AT mode, the rear counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

  After executing the notification game lottery process in step S1102, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not a win has been made. In the case where the post-addition winning is not selected and the immediate notification is selected, in step S1104, a process of adding the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S1105, a notification timing setting process is performed to set at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process for setting at which timing in the current game the additional notification is performed.

  The additional notification in one game is set so that the execution timing is different depending on the number of additional games. More specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 45, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are arranged in the stop operation order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, the stop operation of the first reel, the stop operation of the second reel, and the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of the reels, a timing at which a stop ON operation is performed to determine that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed, a timing at which the stop OFF operation is performed to determine that the pressing operation is completed, and Is set.

  Here, the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be supplementarily described. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the most front side to an operation position arranged on the most rear side. In the situation where the sensors are arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and when the operation is performed from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are changed. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation, which is a pressing operation of stop switches 42 to 44, has been performed based on the switching of the detection signal from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

  The stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward the initial position by a spring or the like. Therefore, when the user releases the hand from the stop switches 42 to 44 and does not apply the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a switch from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop OFF operation has been performed based on the detection signal being switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, indicating that the pressing operation of stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed.

  The additional notification is set so as to be able to occur as a stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 at any of the stop ON operation and the stop OFF operation. That is, in the game in which the additional information is generated, the additional effect may occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation is completed.

  In the additional information execution timing table, when the number of additional games is relatively small, for example, when 5 to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. The timing at which the stop OFF operation of the first reel is performed is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The third reel stop OFF operation (when all reels are stopped) is selected at 30%. In this case, the operation during the stop OFF operation is more easily selected than the operation during the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more easily selected.

  On the other hand, if the number of games to be added is relatively large, for example, if 100 or more games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. Is performed, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( (When all reels are stopped) is selected at 45%. Also in this case, the operation during the stop OFF operation of each reel is easier to select than the operation during the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively easier to select.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the additional information is set to be more easily generated at the time of the stop OFF operation than at the time of the stop ON operation of each reel. When the first to third reels are compared, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, and the stop operation of the second reel is most likely to be selected next. It is set so that it is most difficult to select during operation.

  In view of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the easier it is to select the timing particularly when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. In other words, if the additional notification is detected in advance, and if the additional notification is not generated by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly likely to generate a large number of additional games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

  In step S1105, the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game is set based on the additional notification execution timing table. Thereafter, the main addition notification process ends. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified as the immediate addition notification in the current game and the information regarding the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game are executed after the main additional notification process. The additional command is set in the additional command setting process (step S1020). The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including these information sets the additional notification effect based on the information. This processing will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1103 that the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a process of adding the number of additional games this time to the additional counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1107, a process of setting a post-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed, and then the main addition notification process ends.

  The post-addition flag indicates to the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 that the post-addition notification should be performed when the value of the post-addition counter BG is larger than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. This is a flag for grasping. Also, in this case, in the additional command setting process executed subsequent to the final additional notification process, information indicating that no additional notification is generated in the current game is set in the additional command. The display control device 81 that has received the additional command including this information performs control so that additional information is not generated in the current game.

  Returning to the description of the second specifying combination process (FIG. 35), after executing the additional notification process in step S1019, an additional command including the processing result of the additional notification process is transmitted to the display control device 81 in step S1020. After performing the process of setting as the output target, the second specific role process ends. The additional command includes information that an additional has occurred, the number of additional games, and information on an object to be added.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1021. In step S1021, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific role processing ends. The AT mode additional flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the additional condition of the number of games in the AT mode is satisfied. As will be described in detail later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode addition flag is set, the addition of the AT mode is performed at the end of the bonus. That is, the game in which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is won simultaneously.

  If it is determined in step S1015 that the additional lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, a shift lottery to the specialization zone is executed. In other words, when the specific combination is won during the AT mode, if the lottery to shift to the VB mode or the additional number of games in the AT mode is not won, the shift lottery to the specialized zone is performed. In the specialization zone lottery process, a specialization zone shift lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a lottery for determining whether to shift the display mode to the specialization zone is performed by a lottery counter or the like. Do. As shown in FIG. 40, the specialization zone transfer lottery table is set such that the transfer lottery winning probability differs depending on the type of the specific combination. As described above, among the transfer triggers, the overlapping role with the bonus is not selected in the shift to the VB mode in the lottery, but as shown in FIG. 42, the overlapping role with the bonus is the game in the AT mode. It is set so that the lottery is always won (100% probability is won). Therefore, the special zone shift lottery is not performed when the overlapping role with these bonuses is triggered, and the special zone shift lottery is at the time of winning a strong cherry or a weak cherry that is not a duplicate role with the bonus, The setting is made so that when the lottery for shifting to the VB mode and the number of games to be added are not won, the winning can be achieved. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherry is won with a probability of 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherry is won with a 0.5% probability. On the other hand, in the special zone shift lottery based on strong watermelon, the winning is performed with a probability of 15%, and in the special zone shifting lottery based on weak watermelon, the winning is performed with a probability of 5%.

  In step S1023, based on the processing result in step S1022, it is determined whether or not the lottery transfer to the specialized zone has been won. If the winning has been achieved, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed in step S1024. In step S1025, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table is performed. In step S1026, a lottery process of the precursor game number is performed. In step S1027, a process of setting the precursor game number is performed. Is performed, and then the second specific role processing ends. The processing of steps S125 to S1028 is, for example, the same as the processing of steps S1006 to S1009, and is a processing for setting the precursor mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1023, and the lottery to shift to the VB mode, the lottery to add the number of games in the AT mode, and the lottery to shift to the specialization zone are not won, then in step S1029, the pseudo addition notification After performing the processing, the second specifying combination processing ends. The pseudo-addition notification process is a process for maintaining a sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won.

<Third specified role process>
Next, the third specific role processing executed in step S707 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode and a shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the specialization zone are performed. That is, in step S1201, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the AT mode is performed. This process is the same as the process in step S1014. The lottery process in step S1014 and the lottery process in step S1201 may have different winning probabilities of additional lottery.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1201 is an additional winning result. If it is determined that an additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1203 whether a bonus winning flag has been set. If the bonus winning flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S1204, and a lottery process for the number of additional games in the AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1205, an additional processing for the number of games in the AT mode is performed, an additional notification processing is performed in step S1206, and processing for setting the additional command as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed in step S1207. Then, the third specific combination process ends. Steps S1203 to S1207 are the same as steps S1016 to S1020. The number of additional games may be different between the lottery process in step S1016 and the lottery process in step S1204.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, a shift lottery to the specialization zone is executed. In other words, when the specific combination is won in the VB mode, the lottery for shifting to the specialization zone is performed even if the additional lottery in the AT mode is not won. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S1022 described above, and is performed based on the specialized zone shift lottery table (FIG. 40). The processing of steps S1210 to S1216 is the same as the processing of steps S1023 to S1029. If it is determined in step S1203 that the bonus winning flag has been set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1207, and the third specific role process ends. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

  The description returns to the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After executing any one of the steps S704, S706 and S707, it is determined in a step S708 whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a pushing order replay or a pushing order of a pushing order bell. . If it is determined that the winning combination has been won, the CPU executes a pushing winning combination process in step S709. The pushing sequence process will be described later in detail.

  If a negative determination is made in step S708, or after the process of step S709 is performed, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, it is determined whether or not a special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the special zone flag is set based on winning the shift lottery to the SAT mode or the shift lottery to the special zone, and then the shift to the special zone occurs. This flag is set when the game has been completed (when the seventh replay prize has been established). If the specialized zone flag has been set in step S710, specialized zone processing is executed in step S711. If a negative determination is made in step S710, or after the process of step S711 is performed, the lottery result handling process ends.

<Specialized zone processing>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the specialized zone processing, first, in step S1301, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In a succeeding step S1302, an additional game number lottery process in the AT mode is performed. In a succeeding step S1303, an additional processing for the number of games in the AT mode is performed. Then, in step S1304, additional information processing is executed, and in step S1305, an additional command is set, and then the specialized zone processing ends. Steps S1302 to S1305 are the same as steps S1017 to S1020. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the additional game number lottery process in step S1302 than in the additional game number lottery process in step S1017 (FIG. 42). Further, in the specialization zone, it is set so that an additional game number in the AT mode always occurs regardless of the game result (FIG. 42).

  As described above, in the lottery result correspondence processing, the shift lottery to the advantageous section is performed unless the area is in the advantageous section, and the shift lottery to the AT mode or the VB mode or the continuation of the AT mode if the area is in the advantageous section. Processing for adding the number of games is performed. In other words, even if the specific role is won, if it is a normal section instead of an advantageous section, processing for shifting to the AT mode or the VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode, and the like are basically performed. And its implementation is limited. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section in which the execution of the processing related to the instruction function such as the AT mode is restricted as compared with the advantageous section. If the player has won the transfer lottery to the AT mode or the VB mode, a notification that the player has won the transfer lottery is given after a precursor game. Therefore, hereinafter, a process for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery will be described.

<Process for shifting game state based on result of display mode shift lottery>
(2) In the processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode shift lottery, processing for notifying that the player has won the display mode shift lottery and notification for shifting the game state are performed. And the processing for performing it. Therefore, first, a process related to notification that the transfer lottery has been won will be described.

<Mode transition notification processing>
The notification that the transfer lottery has been won is performed in the mode transfer notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined in step S205 that the bet number is the specified number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The counting of the number of precursor games is performed in a winning result correspondence process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by one each time one game is consumed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notifying process ends.

  If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1402 whether a bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the present sign mode is the sign mode triggered by the bonus winning. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1403, and the mode transition notification process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command, for example, displays “Bonus determined!” On the auxiliary display unit 65 to notify that the bonus has been won. It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (one of the first BB and the second BB) may be notified together.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the AT mode and the like are simultaneously won, the winning notification of the AT mode and the like is performed at the end of the bonus notified in step S1403. The process related to the winning notification will be described in detail later. However, when the winning notification such as the AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification, the winning notification such as the AT mode is set in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1403. It is good to set a command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the present sign mode is the sign mode triggered by the AT mode winning. If the AT mode winning flag has been set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1405. In step S1406, an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning of the AT mode shift lottery. Then, in step S1407, the AT mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command notifies the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like that the AT mode shift lottery has been won. This notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1407, the mode transition notification process ends.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of the winning notification in the SAT mode is different from the mode of the winning notification in the AT mode. Therefore, in step S1407, an AT mode winning notification command may be set to include information on whether the mode is the SAT mode. The mode of the notification of the winning in the AT mode and the mode of the notification of the winning in the SAT mode may be different as long as the player can be identified. It is better that the mode is more flashy than the mode of winning notification in the AT mode.

  It should be noted that the winning mode of the AT mode and the SAT mode may be shared. By doing so, it is possible to make it appear as if the content being won has been promoted from the AT mode to the SAT mode during the period from the AT mode winning notification game to the start notification game. The delay caused by the difference between the game and the start notification game can be eliminated.

  If it is determined in step S1404 that the AT mode winning flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1408 whether the VB mode winning flag has been set. That is, it is determined whether or not the present sign mode is the sign mode triggered by the VB mode winning. If the VB mode winning flag has been set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1409. Then, in step S1410, a VB notification flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state in accordance with winning in the shift lottery of the VB mode. Then, in step S1411, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies the fact that the VB mode shift lottery has been won by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process in step S1411, the mode transition notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1408 that the VB mode winning flag has not been set, the process advances to step S1412. In step S1412, it is determined whether the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode transition notification process ends. If the flag has been set, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed in step S1413. Then, in step S1414, a process of setting a special zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh replay winning. After executing the processing of step S1414, the special zone winning notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1415, and then the mode transition notification processing is ended. The display control device 81 that has received the special zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the special zone has been won.

  That is, for the AT mode, the VB mode, and the specialization zone that shifts through the sign mode, the AT mode shift lottery and the VB mode shift lottery are won based on the bet operation when the number of signs games in the sign mode becomes zero. Only the notification that the game has been made is performed, and the AT mode, the VB mode, and the specialization zone are not started even if the number of precursor games becomes zero. This is because the AT mode or the VB mode as a display mode involves a transition of a game state, specifically, the AT mode is started by transitioning to a second RT state, and the VB mode is started by transitioning to a third RT state. It is because it is done. Note that the specialization zone may not be accompanied by the transition of the gaming state (from the third RT state to the third RT state). However, in the present embodiment, the seventh replay winning game in the third RT state is set as the start game. The processing configuration is as described above.

  As described above, the state is shifted to the second RT state when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, and the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are shifted to the third RT state. , And moves to the case where the fourth and fifth replay winnings are established. Then, the case where the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, or the case where the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay winnings are established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of the promotion replay winning corresponds to the third replay winning. Therefore, if the player has won the lottery transition to the AT mode or the VB mode, then, in the game that has won the role of shifting the game state, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified, The game state can be shifted. It should be noted that the notification as a preparation state (for example, ““) is made after the notification of winning in the AT mode or the VB mode shift lottery is performed until the AT mode or the VB mode is started (until the game state shifts). "Preparing".

<Explanation on transition of display mode>
The process for notification for shifting the gaming state is performed in the pushing sequence process (step S709) in the lottery result correspondence process (FIG. 32). Here, prior to the description of the pressing sequence process, an outline of the case where the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

<Outline of push order information production>
The notification of the operation order at the time of the winning of the pressing order (pressing order notification, pressing order notification effect, sequence notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68. Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the pressing order is won when the operation order to be notified this time is middle → right → left. The notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 47A, in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three button displays arranged in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) The number 1 is attached to the middle button display (corresponding to the switch 43) and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Thereby, the player can recognize that the winning combination in the current game and that the first stop switch to be operated is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display indicates a numeral indicating that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is displayed, and a numeral 3 is displayed on the left button display.

  When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, the middle display of the button corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. The button display is enlarged. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

  When the player operates the right stop switch 44, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, as shown in FIG. The button display is enlarged. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

  The execution timing of the push order notification will be described. During the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation after the acceleration period, the push order notification is performed. Is set to be executed. As described above, the pressing order is notified at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, so that the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. Can be desired, and the game can proceed at a good tempo.

<Pushing sequence processing>
Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48, of the pushing-sequence process executed in step S709 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 32).

  In step S1501, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1501 is a case where the first re-game or the third re-game is won depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero after winning the lottery transition to the AT mode in the mode transition reporting process (FIG. 46). is there.

  If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1503, a process for notifying the push order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the third re-game, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified (see FIG. 23A). After that, in step S1504, a process of setting the push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, is performed, and then the final push sequence process ends. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

  In the case where the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is notified in step S1503, basically, the lottery to shift to the AT mode is won, and the winning notification in the AT mode is performed via the precursor mode. It is assumed that the state has been changed and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery tables in the second RT state and the third RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even during the AT mode, the gaming state may fall from the second RT state to the first RT state due to an erroneous operation or the like. Even in such a case, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether the current lottery result is one of fall replays 1-3. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1505 is a case where the first re-game or the second re-game is won according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the above-described AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag has been set, in step S1507, a process for notifying the push order of the first replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game and the second re-game, the operation order corresponding to the first re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1508, a process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push sequence process ends.

  As described above, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation where the lottery to shift to the AT mode has been won, the operating state corresponding to the third replay winning is notified, and the gaming state is changed to the first replay winning. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the push-sequence combination process ends without performing the push-sequence notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, the first re-game winning is established, and the third re-game winning is established. , There is.

  In addition, when the fall notification replay 1 to 3 is won in a state where the AT notification flag is set, the operation state corresponding to the first replay prize is notified and the game state is shifted to the first RT state. It becomes possible not to make it do. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, the push-sequence combination process is terminated without performing the push-sequence notification process. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends and the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established due to the winning of the fall replays 1 to 3 and the RT state. Shifts from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

  Further, for example, in the first RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning in the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the third replay winning, and the third replay winning is established. Even if the player has performed the game (even if the game has shifted to the second RT state), the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the player accidentally shifts to the second RT state without winning the AT mode, the player immediately shifts to the first RT state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1509 is a case where the first re-game, the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is won according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the above-described AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, in step S1511, it is determined whether the VB notification flag or the special zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery transition to the VB mode in the mode transition reporting process (FIG. 46). is there. Further, the special zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery transition to the special zone in the mode transition reporting process (FIG. 46). is there.

  When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1512, a process for notifying the push order of the fourth re-game or the fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23 (b)). After that, in step S1513, a process of setting the push order notification command is performed, and then the final push sequence process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1510, the pressing sequence process ends without performing the process for reporting the pressing sequence. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1511, a process for notifying the push order of the first replay is performed in step S1507, and a process for setting a push order notification command is performed in step S1508. This completes the pressing process. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning in the VB mode or the specialization zone, and during the AT mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay prize is performed. If it is not in the mode, the push order notification effect is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1514 whether the current lottery result is a BAR replay. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1514 is a case where any one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth to eighth re-games wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, it is determined in step S1515 whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag has been set. If the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1517, a process for notifying the pushing order of the seventh replay is executed. Specifically, of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth to eighth re-games, the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game prize is notified (see FIG. 23C). After that, in step S1518, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the final push sequence process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1515, the push-sequence combination process is terminated without performing the process for reporting the push-sequence. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1516, a process for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is performed in step S1503, and a process of setting a pressing order notification command in step S1504 is performed. The full push combination process ends. Therefore, when the player wins the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or the specialization zone, if the player is in the AT mode, a press order notification effect corresponding to the third replay prize is performed and the state shifts to the second RT state. Occurs, and if it is not in the AT mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1514, it is determined in step S1519 whether the current lottery result is transfer replay 1 or transfer replay 2. The case where the affirmative determination is made in step S1519 is a case where one of the first re-game, the second re-game, the eleventh re-game, and the twelfth re-game is won depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, it is determined in step S1520 whether the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1521 whether the transition notification flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The transition notification flag is a flag that is set when a condition enabling transition to the fourth RT state is satisfied. The process for setting the transition notification flag will be described later in detail. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for transition is set, in step S1522, a process for notifying the push order of the eleventh replay or the twelfth replay is executed. Specifically, among the first re-game, the second re-game, the eleventh re-game, and the twelfth re-game, the operation order corresponding to the eleventh re-game win or the twelfth re-game win is notified (FIG. 23 ( d)). After that, in step S1523, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the final push sequence process ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1520, the push-sequence combination process is terminated without performing the push-sequence notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1521, a process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is performed in step S1507, and a process of setting a pressing order notification command in step S1508 is performed. This completes the pressing process. For this reason, when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won without satisfying the condition enabling the transition to the fourth RT state, if in the AT mode, a pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay prize is performed. If it is not in the AT mode, the press order notification effect is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1519, it is determined in step S1524 whether or not the current lottery result is a pressing order bell win. If it is the push order bell winning, in step S1525, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it is set, in step S1526, a push order notification process for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small win is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1527, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the final push sequence process ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1524 or step S1525, the full-press sequencer process ends without performing the process for reporting the press sequence.

  In addition, when the push bell is won in a situation where the AT notification flag is set (when a negative determination is made in step S1525), if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, it corresponds to the first small win. It is better not to notify the pressing order. By doing in this way, the transition outcome is stopped, and the gaming state is shifted to the first RT state, that is, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, and the gaming state is shifted to the high RT state. It becomes possible.

<Process for shifting display mode based on winning result>
<Winning result processing>
Next, a description will be given of a process performed when a combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state wins as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above (3). This process is performed in a winning result corresponding process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S1601, a game number management process is executed. As will be described in detail later, in this game number management process, in addition to the counting of the number of precursor games in the above-mentioned precursor mode, the counting of the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the like are performed. In a succeeding step S1602, a postponement notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the post-addition notification described with reference to FIG. 43, and sets the post-addition flag based on the display remaining number counter HG reaching a predetermined value (1). Is performed, the additional notification (the additional notification) corresponding to the additional counter BG is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the remaining display counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared on condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

  In a succeeding step S1603, it is determined whether or not the current stop result indicates that a third replay winning is established. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1604, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. The case where the flag for AT notification is not set is a case where the third replay prize is established without the condition for shifting to the AT mode being satisfied, and in this case, the processing for starting the AT mode is not performed, The prize result handling process ends as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1605 whether the current display mode is in the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. Incidentally, in addition to the AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to the RT state higher than the AT mode (VB mode, additional special zone), the AT mode flag is set to the corresponding flag (VB mode flag, (Specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1605, the case where it is determined that the AT mode flag is set includes the case where the vehicle is in the AT mode, the case where the vehicle is in the VB mode, and the case where the vehicle is in the specialized zone. .

  If the AT mode flag has been set in step S1605, the display mode is already the AT mode, and the main winning result handling process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag has not been set, a process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1606 to S1609.

  That is, in step S1606, the AT mode flag is set. In a succeeding step S1607, an AT mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command notifies the start of the AT mode from the next game by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1608, counting of the AT mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuous games in the AT mode is set in an AT mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106.

  After performing the processing in step S1608, it is determined in step S1609 whether the specialized zone flag is set. A positive determination in step S1609 means that the currently won AT mode is the SAT mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1610, the additional special zone start (Steps S1619 to S1621). The process for starting the additional specialization zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the winning result handling process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1603 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay winnings have been established as a result of the current stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1612, it is determined whether the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, the fourth and fifth replay winnings are established without winning the VB mode shift lottery. In this case, the VB mode start processing is not performed. Then, the winning result handling process ends. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1613 whether the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, and the main winning result handling process is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag has not been set, a process for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1614 to S1616.

  That is, in step S1614, a process of setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode shifts through the AT mode, and after the VB mode ends, the mode always shifts to the AT mode.

  Then, in step S1615, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies the start of the VB mode from the next game by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1616, counting of the number of continuous VB modes is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the processing of step S1616, the main winning result correspondence processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1611, that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the flow advances to step S1617. In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the seventh replay winning has been established as a result of the current stop. In the present embodiment, when the seventh replay prize has been established, that is, a “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of the left reel 32L, a “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of the middle reel 32M, and a “black BAR” symbol is placed in the middle of the right reel 32R. When the “black BAR” symbol stops and the “black BAR” symbol stops on the middle combination line, the system shifts to the additional specialization zone. Note that the case where the seventh re-game winning is established is a case where the BAR replay 1 is won and the case where the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh re-game winning. (FIG. 23 (c)).

  When the seventh re-game winning has been established, it is determined in step S1618 whether or not the special zone notification flag has been set. If the specialized zone notification flag is set, a process for starting a specialized zone is performed in steps S1619 to S1621. Note that, as described above, at the start of the SAT mode, the processing of steps S1619 to S1621 is also performed when the determination of step S1609 is affirmative and the processing of step S1610 is performed.

  More specifically, in step S1619, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialization zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the zone is the additional specialization zone. When the specialization zone flag is set, the count of the number of continuous games in the AT mode or the VB mode is counted. Stopped. In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a special zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

  Then, in step S1620, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the specialization zone start command notifies the start of the specialization zone from the next game by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1621, counting of the number of specialization zone continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of games to be continued in the specialized zone is set in the specialized zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the processing in step S1621, the main winning result correspondence processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1618, the winning result handling process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1617 that the seventh replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, it is determined whether or not the eleventh and twelfth replay winnings have been established as a result of the current stop. As described above, when the eleventh and twelfth re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the game state to the fourth RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1623, it is determined whether the transition notification flag is set. When the transition notification flag is set, the eleventh and twelfth replay prize winnings are established after the condition enabling the transition to the fourth RT state is established. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1624. Then, the special RT start A command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the special RT start A command notifies that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described later in detail. On the other hand, when the transition notification flag is not set in step S1623, the case where the eleventh and twelfth replay prizes are established in a situation where the condition enabling the transition to the fourth RT state is not established In this case, the special RT start B command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1625. The display control device 81 that has received the special RT start B command notifies that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Such notification will be described in detail later, but the notification when the special RT start A command is received is different from the notification when the special RT start B command is received so that the player can identify the notification. If a negative determination is made in step S1622, the winning result handling process ends.

  After executing any one of the processes of step S1622 and step S1625, the process for ending the AT is executed in step S1626, and then the winning result handling process ends. In the AT termination process, a process for terminating the AT mode or the like is performed upon transition to the fourth RT state. More specifically, in the AT termination process, the AT mode winning flag, the VB mode winning flag, and the special zone winning flag in various display modes are cleared, and the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag are cleared. Clear the flags for various display modes. Further, flags for shifting the RT state, such as an AT notification flag, a VB notification flag, and a transition notification flag, are cleared. Then, an AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode end command notifies the end of the AT mode in the current game through the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. The processing on the display control device 81 side will be described later in detail.

  As described above, in particular, processing for shifting the display mode separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the hand corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the second RT state to the fourth RT state. I do. This is to prevent the AT mode or the like from being started based on the fact that the player corresponding to shifting the game state happens to win a prize, even though the player has not won the display mode shift lottery. It is.

  In addition, when the display mode is shifted, the game mode shifts to the higher mode, that is, the shift from the normal mode to the AT mode, the shift from the AT mode to the VB mode, or the AT mode. When shifting from the VB mode to the specialization zone, the shift is performed based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, other than when the AT mode is ended based on the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize in the case of shifting to the lower mode, for example, the second replay prize as a fall replay In the case where the game state is shifted due to the stop of the shift or the appearance of the shift, the display mode is not shifted. When shifting to such a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Game number management processing>
The game number management processing executed in step S1601 of the winning result correspondence processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of predictive games in the predictive mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the AT mode, the VB mode, and the specialization zone is counted. Based on this, processing for ending the corresponding display mode is performed.

  In the game number management process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the bet number is a specific number. As described above, in the present embodiment, each game can be executed with a bet number of 1 to 3, and in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the specific number is 3 bets. If it is not a three-bet, the game number management process is terminated. That is, in the game of one bet or two bets, the number of games in the precursor mode is not counted. The counting may be performed regardless of the bet number.

  If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process advances to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or a bonus state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, processing for clearing the AT mode flag, VB mode flag, and special zone flag for various display modes is performed in step S1703, and then the game number management processing ends. That is, the number of games in the AT mode or the like is not counted when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus. In step S1703, when each flag is not set, the state is maintained.

  In step S1703, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, but the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the bonus is over, after a preparation state such as the AT mode or the like, the push order for shifting the game state is notified by these flags, and the game state before the bonus can be returned. On the other hand, when a bonus is won during the specialization zone, the specialization zone is terminated by the bonus winning. In step S1703, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, if the AT mode and the like and the bonus are won at the same time, a winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1702, it is determined in step S1704 whether the number of precursor games is zero. If it is not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1705. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1704 (when the mode is not the precursor mode), or after the processing of step S1705 is performed, in step S1706 to step S1723, a process of counting the number of continuous games in each mode is performed. .

  That is, in step S1706, it is determined whether the current display mode is the AT mode. If the current mode is the AT mode, the process advances to step S1707 to determine whether or not the zone is a specialization zone in the AT mode. That is, when shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the AT mode as in the SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1707. If it is in the specialization zone, a game number management process for the specialization zone is performed in steps S1720 to S1723. These processes will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S1707 that the current zone is not a specialization zone, in step S1708, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 to thereby reduce the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in a step S1709, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter is 0. If it is not 0, the game number management processing is ended as it is. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1710, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1711. Then, in step S1712, an AT mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. After performing the processing in step S1712, the game number management processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1706 that the current mode is not the AT mode, the process advances to step S1713. In step S1713, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If the mode is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1714 to determine whether or not the zone is an additional specialization zone. If it is not the added special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1715, whereby the number of VB mode continuation games is subtracted. Then, in step S1716, it is determined whether the VB mode continuation counter is 0 or not. If it is not 0, the game number management processing is ended as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1717, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1718. After that, in step S1719, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command notifies the end of the VB mode in the current game through the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. This notification will be described later in detail. After performing the processing in step S1719, the game number management processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S1714 that the zone is an additional specialization zone, the process advances to step S1720. As described above, when it is determined in step S1707 that the zone is the specialized zone in the AT mode, the process also proceeds to step S1720. In step S1720, the specialized zone continuation counter is decremented by one, thereby subtracting the number of specialized zone continuation games. Then, in step S1721, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone continuation counter is 0. If it is 0, the specialized zone flag is cleared in step S1722, and the specialized zone end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1723. The display control device 81 that has received the specialization zone end command notifies the end of the specialization zone in the current game through the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in the current specialization zone is notified. After performing the processing in step S1723, the game number management processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S1713 or step S1721, the game number management process ends.

<End determination processing>
Next, an end determination process as a process at the end of the bonus will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the end determination process is a process performed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the end determination process, it is determined whether a bonus end condition is satisfied or not. When the bonus is to be ended, a process for notifying a winning such as an AT mode in which the bonus and the like are won is performed, and an AT mode in which the bonus and the like are won is performed. A process for adding the number of games is performed.

  That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been established. During the bonuses of the first BB and the second BB, the first role in the BB is established with a high probability, and the second role in the BB and the third role in the BB are partially established (FIG. 28). At the time of winning the first role during the BB, the first small role prize is established mainly, and a predetermined number (9) of medals are paid out, and the second role during the BB and the third role during the BB are played in the ninth replay or This is a replay of the tenth replay, and no medals are paid out even if a winning is achieved. Also, during the CB, one of the CB small and medium role 1 to the CB small and medium role 4 is won, and even if any of them is won, the first small portion prize is mainly established and a predetermined number (15) Medals will be paid out. Step S1801 is a process of determining whether or not a small combination winning in which a medal payout occurs among these bonuses and winning combinations during CB has been established.

  If it is determined in step S1801 that the small winning combination has been established, in step S1802, a process of subtracting the payout number of the current game from the remaining payout number is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after the processing in step S1802 is performed, it is determined in step S1803 whether the number of remaining payments has become zero. If it is not 0, the end determination processing ends. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S1804, and in step S1805 to step S1814, a process for notifying a winning such as an AT mode or an AT mode is performed. Is performed for the additional game number.

  In step S1805, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the lottery process of the number of precursor games is performed in step S1806, the number of precursor games is set in step S1807, and the precursor command is set in step S1808. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process of the number of precursor games in step S1806, a lottery in which the number of precursor games becomes 0 with a probability of 100% is performed. That is, in step S1807, the number of precursor games of the zero game is always set, and the winning notification such as the AT mode is performed in the game following the bonus end game. After executing the processing in step S1808, the end determination processing ends.

  If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1805, it is determined in step S1809 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the process for the sign mode in steps S1806 to S1808 is performed, and then the end determination process ends.

  Note that the case where the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode winning flag is set is a case where the AT mode and the bonus are simultaneously won, or a case where the bonus is won during the precursor mode of the AT mode winning notification. On the other hand, the case where the bonus is ended in a situation where the VB mode winning flag is set may be a case where the VB mode and the bonus are simultaneously won in the AT mode, or a case where the winning notification of the VB mode is given (in this case, This is a case where the precursory mode of the 0 game is selected, and therefore, the bonus is won in the VB mode.

  If the VB mode winning flag has not been set in step S1809, the process advances to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether the AT mode additional flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag has not been set, the end determination processing ends. If the AT mode additional flag is set, an additional game number lottery process in the AT mode is performed in step S1811, an additional game number process in the AT mode is performed in step S1812, and an additional notification process is performed in step S1813. In step S1814, an additional command is set. The processing in steps S1811 to S1814 is the same as the processing in steps S1017 to S1020. After executing the processing in step S1814, the end determination processing ends.

  As described above, on the main control device 101 side, (1) the process relating to the shift lottery of the display mode, (2) the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the shift lottery of the display mode, and (3) the winning result. As a result of the processing of shifting the display mode based on the result, the gaming state is shifted so that the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 occurs and follows the shift of the display mode, A push order bell prize can be generated by the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65, so that a large amount of medals can be expected.

  Here, in the case of the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell winning, when the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, the main control is performed in addition to the pressing order notification effect. The pressing order is also notified on the instruction monitor 68 connected to the apparatus 101. The configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 (a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 52 (b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode and the display contents of the instruction monitor 68.

  As shown in FIG. 52A, the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on / off of each individual light source, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on. Any combination of display segments can be turned on. Thus, on the instruction monitor 68, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numerals) are individually displayed. Since the individual light sources emit light of the same color, the same color is displayed in each of the display segments N1 to N8.

  More specifically, each of the display segments N1 to N8 is a first display segment N1 to a seventh display segment N7, each of which is a linear display segment. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally to the lower right portion of the area where the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least “1” to “6”, “1.” to “6.”, and “.”.

  In addition, as long as it is possible to individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols on the instruction monitor 68, the shapes and arrangement of the display segments N1 to N8 are arbitrary. It is also possible to adopt a configuration using nine segments or nine segments. It is not essential that the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in the display segments N1 to N8 may be appropriately changed. Further, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the light source on / off is not essential. If display control can be performed individually in the display segments N1 to N8, A segment display may be constituted by a single backlight and a liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbol may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

  The first display segment N <b> 1 to the seventh display segment N <b> 7 are display segments used for notifying the operation sequence of the pressing sequence. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), by performing a stop operation in the order of “left” → “middle” → “right” as an operation order of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player can be achieved. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit up and "1" is displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed in the order of “right” → “left” → “medium” as an operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, a winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained. The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and "5" is displayed. That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operation orders of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible to win the game in an advantageous manner for the player.

  The eighth display segment N8 shifts to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which a pressing order notification can be generated, such as an AT mode winning notification being performed and an AT notification flag being set. Is turned on in a game in which the start condition is satisfied. The light is turned off when the AT mode or the SAT mode ends and a transition is made from the advantageous section to the normal section.

  In other words, a navigation state (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which it is easy to inform the player of the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay, thereby facilitating winning in an advantageous mode for the player, A chance state (CZ mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easy to win the transition lottery, or a winning state that has won the transition lottery to the navigation state or the chance state but has not transitioned to the navigation state or the chance state The section including the (winning mode) is defined as an advantageous section (specific gaming state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is lit during the specific section in which the benefit of the push order notification can be obtained in the advantageous section. A section indicator (specific notifying means) which is turned off during a normal section which is not an advantageous section, or a non-specific section which is an advantageous section but not a specific section. Than it is.

  As described above, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is provided on the gaming panel 25 by the number of payouts. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62. That is, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player, in other words, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like are provided, the front portion of the gaming machine. Is not placed on the decorative panel. Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is suppressed from being hidden by a hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like, and is located at a position where the player can easily recognize it. In addition, it can be said that oversight by the player is suppressed even if the player who proceeds with the game with the aim of acquiring medals is arranged near the payout number display section 62 which is easy to watch.

  Further, in the instruction monitor 68, particularly, the eighth display segment N8 is set to have a higher brightness than the brightness of the surrounding display unit (for example, the payout number display unit 62 or the backlight of the game panel 25) (more specifically, The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display unit). Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display unit are controlled to emit light (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 becomes more conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine, the illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine is higher in the eighth display segment N8 than in the surrounding display section (more specifically, the illuminance of the surrounding display section is 2). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled. Also from such a configuration, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and oversight when the eighth display segment N8 is turned on is suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the section display first processing and the section display second processing will be described as the processing related to turning on / off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first processing>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The section display first process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), and the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and based on the lottery result. This is performed after a display mode shift lottery or the like (lottery result correspondence processing) is performed.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates a case where a specific section of at least one of the advantageous sections, in which a notification condition in which the pressing order notification can occur, is satisfied. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is off, the process advances to step S1902.

  In step S1902, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the advantageous section flag is a flag that is set when the transition to the advantageous section is selected in the advantageous section transition lottery process (FIG. 33). If the advantageous section flag is set, it is determined in step S1903 whether the advantageous section winning game flag is set. The advantageous section winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous section shifting lottery is won in the above-described advantageous section shifting lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the game is the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1904. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1903, the process advances to step S1905.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the counting of the number of games in the advantageous section, more specifically, the measurement of the number AG of the advantageous section in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of advantageous section games AG has not been started, a process of starting the measurement of the number of advantageous section games AG is performed in step S1906. The advantageous section game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of executed games in the advantageous section, and a process of adding one by one in each game in the advantageous section is executed.

  If it is determined in step S1905 that measurement has already been started, or after the processing in step S1906 has been performed, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. As described above, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, a state in which the pressing order notification can be generated at the time of pressing the winning combination is established, and the above-described notification condition is satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag has been set, in step S1908, the display of the section display is started by turning on the eighth display segment N8. In addition, in the main control device 101, when starting the display with the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in a lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, “Gago! A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that the sound is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 based on the sound output command so that the predetermined sound effect is emitted. At the start of the display of the eighth display segment N8, an effect may be generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit. In this case, a corresponding command is output to the display control device 81, and It is preferable that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that a corresponding effect is performed.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1909, processing is performed to continue displaying the advantageous section. More specifically, in step S1909, a process for continuing the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is performed. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section display is not performed in the first section display processing.

  When it is determined in step S1902 that the advantageous section flag is not set, and when the advantageous section flag is set and the game is a winning game (after executing the processing of step S1904), the winning game However, if it is not the situation that the push order notification can occur even if it is not (if it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, a process of adding 1 to the first winning combination counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The first combination ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

  After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1908 and the display continuation processing of step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, a process of adding 1 to the second combination ratio counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The second winning ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games for which the push order notification can be generated, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

  After executing the processing in step S1910 or step S1911, the CPU executes the combination calculation processing in step S1912. In this process, a process of dividing the value of the second combination ratio counter by the sum of the first combination ratio counter and the second combination ratio counter (the total number of games) is performed. That is, the winning combination calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games for which the push order notification can be generated, out of the total number of games. Then, in step S1913, a process for causing the calculation result of step S1912 to be displayed on the combination ratio monitor 77 is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the combination ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections including seven display segments. Specifically, the position ratio monitor 77 includes a first display unit 77a, a second display unit 77b, a third display unit 77c, a fourth display unit 77d, and a fifth display unit 77e as 7-segment display units. I have. The display segments in the first display unit 77a to the fifth display unit 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, like the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are turned on / off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be turned on, and any combination of display segments can be turned on. As a result, the predetermined ratio symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on the combination ratio monitor 77. In particular, the combination ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. I have.

  In step S1913, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1912 is output to the combination ratio monitor 77, and the display units 77a to 77e of the combination ratio monitor 77 are displayed on the combination ratio monitor 77 so that four digits are displayed. Perform display control. Specifically, as a percentage of the number of games for which the push order notification can occur in the total number of games, for example, a number smaller than 1 such as "0.5012" The number is displayed on the ratio monitor 77. After executing the processing in step S1913, the section display first processing ends.

  Note that, in the arithmetic processing of step S1912, the processing of rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point may be performed, and then the display control of the duty ratio monitor 77 may be performed. In addition, since the first display 77a of the combination ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display 77a does not have the first display 77a, and the first display 77a is printed. May be configured to always display “0”. Further, it is preferable that a decimal point is displayed between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the section display second process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and at the end of one game, payout of medals (payout determination process) and transition of a game state based on a winning result. Etc. (winning result correspondence processing) is performed.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated as it is. If the advantageous section flag is set, a process of counting the number of games in the advantageous section is executed in step S2002. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number AG of the advantageous zone games is performed. After the process of step S2002 is performed, in step S2003, an update process of the number ZM of advantageous section increase / decrease provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. The advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase / decrease number of medals in the advantageous section (the difference between the number betted and the number paid out in each game in the advantageous section). In S2003, the medal increase / decrease number of the current game (medal payout number of the current game−number of bets of the current game) is grasped based on the winning result of the current game (the immediately preceding winning result correspondence processing and payout determination processing). Then, a process of adding the medal increase / decrease number to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and nine medals are paid out, the medal increase / decrease number is +6, and in step S2003, a process of adding +6 to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed. If the current game is a 3-bet game and no medal payout is performed, the medal increase / decrease number is -3, and in step S2003, a process of adding -3 to the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM is performed.

  After executing the processing of step S2003, the remaining game number management processing is executed in step S2004, and the remaining number management processing is executed in step S2005. The remaining game number management process is a process for managing, based on the remaining game number in the AT mode or the like, whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit game number with the current remaining game number. The remaining number management process is a process for managing, based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode and the like, whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number with the current remaining number of games.

  Regarding the remaining game number management processing, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2101, the number of precursor games G1 is grasped. For example, when the present state is the sign mode in the advantageous section, the sign game number G1 represents the number of remaining signs mode games, and is reduced by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2102, the AT mode continuation number G2 is grasped. For example, when the current mode is the AT mode in the advantageous section, the AT mode continuation number G2 represents the remaining number of games in the AT mode, and is decremented by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2103, the VB mode continuation number G3 is grasped. For example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, the VB mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, and is decremented by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). . In step S2104, the specialization zone continuation number G4 is grasped. The specialization zone continuation number G4 indicates the number of games in the remaining specialization zones, for example, when the current state is a specialization zone in an advantageous section, and is one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 50). Is subtracted. In step S2105, the number of remaining BB games G5 is grasped. The BB remaining game number G5 represents the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and each time the game number management process (FIG. 50) is activated once. Then, on the condition that the BB mode is in progress, the value is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown).

  Here, the continuation numbers G1 to G5 may be input with a value of 0 or more even when the current state is not the corresponding mode or zone. Specifically, for example, in the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the BB mode, the counting of the number of remaining games in the AT mode is stopped. When the transition occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation number G2 and the continuation number of each of these modes.

  In step S2106, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G5 obtained in the processes of steps S2101 to S2105. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section will continue in later. In the following step S2107, a process of calculating the total number SG of the advantageous section games by adding the number of games in the advantageous section (the number of advantageous section games AG) executed so far and the number of remaining games ZG is performed. Then, in step S2108, the number of free games (the number of free games that can be added and the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of games in the advantageous zone SG from 1500G, which is the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section. Perform processing.

  After performing the processing in step S2108, in step S2109, it is determined whether or not the number of free games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is a number of free games and additional games can be added. If the number of free games FG is larger than 0, the remaining game number management processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of free games FG is equal to or less than 0, the process of setting the first excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S2110 is performed, and then the remaining game number management process ends. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the first forced termination condition of the advantageous section is specified to be satisfied.

  In the remaining number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56, first, in step S2201, the number of increase / decrease in the advantageous section ZM updated in step S2003 is grasped. In the following step S2202, the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG (step S2106) calculated in the remaining game management processing in step S2004, and the net increase (expected increase / decrease) expected in each game in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 A process of calculating the expected remaining increase / decrease number NM that can be obtained in the remaining game number in the advantageous section from the number KM) is executed. In the present embodiment, the expected increase / decrease number KM is a net increase number (approximately +2.46 sheets) in consideration of the bonus state when the advantageous section is consumed in the high RT state in the situation where the above-described push order notification is generated. ). That is, for example, if the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase / decrease number NM is 500 games × 2.46 = 1230.

  In step S2203, the number of advantageous section increase / decrease numbers ZM grasped in step S2201 and the expected remaining increase / decrease number NM calculated in step S2202 are acquired in the current advantageous section taking into account the current number of advantageous section remaining games. Is performed to calculate the number of sheets that can be expected (total increase / decrease expected number SM). Then, in step S2204, a process of calculating the number of free sheets FM that can be increased is performed. The process of step S2204 corresponds to the process of calculating the number of free games FG that can be added in step S2108 in the remaining game number management process. Is a process of predicting in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated, and the process of step S2204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. This is the processing to be performed. That is, in step S2204, a process of subtracting the expected total increase / decrease number SM calculated in step S2203 from the upper limit increase number of 2400 sheets in the advantageous section is performed.

  In step S2205, based on the processing result of step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of free sheets FM that can be increased becomes 0 or less, and whether or not the number will be forcibly terminated in the future under the second forcible termination condition. If the number of empty sheets FM is 1 or more, it is determined that the number does not reach the upper limit increase number, and the remaining sheet number management process is terminated. If the number of empty sheets FM is equal to or less than 0, the process proceeds to step S2206, where a process of setting the second excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed, and the remaining number management process ends. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied later.

  By setting the first excess flag and the second excess flag, in the present embodiment, even if the specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the lottery and the like in the AT mode in addition to the number of games in the AT mode is restricted. . More specifically, for example, in a case where the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set in the additional lottery process in the AT mode in step S1014 or step S1201, the lottery process is performed. It will be restricted and will not be added (or even if it is won, additional 0 games will be generated). Thus, it is possible to suppress a situation in which an additional portion is added to a level that cannot be continued and a misunderstanding that the advantageous section continues beyond the upper limit number of games occurs.

  Note that, once the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the remaining game number management process may not be performed in the current advantageous section.

  Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 54), after executing the process of step S2005, in step S2006, the process for shifting to RT is executed. The RT transition processing determines whether a condition enabling the transition to the fourth RT state is satisfied, and sets a notification flag (transition notification flag) for transitioning to the fourth RT state based on the satisfaction of the condition. Processing. This processing will be described later in detail.

  After executing the processing in step S2006, in step S2007, it is determined whether or not the number of advantageous section games AG has reached the upper limit game number of 1500 or the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM is equal to or greater than the upper limit increase number of 2400. It is determined whether or not it has become. If any of these forced termination conditions is satisfied, the number of advantageous section games AG and the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM are cleared to 0 in step S2008. In a succeeding step S2009, processing for terminating the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a section display is performed. Then, in step S2010, processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section is performed, and then the second section display processing is completed.

  More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2010 is a process of returning the flags and counters set during the shift to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to the initial values. . For example, if the AT mode winning flag or the like is set at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or the VB mode winning flag is set during the AT mode, and if the flag remains set until the initialization processing, these winnings will be made. Clear the flag. In the initialization processing, if an AT notification flag, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and the like are set, these flags are also cleared. Further, if the value of the precursor counter, the counter for the number of continuous games in the attack mode, and the like are larger than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. That is, in the initialization process, all variables and parameters that affect the performance related to the push order notification are initialized with respect to the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and the RAM is cleared for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

  If it is determined in step S2007 that the number of advantageous section games AG has not reached the upper limit value, or if the number of advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process proceeds to step S2011, in which the various flag storage areas 106d Is determined whether or not the AT non-winning flag is set. As described above, the AT non-winning flag is a flag that is set when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won. If the AT non-winning flag is set, the AT non-winning third process is executed in step S2012, and then the present section display second process ends. The AT non-winning third process will be described later in detail.

  If the AT non-winning flag has not been set, it is determined in step S2013 whether the normal end condition of the advantageous section has been satisfied. More specifically, neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag is set, and it is determined whether or not the remaining number of continuous games has become 0, including modes higher than the AT mode. If neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT mode flag has been set, the process proceeds to step S2008, performs the processing for ending the advantageous section in steps S2008 to S2010, and ends the second section display processing. If a negative determination is made in both step S2011 and step S2013, the second section display processing ends as it is. In this case, the lighting display of the section display (the eighth display segment N8) is continued.

  Here, when the processing for ending the AT is performed based on the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize in step S1626, the AT mode flag is cleared as described above. Therefore, when the eleventh re-game winning and the twelfth re-game winning are achieved in the AT mode, the affirmative determination is made in step S2013, and the process for terminating the advantageous section is performed. That is, when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs in the advantageous section, not only the AT mode but also the advantageous section ends.

<About the display of the push order display and the section display and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 57, in a normal section that is not an advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is turned off (not turned on). In this normal section, the push order notification is not performed. That is, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have the instruction function, while the advantageous section has the performance related to the instruction function such as the push order notification. The situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

  In the normal section, for example, if the lottery to the advantageous section is won due to the weak watermelon role winning or the like, the number of executed games in the advantageous section is counted from the next game after the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (the advantageous section game Counting of the number AG) is started. Then, during the advantageous section, when the player wins the lottery transition to the AT mode, and the notification of the winning and the notification flag for the AT are set and the pressing order notification can be generated, the start condition of the display of the section display is changed. As a result, the eighth display segment N8 is turned on.

  Thereafter, in a state where the eighth display segment N8 is turned on, a push order notification using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is generated. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7, and the player presses based on the pressing order information. The order can be grasped. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information is started when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the last game in the advantageous section, at the time of the third reel stop ON operation, only the display of the pressing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends, and the eighth display is performed. The display of the advantageous section by the use segment N8 is continued. Then, when the player wins the pushing sequence again after the next game, the pushing sequence information corresponding to the pushing sequence is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

  When the number of continuous games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the medal increase in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, and the last game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off, and the information of the advantageous section is notified. Ends. In the present embodiment, in the last game of the advantageous section, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the medal payout is completed (by the section display second processing which is the processing after the payout determination processing). If the medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. Thereby, the player can clearly grasp that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

  As described above, the counting of the number of games in the advantageous section is performed from the next game after the game selected for the transition to the advantageous section, while the push order is notified only during the period in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. appear. In other words, even in the advantageous section, in the section in which the eighth display segment N8 is turned off (non-specific section), the pressing order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is lit or not, the advantageous section is a situation (specific section, substantially increasing section) in which at least benefits from the push order notification can be enjoyed among the advantageous sections. Can be clearly understood. In this way, there is no difference in the advantage between the player who ends the game without knowing that the situation can be enjoyed by the push order notification and the succeeding player who subsequently sits down. You can do so. In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the pressing order is not notified, and the game can be finished cleanly.

  In addition, the slot machine 10 is configured such that there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value with respect to the game property of changing the degree of advantage by the notification of the pushing order, particularly, in the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section. The situation in which the push order notification such as the AT mode can occur is included in the advantageous section, and the push order notification does not occur in the normal section as well as the situation where the section indicator is not displayed in the advantageous section. That is, in a game in which the player is to benefit from the push order notification, there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value in the lottery transition to the advantageous section as the first stage. In this way, the slot machine 10 has a uniform advantage in each gaming table (set value) and each game (situation), eliminating advantages / disadvantages between players, and obtaining a privilege by aiming at a picture. It is possible to provide a well-balanced gaming machine while fully enjoying the original playability and the relevance to the playability based on the accompanying push order notification.

<Processing related to notification effect on sub side>
Next, (4) various notification processes performed by the sub-side display control device 81 will be described as processes relating to the notification effect on the sub side. An effect setting process that is executed at a predetermined period (a period of 1.49 msec) is provided as various notification processes. Therefore, the effect setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the effect setting process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from main controller 101. If a new command has been received, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 183 is performed in step S2302. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can read from the previously stored command.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2301 or after the processing in step S2302 is performed, it is determined in step S2303 whether the newly received command is a bet-time command. The bet-time command is a command output from main controller 101 based on the bet operation being performed. In addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, a mode transition notification process (see FIG. 46), an AT mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. If these are the bet-time commands, a bet-time effect setting process is executed in step S2304.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or after the processing in step S2304 is performed, in step S2305, it is determined whether the newly received command is the start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes a lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery processing, and a first to first command. There are a precursor command and an additional command set in the third specific combination process (FIGS. 34 to 37), a push order notification command set in the push combination process (FIG. 48), and the like. If these are start commands, start effect setting processing is executed in step S2306.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2305, or after the process in step S2306 is performed, it is determined in step S2307 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R has been stopped, and is a step S405 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This is a stop command command set by. In the case of such a stop command command as each stop operation command, in step S2308, each stop operation effect setting process is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or after the process in step S2308 is performed, in step S2309, it is determined whether the newly received command is the all-stop command. The all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the commands, the AT mode start command, the VB mode start command, the special zone start command, the AT mode end command, the VB mode end command, the special zone end command, and the There are a first fixed RT start command, a second fixed RT start command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop-time commands, the all-stop-time effect setting process is executed in step S2310.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after executing the processing in step S2310, other processing is executed in step S2311 and then the effect setting processing ends. In step S2311, setting of an effect (for example, an effect based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) based on a command from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, starting, and stopping, and connection without the intervention of the main control device 101 The setting of the effect based on the signal from the performed sensor (the effect switch detection sensor or the like), the setting for error notification, and the like are performed.

  Hereinafter, the betting-time effect setting process, the start-time effect setting process, each stop operation-time effect setting process, and the all-stop effect setting process will be described. Note that the description of each effect setting process will be made with reference to the schematic diagrams of the display effects shown in FIGS.

<Bet effect setting process>
The betting effect setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2401, it is determined whether an AT mode winning notification command is included as the bet command received this time. If an AT mode winning notification command is included, a process for setting an AT mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2402. In the AT mode winning notification informing effect, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, in the AT mode winning information presentation effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “I did it!” With a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether the VB mode winning notification command is included as the currently received betting command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, a process of setting a VB mode winning notification effect is performed in step S2404. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character string “V-BONUS determined”. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification informing effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “super lucky!” In male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether a bonus winning notification command is included as the currently received betting command. If a bonus winning notification command is included, a process of setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed in step S2406. In the bonus winning notification informing effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as “Yatarase bonus confirmed”. In addition, in the bonus winning notification informing effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “I'm done!” In male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If a bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether a special zone winning notification command is included as the bet command received this time. If the special zone winning notification command is included, processing for setting a special zone winning notification effect is performed in step S2408. In the specialization zone winning information presentation effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character string of “Ride up!”. In addition, in the special zone winning notification informing effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Norinori!” In a ecstatic male's thick voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  After executing any one of the steps S2402, S2404, S2406, and S2408, or if a negative determination is made in step S2407, in step S2409 other betting effects are set, The effect setting process ends. In the processing of step S2409, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 of the corresponding bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode in which the game is not performed for a predetermined time to shift to one condition, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned on to notify that the operation is enabled. Processing is performed.

<Start-time production setting process>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2501, a display mode setting process is performed. In this processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is the normal mode, the AT mode, the VB mode, or the specialization zone, and the auxiliary display is performed in the corresponding display mode. The display effect of the section 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, an area for setting an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a special zone flag as flags for grasping the display mode is also provided in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 of the display control device 81. At the start of each mode, the corresponding flag is set, and at the end, the corresponding flag is cleared. In step S2501, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that a corresponding effect is performed.

  In a succeeding step S2502, it is determined based on the received lottery result command whether or not the lottery result of the game started this time is a winning combination. If it is the push order winning, a push order notification process is performed in step S2503. Here, the pressing order notifying process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether a pressing order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the main push order notification process is terminated. If the push order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2602.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2603, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification for establishing the third replay prize, and thereafter, the push order notification process To end.

  If it is determined in step S2602 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 have not been won, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the current lottery result is fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2605, in which the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the push order notification for establishing the first replay prize, and thereafter, the push order notification process ends. I do.

  If it is determined in step S2604 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2606 whether the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the special zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, at the time of setting the VB mode winning notification effect at step S2404 or the special zone winning notification effect at step S2408, the notification indicating that the VB winning or the special zone winning has been notified is performed in the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183. Set a flag. The notified flag is cleared based on shifting to the VB mode or the specialization zone. Then, in step S2607, it may be configured to determine the presence or absence of the notified flag. If the winning notification in the VB mode or the specialization zone has been notified, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to perform the pressing order notification in which the fourth and fifth replay winnings are established. Then, the push order notification process ends. When the winning notification of the VB mode or the specialization zone has not been notified, the process proceeds to step S2605, in which the pressing order for the first replay prize is notified, and then the pressing order notifying process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2606 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2609 whether the current lottery result is a BAR replay. If it is a BAR replay, in step S2610, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone winning notification informing effect has been executed. If the winning notification of the specialization zone has been notified, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification in which the seventh replay prize is established in step S2611, and then the pressing order notification process is performed. finish. If the winning notification of the specialization zone has not been notified, the process proceeds to step S2603 to perform the pressing order notification for the third replay prize, and then ends the pressing order notification process.

  If it is determined in step S2609 that it is not BAR replay, in step S2612, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is transfer replay 1, 2. In the case of transfer replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2613 whether a transfer replay notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183. The transition replay notification flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the condition for enabling the transition to the fourth RT state is satisfied. If the transition replay notification flag is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled in step S2614 so as to perform the pressing order notification that the eleventh and twelfth replay winnings are established. To end. If the transition replay notification flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S2605, in which the push order notification for the first replay prize is performed, and then the push order notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2612 that it is not the transition replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2615 whether the current lottery result is a bell. In the case of the bell winning, in step S2616, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification to establish the bell prize as the first small role, and thereafter, the pressing order notification process ends. . If a negative determination is made in step S2615, the pressing order notification process ends.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 60), if it is determined in step S2502 that the push is not the winning combination, then in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the transition trigger is a winning. If it is determined that the transition opportunity combination has been won, a transition opportunity combination notification process is performed in step S2505. The transition trigger combination notification process will be described later in detail.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2504, or after the processing in step S2503 or step S2505 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, it is determined whether an additional command has been received as the current start command. If the additional command has been received, in step S2507, a process of setting the additional effect in advance is performed so that the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is executed when the game is stopped. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68A to 68C, a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the additional effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Kyukyukyukyuen!”) Is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2507 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S2701, a process of grasping the number of additional games to be notified is performed based on the additional commands received this time. In a succeeding step S2702, a process of grasping the notification timing is executed. The notification timing is a timing at which an additional effect is executed, and the timing is determined by the processing (addition notification processing) on the main controller 101 side. The information of the determined timing is set and output in the above-mentioned additional command. Therefore, the display control device 81 can recognize the timing of executing the additional effect by reading the additional command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect is to be executed and a timing corresponding to a stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

  After grasping the notification timing in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the grasped result in step S2702 is to perform an additional effect in the current game. The case where the additional notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the additional notification is selected. In this case, the additional effect setting process is terminated. If the additional effect is to be performed in the current game, in step S2704, it is determined whether or not any of the reels has been stopped ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If the stop is ON, in step S2705, a target reel for which an additional effect is to be generated is set, and an additional effect is set to be generated when the stop ON operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional effect generation timing. In step S2705, processing for reading out the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation from the effect data storage area 182b, and temporarily storing the data in a predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 recognizes that an additional effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads out the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area, and performs the additional effect.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2704, it is determined in step S2706 whether the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. If the stop OFF operation of these reels has been performed, in step S2707, a target reel for which an additional effect is to be generated is set, and an additional effect is set to be generated when the target reel is to be turned OFF. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the additional production occurrence timing. Also in step S2707, the processing of reading the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games from the effect data storage area 182b and temporarily storing the data in a predetermined effect data setting area is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2706, in step S2708, it is set so that the additional effect this time occurs when all reels are stopped (when the stop OFF operation of the third reel). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also in step S2708, a temporary storage process of the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2705, step S2707, or step S2708, the processing of setting the additional effect is ended.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process, if the additional command has not been received in step S2506, or after executing the process of step S2507, the bonus effect setting process is executed in step S2508, and the process proceeds to step S2509. Then, in step S2510, other start-time effects are set, and then the start-time effects setting process ends. The bonus effect setting process and the continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S2510, for example, an effect indicating a lottery result is set in association with the start of the game, or a process of turning off a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation has been accepted is performed.

<Each stop operation effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of each stop operation performed in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether or not each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when a pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stopping operations of each reel.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process proceeds to step S2802, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when a reel stop ON operation is set as the effect of the current game. If the setting has not been made, the setting process ends. If it has been set, in step S2803, it is determined whether or not the currently received stop ON operation command is for the stop operation of the reel to be rendered in the set stop ON operation. If the operation is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, the setting process ends as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2804, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then the main setting process ends.

  For example, when the additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 68A, the auxiliary display unit 65 is pressed at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An additional production occurs at. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Also, for example, if the current game is a pressing order winning and a pressing order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel is stopped based on each stop ON operation, so that the pressing order notification effect becomes the next operation target. Changes to an effect that indicates a reel that Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating that the first reel is to be operated as shown in FIG. 47A is made. . When the corresponding reel (the middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (the right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 47B is displayed. Change to production. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating that the second reel is to be stopped as shown in FIG. 47B is made. Based on the stop of the reel, the display changes to a display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 47C).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2805 to determine whether each of the stop operation commands received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of each reel is completed.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the flow advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not an effect that is generated when the reels are turned off is set as the effect of the current game. If the setting has not been made, the setting process ends. If it has been set, in step S2807, it is determined whether or not the currently received stop OFF operation command is for the stop operation of the reel to be rendered in the set stop OFF operation. If the operation is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, the setting process ends as it is. If it is the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2808, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled such that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then the main setting process ends.

  For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. 68B, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is terminated, and At the timing when the hand is released, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the present effect setting process ends.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether an AT mode start command is included as the stop command received this time. If an AT mode start command is included, processing for setting an AT mode start effect is performed in step S2902. In the AT mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70A, a character display of “AT start! LV.1” is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the AT mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “I'll do it!” With a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  By the way, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the level of the AT mode. That is, the AT mode started this time is LV. This is a display indicating that the mode is one mode. When the level of the AT mode is LV. When the mode is promoted to the 2 mode (when a promotion command is received), a character display “LV.2” is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as a promotion effect. If the AT mode level is LV. When the mode is promoted to the 3rd mode, a character display of “LV. When the mode is promoted to the 4th mode, the character display “LV.4” is displayed.

  If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2901, it is determined in step S2903 whether the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If an AT mode end command is included, processing for setting an AT mode end effect is performed in step S2904. In the AT mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), a character display of "AT END" is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current AT mode (including the VB mode and the specialization zone) is performed. Is displayed, and the total payout number in the current AT mode (including the VB mode, the specialization zone, and the bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the AT mode end effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “speak” with a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If an AT mode end command is not included in step S2903, it is determined in step S2905 whether a VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If the VB mode start command is included, a process of setting a VB mode start effect is performed in step S2906. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71A, a character display of "777 lucky !!" In addition, in the VB mode start effect, control is performed such that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “bonus start!”) Is emitted from the speaker 64 with male and female voices.

  If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2905, it is determined in step S2907 whether the VB mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a VB mode end command is included, a process of setting a VB mode end effect is performed in step S2908. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 71 (b), a character display of "V-BONUS END" is displayed on the auxiliary display section 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode. The number of continuous games (including the VB mode and the special zone) is displayed, and the total number of payouts in the AT mode (including the VB mode, the special zone and the bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “I'm going to continue” in the voices of men and women) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2907, it is determined in step S2909 whether the special zone start command is included as the stop command received this time. If the special zone start command is included, a process of setting a special zone start effect is performed in step S2910. In the specialization zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character string "additional challenge !!" Is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “go to go” with a boy's voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If the specialized zone start command is not included in step S2909, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the specialized zone end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the special zone end command is included, a process of setting a special zone end effect is performed in step S2912. In the special zone end effect, for example, the total number of games added in the current special zone is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the specialization zone end effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Kyukyukyukyuen!” By electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64. Note that the display content of the auxiliary display unit 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker 64 may be made different depending on the total number of added games.

  If it is determined in step S2911 that the specialization zone end command is not included, it is determined in step S2913 whether a bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the bonus end command is included, a process of setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2914. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during the current bonus, and displays the AT mode, the VB mode, or the AT mode ( (Including VB mode, specialization zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, an effect is performed by a character or the like that suggests the content, depending on whether or not the AT mode is selected and the number of additional games.

  After executing any one of the processes of step S2902, step S2904, step S2906, step S2908, step S2910, step S2912, and step S2914, or after making a negative determination in step S2913, the process proceeds to step S2915. In step S2915, if an additional effect has been set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional effect. As described above, the setting of the additional effect is performed in step S2507 in the start-time effect setting process. Specifically, in the additional production setting process (FIG. 62), when the generation timing of the current additional production is set at the time of all stops, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), all the reels 32L and 32M are set. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Thereafter, in step S2916, an RT shift notification process is executed. The RT transition notification process is a process for the fourth RT state, and this process will be described later in detail. After that, in step S2917, other stop-time effects are set, and then this effect setting process ends. In step S2917, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is turned on in a color corresponding to the winning combination, control is performed so that a sound effect corresponding to the number of payouts of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or during replay. Or so that a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is generated from the speaker 64.

  As described above, based on various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the display control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to the notification of the transition of the display mode, effect processing during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In the present embodiment, a bonus mid-game effect and a continuous effect are provided as effects during various games. The bonus bonus effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning. The continuous effect is an effect that expects a result that is advantageous to the player (a bonus, an AT mode, a VB mode, or the like), and extends over a plurality of (four in the present embodiment) games. This is an effect that can be continued, and an effect in which whether or not the advantageous result is obtained in the final game is performed.

<Bonus production setting process>
First, the bonus effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The bonus effect setting process is a process performed in step S2508 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 60).

  In the bonus effect setting process, it is determined in step S3001 whether a bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game in which the first BB or the second BB is won to the end of the bonus. The case where a positive determination is made in step S3001 is a case where the first BB or the second BB prize is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S3002, processing for grasping the current bonus type is performed. More specifically, it is determined whether the current bonus game is based on the first BB prize or the second BB prize. Then, in step S3003, a bonus effect corresponding to the bonus type grasped in step S3002 is set. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after the processing in step S3003 has been performed, the bonus effect setting processing ends.

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the content of the bonus effect differs between the case of the bonus game based on the first BB prize and the case of the bonus game based on the second BB prize so as to be discernable to the player. More specifically, in the bonus game based on the first BB prize, a bonus effect in which a moving image effect by live-action is performed on the auxiliary display unit 65 is set. Is set as a bonus effect. The sound effect (song) output from the speaker 64 is also different between the first BB and the second BB.

  Each of the bonus effects is an effect independently performed regardless of the progress of the game, and is set to be repeatedly performed as long as the bonus game continues. For example, it is set so that a unit effect is a moving image effect or an animation effect for 5 minutes, and when the unit effect ends 5 minutes after the start of the bonus effect, the unit effect is restarted from the beginning. The effect in the auxiliary display section 65 may be stopped on the screen at the end of the unit effect, and only the sound effect (song) may be repeated. The effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 may be performed in synchronization with the progress of each game, and only the sound effect (song) may be independently performed regardless of the progress of each game.

  As described above, while the bonus effect based on the first BB prize and the bonus effect based on the second BB prize can be distinguished, the game result that triggered the first BB prize or the second BB prize is identified from the bonus effect. It is set to be impossible or difficult to identify. That is, regarding the bonus effect based on the first BB prize, for example, the bonus effect is discriminated between a case where the first BB prize is triggered by the special lip A duplicate 1 win and a case where the first BB prize is triggered by the special lip AB duplicate 1 win. It is impossible or difficult to identify, and more specifically, the same bonus effect is executed. The same applies to the bonus effect based on the second BB prize. For example, the bonus effect triggered by the special lip A duplication 2 winning and the bonus effect triggered by the special lip AB duplicate 2 winning cannot be identified or identified. Difficult, the same bonus effect is performed.

<Processing for continuous production>
The outline of the continuous production will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 73 (a), at the start of the first game in which a continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of continuations of the continuous effect is performed. It shows a daring drop effect). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is performed to notify whether or not the continuous effect is continued (in the figure, the effect that the first stage of the ball drop is successful is shown. This indicates that continuous production will continue). When the continuous production is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous production is set, a production that informs that the continuous production ends in the middle is performed (for example, a production in which the first stage dramming fails, etc.). ). The effect regarding the presence or absence of the continuous effect is the same in each game in the continuous effect.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), at the start of the second game in which the continuous production is set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous productions is performed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of dramatic drop production). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect for notifying whether or not the continuous effect is continued is performed (in the figure, an effect indicating that the second stage is successfully dropped, and the continuous effect is continued. Is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display indicating the number of remaining continuous effects is performed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of the dramatic drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect for notifying whether or not the continuous effect is to be continued is performed. Is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 73 (d), at the start of the final game of the continuous production (fourth game), a display indicating that it is the final game of the continuous production is performed (in the figure, a one-stage daruma drop production). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is performed as to whether or not the result is advantageous to the player (in the figure, an effect indicating that the last stage of the darling removal was successful is shown).

  As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the next game is set by taking over the effect of the previous game, and the effect of each game has continuity. Further, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games exist until the end of the continuous production).

  Here, in each game of the continuous production, whether or not the continuous production continues until the next game is set so that the continuation rate becomes higher as the game of the continuous production progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous production, the possibility that the non-continuation of the continuous production is notified is highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility that the non-continuation is reported becomes low. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player is greatly different depending on the current game in which the game is in the continuous production. .

  Hereinafter, as the processing relating to the continuous effect, a transition trigger combination notification process (step S2505) and a continuous effect setting process (step S2509) in the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 60) will be described.

<Transition trigger notification process>
In the transition trigger combination notification process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66, first, in step S3101, a chance effect lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the chance effect is set as the effect of the current game. In the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), for example, characters are displayed as “Chance !!” on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the characters with the surprise mark are displayed on the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Are displayed in correspondence with. In addition, in the chance effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “quip” by electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker 64. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that a chance effect is generated at about one-half of the transition opportunity winning. The winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may be different depending on the type of the shift trigger, the display mode, the game state, the set value, and the like. In a succeeding step S3102, it is determined whether or not the lottery process in the step S3101 has been won. If the game has been won, it is set in step S3103 so that a chance effect is performed as the effect of the current game.

  Here, a description will be given of a gaming mode recommended to achieve winning of each small combination including the transition opportunity combination in the slot machine 10.

  Of the wins that can be won in each game, small wins in which so-called drop-outs that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set to strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. . More specifically, as described above, the strong cherry is a role in which any of the 28th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can be won, and the 28th small role symbol for the left reel 32L, The 32nd small combination symbol to the 35th small combination symbol are a "cherry" symbol and a "2nd replay" symbol. In this case, in the three-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the twentieth “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the seventh “red bell” symbol, Neither the 28th small combination symbol nor the 32nd small combination symbol to the 35th small combination symbol, the "Cherry" symbol and the "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the activated line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, the strong cherry combination is missed.

  The weak cherry is a role in which any of the 27th small role, the 32nd small role to the 35th small role can win, and the 27th small role symbol and the 32nd small role symbol to the 32nd small symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a “cherry” symbol and a “second replay” symbol. Also in this case, in the three-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the twentieth “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the seventh “red bell” symbol. Neither the “Cherry” symbol nor the “Second Replay” symbol, which is the 27th small symbol symbol, the 32nd small symbol symbol to the 35th small symbol symbol, cannot be stopped on the activated line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, the weak cherry combination is missed.

  The strong watermelon is a combination in which either the 30th small combination or the 41st small combination can win, and the 30th small combination symbol and the 41st small combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. In this case, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the third “white bell” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the ninth “red 7” symbol in the three-bet game, The small win symbol and the 41st small win symbol "watermelon" symbol cannot be stopped at the activated line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, the strong watermelon combination is missed.

  The weak watermelon is a combination in which any of the 29th small combination and the 41st small combination can win, and the 29th small combination symbol and the 41st small combination symbol for the left reel 32L are “watermelon” symbols. Also in this case, in the three-bet game, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the ninth “red 7” symbol reaches the upper stage of the left reel 32L from the ninth “red 7” symbol. The "watermelon" symbol as the 29th small symbol symbol and the 41st small symbol symbol cannot be stopped at the activated line. Therefore, when the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, the missing of the weak watermelon combination occurs.

  Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the prize-winning possibility for any of the winning combinations that may be missed, the fourth “cherry” symbol to the sixth “second replay” symbol are changed to the left reel 32L. It is necessary to stop operation at the timing when it reaches the upper stage. In the following description, such an operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a miss, and each of the operation modes that cause the above-described miss operation is a non-specific operation. Also referred to as a mode (second operation mode).

  In the chance effect set in step S3103, although it is suggested that the current winning combination is one of the transition triggers, it is set so that it is difficult to determine which transition trigger is difficult or difficult to determine. Have been. That is, when a chance effect is performed, the winning combination of the current game is likely to be one of a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but is one of a strong cherry and a weak cherry. It is not possible to determine whether the watermelon is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, and whether the watermelon is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a miss even if any of the transition triggers has been won.

  Further, the chance effect is not necessarily generated in the game in which the transition trigger is won, but is generated on condition that the game is won in the chance effect lottery process (step S3101). In this case, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode in each game from the normal time so as not to cause a transition trigger to be missed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3102, or after performing the processing in step S3103, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S3105 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If no additional command is included, it is determined in step S3106 whether a bonus has been won. If the bonus has not been won, that is, if the result of the lottery has been a transition opportunity such as a strong cherry or a weak watermelon, the player has won the transition lottery to the AT mode or VB mode, or the additional lottery of the number of continuous games. If the bonus has not been won and the bonus has not been won, a lottery process in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S3107. In the pseudo sign mode, although it is apparently difficult to identify the sign mode, in the sign mode, a result advantageous to the player (such as winning in the AT mode) is notified based on the end of the sign game number. The pseudo sign mode is a mode in which the game ends without notifying the player of an advantageous result based on the end of the pseudo sign game number.

  In step S3107, a pseudo-sign mode lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 182a of the ROM 182, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 183b to determine whether to execute the pseudo-sign mode. Do. In the pseudo omen mode lottery table, the probability of winning in the pseudo omen mode lottery is set differently according to the type of transition trigger that has been won.For example, a strong cherry is weaker than a weak cherry. The setting is made so that the probability of winning the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode is increased.

  In step S3108, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won based on the processing result of step S3107. If the game has been won, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S3109. This processing corresponds to, for example, step S909 on the main control device 101 side, and randomly determines the number of pseudo precursory games out of 1 to 20 by lottery. However, as described above, unlike the sign mode based on various winnings, the number of pseudo sign games is determined to be 20 games or less. In the lottery of the number of pseudo precursor games, 0 game is not selected. In a succeeding step S3110, a process of setting the number of pseudo precursory games determined in the step S3109 to a continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is performed. The continuous effect counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result is notified, and is decremented by one for each game. For example, in a configuration in which a continuous effect of four games is performed, a continuous effect is started in a game in which the continuous effect counter is 4, and a result is notified in a game in which the continuous effect counter is 0. In the present embodiment, when set to the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after a continuous effect. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo precursory games to the continuous rendering counter in step S3110, when the number of remaining games in the pseudo precursory mode corresponds to the start of continuous rendering (four remaining games), continuous rendering is started. It will be.

  In step S3111, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. In a succeeding step S3112, a continuous effect flag is set. Thereafter, the transition trigger combination notification process ends. If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S3104 to S3106, or if a negative determination is made in step S3108, the transition trigger combination notification process ends as it is.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S2509 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 60) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3201, it is determined whether a precursor command is included as the start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, a process of inputting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command to the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3202. Thus, when the number of remaining games in the precursor mode becomes the number corresponding to the start of the continuous production (the remaining four games), the continuous production is started. In the case where the number of precursor games of one to three games is input to the continuous effect counter in step S3202, the continuous effect is started halfway. For example, when 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S3202, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the effect of the third consecutive effect game in FIG. 73 (c). Further, when 0 is input to the continuous effect counter, that is, when a winning notification such as the AT mode is performed without passing through the precursor mode, the continuous effect is not executed. After performing the process of step S3202, in step S3203, a continuous effect flag is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3201, or after the process of step S3203 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3205. Then, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. If the continuous effect counter has a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S3207 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag has not been set, the process advances to step S3208 to acquire the sign effect table from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3209, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the present sign effect table and the continuous effect counter, the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and the current continuous effect is obtained. Is performed. If the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3 as the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the present sign effect table, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect is continued until the next game. If the value is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends with success.

  If it is determined in step S3207 that the pseudo flag has been set, the process advances to step S3210. In step S3210, a pseudo precursor effect table is obtained from the various table storage areas 182a. Then, in step S3211, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the pseudo precursor effect table and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data is obtained from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182. Is performed. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the pseudo precursor effect table, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicating that the continuous effect is continued until the next game or the effect data indicating that the continuous effect is not continued. If the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data indicates that the current continuous effect ends with a failure.

  In addition, when the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data identified from the pseudo precursor effect table includes those for which no continuous effect is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, the effect data of the continuous effect is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is continued until the next game in FIG. When the effect data of the first effect game is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data of the second effect game, which indicates that the continuous effect is not continued until the next game in FIG. 73B, is set. In this way, it is possible to set an effect in which the continuous effect is interrupted halfway in a game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is zero.

  After performing the processing in step S3209 or step S3211, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0. If the continuous effect counter is 0, a process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S3213. If the pseudo flag is not set, the state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S3204, step S3206, or step S3212, or after performing the processing in step S3213, the continuous effect setting processing ends.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 performs the lottery process based on the insertion of a medal as a game medium and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed. The rotation is started, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line corresponds to the result of the lottery process. In the configuration in which the benefit is provided, a plurality of RT states having different probabilities of being replays as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay winning is established. Whether the corresponding replay can be won or not is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the winning / rejecting lottery, and the notification of the operation order is sent to the advantageous section performed according to the result of the lottery process. This is performed by winning the transfer lottery and moving to the advantageous section, and further, winning the transfer lottery to the AT mode included in the advantageous section and moving to the AT mode. A pressing order bell is provided as a result of the lottery process, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the pressing order bell winning can be established and a medal can be obtained. Then, by shifting to the AT mode and shifting to the second RT state or the third RT state as the RT state in which the replay probability is improved, in the RT state, the pushing order bell prize is established with the improved replay probability. And a large number of medals can be obtained.

  As described above, when the mode shifts to the AT mode, the initial game number (50) is set, and the game in the AT mode can be performed over the initial game number. If the additional lottery is won in the AT mode or the like, the number of games that can be continued in the AT mode is increased, and the number of games in which a game in the AT mode can be performed increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be obtained in the AT mode can be increased.

  When the number of remaining games in the AT mode is 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes in the advantageous section is 0, or when the compulsory end condition of the advantageous section (1,500 games or 2400 cards increase) is satisfied. In the section display second processing, the end processing of the advantageous section (AT mode) is performed. As described above, in the process of ending the advantageous section, the initialization of various parameters (various information) in the advantageous section is performed so that the information in the advantageous section is not inherited after the end of the advantageous section. , The advantageous section and the normal section can be clearly distinguished.

  In addition, in the slot machine 10, in addition to the 0th RT state, the 1st RT state, the 2nd RT state, the 3rd RT state, and the 4th RT state as the normal gaming state, the 4th RT state is provided as the RT state. Are set so that the winning probabilities of the transfer lottery in the AT mode are different while the winning probabilities of the transfer lottery of the same are the same. More specifically, the winning probability of the AT mode shifting lottery in the fourth RT state is set to be higher than the winning probability of the AT mode shifting lottery in the 0th RT state to the third RT state. In other words, after the advantageous section is completed as described above, in the normal section, in order to receive the lottery for shifting to the advantageous section, there is no difference in the RT state in the winning probability, but after the transition to the advantageous section, the AT mode is set. In terms of the lottery transition to, the fourth RT state is more advantageous to the player than the 0th RT state to the third RT state.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 74, the probability of winning in the transition to the AT mode (including the SAT mode) in the advantageous section is determined according to the type of the special combination, from the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state. The probability and the winning probability in the fourth RT state are respectively set, and the winning probability in the fourth RT state is set to be higher than the winning probability in the 0th RT state to the third RT state. For example, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a strong watermelon, in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, it is set to win the transition lottery with a probability of about 50%, whereas in the 4th RT state, Is set to win the transfer lottery with a 100% probability. Also, in the AT mode shift lottery triggered by the push order bell or the push order replay, in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state, it is set to win the shift lottery with a probability of about 1%, while the 4th RT is set. In the state, it is set to win the transfer lottery with a probability of about 5%. Also, in the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a role having a difference in winning probability between the set values such as the strong cherry duplication 2 and the weak cherry duplication 2, the transition RT in the fourth RT state is better than the RT state 0 to the third RT state. The winning probability is set to make it easier to win. Therefore, from the viewpoint of the winning probability of the lottery transition to the AT mode, the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state can be referred to as an AT mode low probability state, and the fourth RT state is referred to as an AT mode high probability state. It is also possible.

  As described above, the transition to the fourth RT state is a case in which the transition replays 1 and 2 have been won in the second RT state or the third RT state, and stops in the operation order corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize. The operation is shifted by operating the switches 42 to 44. In the present embodiment, by shifting to the fourth RT state immediately before the end of the AT mode that is the second RT state or the third RT state, after the end of the AT mode, it is easy to win the transition lottery to the AT mode again. The state of Zhuang has been realized.

  The fourth RT state lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth RT state lottery table is a table selected based on the fact that the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S302 of the lottery process.

  The fourth RT state lottery table is different from the other RT state lottery tables (see FIG. 22 and the like) in that the point values PV of IV = 1 to 14 are different, and the same point values as the other index values IV are used. The value PV is set. For this reason, when the winning / non-winning determination of the hand is performed using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV = 15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in other RT states, and when IV = 1, The probability of winning is about 1 / 7.3, and when IV = 2 to 14, it does not win. That is, the lottery table for the fourth RT state is the same as the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), and the total replay probability in the fourth RT state is the normal game state (0th RT state) or the first RT state. Are set so as to have a lower probability than those of the second RT state and the third RT state. Note that the replay probabilities in both lottery tables may not be completely the same, and may be almost the same. More specifically, the difference is such that the player has difficulty in recognizing (for example, the difference in the winning probability is 0). .1%). Further, when the game state shifts to the fourth RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the fall replays 1 to 3, the second promotion replays 1, 2 and the BAR replays 1 and 2, which are the triggers for the game state transition, are not won. The transition of the game state based on the re-game prize does not occur. Then, as described above, the transition to the first RT state is not performed even when the transition roll is stopped in the fourth RT state. The fourth RT state is shifted to the normal game state by executing a predetermined number of games.

  If the fourth RT state is played in the normal mode, it is expected that the number of medals per game will be reduced by about 1.59. Also, when the game is played in the fourth RT state in the AT mode, the expected value of the medal increase becomes lower than in the second RT state or the third RT state. While it is possible to expect an increase of 90 medals, it is possible to expect an increase of about 0.61 medals per game in the fourth RT state. Can hardly expect a medal increase. In addition, the transition to the fourth RT state ends the AT mode, and thus the transition to the fourth RT state during the AT mode is disadvantageous for the player.

<Fixed RT game number setting process>
The number of games in the fourth RT state is set in step S519. Therefore, the fixed RT game number setting process executed in step S519 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3301, it is determined whether or not the eleventh replay winning is established. If the eleventh replay prize has been established, in step S3302, the fixed RT game number counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 sets "10" as the number of continuous games in the fourth RT state. After executing the inputting process, the fixed RT game number setting process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3301 that the eleventh replay winning has not been established, it means that the twelfth replay winning has been established. In this case, in step S3303, the fixed RT game is executed. After executing the process of inputting “30” to the number counter as the current game number in the fourth RT state, the fixed RT game number setting process ends.

  The fixed RT game number counter input in steps S3302 and S3303 is decremented by one for each game by the subtraction processing in step S502. Then, based on the fact that the fixed RT game number counter becomes 0, the fourth RT setting flag is cleared in step S504, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

<RT transfer process>
Whether or not the transition to the fourth RT state occurs in the AT mode is managed in the RT transition processing in the section display second processing (FIG. 54). The RT shift processing will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3401, it is determined whether an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT notification flag is set based on the fact that the player has won the lottery transition to the AT mode and has been notified that the player has won the lottery transition to the AT mode, and is cleared when the AT mode ends. The state in which the AT notification flag is set is a state in which the pressing order notification can occur. If the AT notification flag has not been set, the fixed RT process ends. If the AT notification flag is set, the process advances to step S3402. Note that, after the AT mode is started after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state or the third RT state and the AT mode is started, the game state shifts to the BB state or shifts to the first RT state before the end of the AT mode due to an operation mistake or the like. Also, the notification flag for AT is not cleared. Therefore, even if the state shifts to the first RT state before the end of the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S3402.

  In step S3402, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining zone advantageous games ZG (for example, the number of remaining games in the AT mode) has reached 10 as a predetermined value. Note that the predetermined value determined in step S3402 is a value equal to or less than the number of continuous games (the smaller of 10 and 30, the one that mainly shifts) when shifting to the fourth RT state. A negative determination is made in step S3402. For example, if the remaining number of games in the AT mode is more than 10 and the AT mode can still be continued, the fixed RT process is terminated. If the remaining number of continuous games in the AT mode is ten and the AT mode is about to end, the process advances to step S3403.

  In step S3403, a process of setting a transition notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is executed. The transition notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the transition to the fourth RT state has been permitted. The transition notification flag is cleared when the AT mode ends. After executing the process of step S3403, the process sets the migration command as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S3404, and then ends the fixed RT process.

  As described above, the transition to the fourth RT state is made based on the transition replays 1 and 2 winnings. More specifically, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of the transition replays 1 and 2 winnings is the eleventh replay prize or the If the game matches the twelve re-game winnings, a transition to the fourth RT state occurs. Here, in the second RT state and the third RT state in which the vehicle stays mainly during the AT mode, the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2 is about 1 / 6.5 (FIGS. 24 and 25). Then, when the number (1/10) obtained by dividing 1 by 10 which is set as the predetermined value and the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2 is compared, the winning probability of the transition replays 1 and 2 is calculated. Is a large value (high probability). Then, the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes ten, and one or more transition replays 1, 2 during the ten games from when the transition notification flag is set to when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes zero. It can be said that the winning probability of the transfer replays 1 and 2 and the predetermined value (10) for setting the transfer notification flag are set so that the winning can be expected.

<Fixed RT state notification processing>
Next, processing related to the fixed RT state on the display control device 81 side will be described. As such a process, there is provided an RT transition notification process in step S2916 in the all-stop-state effect setting process (FIG. 64). As described above, the all-stop effect setting process is a process performed based on the all-stop effect command from the main controller 101, and is generated when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop. This is the process for the effect.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 78, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the transition command has been received and the end of the AT mode has been reached. If the transfer command has been received, in step S3502, a process of setting a transfer replay notification flag in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 is executed. The transfer replay notification flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to recognize that the transfer command is being received from the main control device 101. After that, in step S3503, a process of setting a first transition period effect is executed. In the first transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a text “Aim for a chance zone entry” and, when the AT mode ends, sets the AT mode. The state is shifted to the fourth RT state as a high probability state, and a display (for example, a female character display or an explanatory note) indicating that a situation is likely to occur in which a rush into the extended-villa zone (retraction zone) in the AT mode is performed. In addition, in the first transition period effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “you can do it” with a gentle female voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, or after the processing in step S3503 is performed, it is determined in step S3504 whether the AT mode has ended in the current game. When the AT mode has ended, in step S3505, a process of clearing the above-described transition replay notification flag is executed, and in step S3506, a process of setting a second transition period effect is executed. In the second transition period effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a character string "Don't give up yet!" By shifting to the fourth RT state before the end of the 3RT state, a display (for example, a character display or a description of a male character) indicating that a situation may occur in which a rush into the extended-zone zone in the AT mode may occur. . In addition, in the second transition period effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “don't give up, it's OK”) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  Here, the difference between the case where the first transition period effect is performed and the case where the second transition period effect is performed will be described. The case where the first transition period effect is performed is a case where the AT mode is about to end as described above, and more specifically, a case where the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes ten. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is set, and if the transition replays 1 and 2 are won in this situation (before the AT mode ends), in the push order notification process (FIG. 61), an affirmative determination is made in step S2613. Then, in step S2614, a push order notification of the operation order in which the eleventh replay winning or the twelfth replay winning is established is generated. As a result, at the end of the AT mode, the RT state can be shifted from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state. In other words, when the first transition period effect is performed, although the AT mode is terminated after that, if the transition replays 1 and 2 are won before the end of the AT mode, the pressing order information is generated and the transition to the fourth RT state is performed. This makes it possible to shift to the AT mode high probability state. In this case, in the transfer replay winning game, it is possible to establish the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize together with the push order information corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize. Create a blessing effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), the character appearing in the first transition period effect is re-appeared on the auxiliary display unit 65 together with the pressing order information effect, and the corresponding sound effect (for example, , And the gentle voice of the woman, "Ick !!!!"

  On the other hand, the case where the second transition period effect is performed is a case where the AT mode ends as described above, and more specifically, a state where the pressing order notification effect does not occur from the next game when the AT mode ends. In this case, the transition replay notification flag is cleared. Then, if the player wins the shift replays 1 and 2 in this situation, the push order notifying command is not received from the main controller 101, so that in the push order notifying process (FIG. 61), a negative determination is made in step S2601 and the push order Notification effects no longer occur. In other words, when the second transition period effect is performed, although the AT mode has already been completed, the transition replay is won before the fall replay winning and winning, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the transition replay winning game. As long as the order can be matched with the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning, it is possible to shift to the AT mode high probability state. In this case, in the transition replay winning game, it is preferable to generate an effect that informs of a situation in which the eleventh replay winning or the twelfth replay winning can be established. For example, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the pressing order is displayed as “???” on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the character that appeared in the second transition period effect appears again, and Control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "I am very rough" in a rough voice of a man) is emitted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3504, or after the process of step S3506 is performed, the process advances to step S3507. In step S3507, it is determined whether a special RT start A command has been received. The special RT start A command is a case in which the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning has been established in the winning result handling process (FIG. 49) on the main controller 101 side, and the transition notification flag is set. If it is, the command is output (step S1624). If the special RT start A command has been received, processing for setting a special RT start effect A is performed in step S3508. In step S3509, a process of setting a special RT effect A flag is performed.

  In the special RT start effect A, for example, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the auxiliary display unit 65 displays a character "C-ZONE" indicating that it is a chance zone for entering the AT mode, and In correspondence with the number of executable games in the 4RT state, characters corresponding to the number of fixed RT games (in the figure, images simulating bullets) are displayed for the number of games. The fixed RT game number corresponding character disappears one by one (for example, one from the right) each time one game is consumed in the fourth RT state, and becomes 0 in the final game in the fourth RT state.

  In the special RT start effect A, after the display indicating the above chance zone, for example, as shown in FIG. Are displayed side by side. Then, in each game in the fourth RT state in a state where the special RT effect A flag is set, the plural pieces of identification information are changed and displayed, and stopped in a stop mode according to the result of the AT mode shift lottery. In the case of winning in the AT mode shift lottery, the combination of these pieces of identification information is set to a predetermined mode (for example, 333 or the like), and in the case of non-winning, the mode is different from the predetermined mode (for example, 334, etc.).

  That is, the game in the fourth RT state can be executed by the number of characters corresponding to the fixed RT game number displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and is associated with the number of executable games in the AT mode high probability state. Then, in each game, the character corresponding to the fixed RT game number is consumed, and the result of the AT mode shift lottery is notified by the stop result of the identification information.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3507, or after the processing in step S3509 is performed, the process advances to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether a special RT start B command has been received. The special RT start B command is a case in which the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning has been established in the winning result correspondence processing (FIG. 49) on the main controller 101 side, and the transition notification flag is set. If not, the command is output (step S1625). Incidentally, the case where the transition notification flag is not set means the case before the transition notification flag is set or the case where the AT mode is not set. If the special RT start B command has been received, it is determined in step S3511 whether or not the AT mode is being performed. If it is not in the AT mode, the fixed RT state notification processing is ended as it is. When it is determined in step S3511 that the vehicle is in the AT mode, the state is changed from the second RT state or the third RT state to the fourth RT state during the AT mode (before the end transition notification flag is set). This is the case when migration has occurred.

  As described above, the fourth RT state is the AT mode high probability state, but the replay probability is lower than the second RT state and the third RT state. Less preferred for players. Further, the transition to the fourth RT state during the AT mode is performed in the AT mode except for the special situation such as the end of the AT mode in which the transition notification flag is set as described above because the AT mode is already set. There is not much merit in the high probability state of the mode transition lottery. Moreover, in the present slot machine 10, when transitioning to the fourth RT state during the AT mode, the AT mode is terminated regardless of the number of remaining games in the AT mode. Therefore, in the AT mode, when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs without setting the transition notification flag, it means that the situation is more disadvantageous for the player than when the transition does not occur. I do.

  If it is determined in step S3511 that the vehicle is in the AT mode, processing for setting a special RT start effect B is performed in step S3512. In step S3513, a process of setting a special RT effect B flag is performed. When a negative determination is made in either step S3510 or step S3511, or after the processing of step S3513 is performed, the RT shift notification processing ends.

  In the special RT start effect B, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (a), the characters "Garn ..." are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and a situation that is disadvantageous for the player (the replay probability is low) Is displayed (for example, the display of a disappointed male character or an explanation). In addition, in the special RT start effect B, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Yabyai yayaiyo” with a rushed male voice) is emitted from the speaker 64.

  In the special RT start effect B, after the display indicating that the AT mode has ended, for example, as shown in FIG. Is displayed to indicate that it is a chance zone where it is possible to shift to the terminated AT mode again. Then, in each game in the fourth RT state in which the special RT effect B flag is set, if the number of executable games in the fourth RT state is, for example, 10 games, the remaining game number is displayed as “10 remaining games”. The auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the display of the number of remaining games is subtracted and updated for each game.

<At the end of AT mode>
The manner in which the transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs during the AT mode will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 83 shows a state in which the AT mode ends without transition to the fourth RT state.

  For example, at the timing of ta1 in which the number of remaining games in the AT mode is more than 10, when one of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won, the transition notification flag is not set. In this case, the fourth RT state The push order notification corresponding to the first re-game, not the tenth re-game or the eleventh re-game, which causes the transition to, is generated. When the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order according to the notification of the pressing order, the transition of the RT state does not occur, and the second RT state and the third RT state with a high replay probability are maintained. The transition notification flag is set at the timing of ta2 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes ten, and the push order notification that causes the transition to the fourth RT state is generated at the subsequent transition replay 1 or 2 winning. . At ta2 when the transition notification flag is set, the above-described first transition period effect is executed (step S3503, FIG. 79 (a)).

  In the example of FIG. 83, a case is shown in which the transition notification flag is set at the timing of ta2, but the transition replays 1 and 2 wins do not occur by the timing of ta3 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 0. I have. When the number of remaining games becomes 0 at ta3, the AT mode ends, the pressing order notification does not occur, and the transition notification flag is also cleared. After ta3, and before the timing of ta5 when the RT state shifts to the first RT state due to the second replay winning or the stoppage of the transition, the push order notification is not generated but the replay probability is high. State, which is a so-called return section. In ta3, which shifts to the return section, the above-described second shift period effect is executed (step S3506, FIG. 80 (a)).

  If any one of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won at the timing of ta4 during this return section, since the push order information is not generated as described above, it corresponds to the tenth replay prize and the eleventh replay prize. The transition to the fourth RT state does not occur unless the operation order matches. More specifically, when the transition to the fourth RT state does not occur, the first re-game winning is established and the transition to the RT state does not occur, or the second re-game winning is established and the transition to the first RT state occurs. . When the transition replays 1 and 2 are won during the return section, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), an effect is generated to inform the user that the 11th replay winning or the 12th replay winning can be established. (FIG. 80 (b)). In the example of FIG. 83, it is indicated that the first re-game winning is achieved at ta4. In this case, the transition of the RT state does not occur, and the second re-game winning is achieved at the subsequent timing of ta5. A transition to the first RT state having a low replay probability occurs. After that, at the timing of ta6, etc., a transition trigger is won, an advantageous section transition lottery, and an AT mode transition lottery are performed.

  Regarding the advantageous section transition lottery, the probability of transition winning regardless of the level of the RT state is common, while regarding the AT mode transition lottery, the first RT state to the third RT state are AT mode low probability states, The 4RT state is the AT mode high probability state. Then, as described above, the transition to the first RT state occurs at ta5, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the low probability state. As a result, a relatively large number of games is required from the end of the AT mode at ta3 to the re-winning of the AT mode shift lottery. FIG. 83 shows that the player wins the AT mode shift lottery at the timing of ta7, and thereafter, the RT state shifts to the second RT state by the push order notification at the time of the push order replay winning.

  FIG. 84 shows a state where the transition to the fourth RT state occurs and the AT mode ends.

  When one of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won at the timing of tb1 in which the number of remaining games in the AT mode is more than 10, as in the case of ta1, the transition notification flag is not set. A corresponding push order notification is generated. Then, at the timing of tb2 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10, the transition notification flag is set, and the first transition period effect is executed.

  If any one of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won at the timing tb3 before the timing of tb4 when the remaining game number in the AT mode becomes 0 after the transition notification flag is set, A push order notification corresponding to the tenth replay winning or the eleventh replay winning is generated. In the transfer replay winning game at tb3, a situation in which it is possible to establish the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize together with the push order information corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize. An effect to congratulate is generated (FIG. 79 (b)). When the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the operation order according to the content of the notification of the pressing order, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, and the AT mode ends (step S1626). When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the special RT start effect A is executed, indicating that the state is the AT mode high probability state (FIG. 81).

  In the game at the timing of tb5, which is earlier than the timing of tb6 at which the specified number of games (10 games) in the fourth RT state transferred at tb3 is consumed, when the transition trigger is won, the transition trigger is triggered. The AT mode shift lottery is performed in the AT mode high probability state. When the lottery transition to the AT mode is won, the fourth RT state ends at tb6, and the state transits to the first RT state. At tb7, the RT state is changed to the second RT state by the push order notification at the time of the push order replay winning. Move to.

  FIG. 85 shows a case where the transition to the fourth RT state occurs before the remaining game number in the AT mode reaches ten games.

  When one of the transition replays 1 and 2 is won at the timing of tc1 in which the number of remaining games in the AT mode is more than 10, the transition notification flag is not set as in the case of ta1 and tb1. A push order notification corresponding to the game is generated. For example, in this case, if the tenth replay prize or the eleventh replay prize is established due to an operation error of the stop switches 42 to 44 or the like, a transition to the fourth RT state occurs, and it should have continued until tc4. The AT mode ends at tc1 when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs. In this case, the special RT start effect B is executed, and although a situation unfavorable for the player has occurred, it is indicated that the game is in the AT mode high probability state (FIG. 82).

  In the game at the timing of tc2, which is before the timing of tc3 at which the specified number of games (10 games) in the fourth RT state transferred at tc1 is consumed, the transition trigger is elected. The AT mode shift lottery is performed in the AT mode high probability state. FIG. 85 shows a case where the lottery for shifting to the AT mode has not been won. Then, when the fourth RT state ends at tc3 and the state transits to the first RT state, the state becomes the AT mode low probability state. It becomes difficult.

  As described above, while the game related to the instruction function such as the pressing order notification of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is advantageous to the player, the winning probability of the lottery transition to the advantageous section is prevented from being different depending on the RT state. In order to notify the pressing order of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 to the AT mode, the winning probability of the lottery is made different depending on the RT state. However, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the AT mode is likely to occur or a situation in which the transition to the AT mode is less likely to occur during the advantageous section, while making the chance equal even if any game table is selected and played. Great diversification of games is achieved.

  In addition, in the slot machine 10, the transition to the fourth RT state (AT mode high probability state) in which the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section is performed with a high probability is notified of the transition order of the transition replays 1 and 2 ( With the configuration in which the transition to the AT mode high-probability state is made, the gaming machine side determines whether or not the transition to the AT mode high-probability state is made by the presence or absence of the pushing order notification. It becomes possible to manage. This makes it possible to generate the AT mode high probability state at the timing intended by the designer.

  As described above, when the transition to the AT mode high probability state is caused by the push order notification, the push order notification occurs during the AT mode. Then, when a transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs, the AT mode ends. By doing this, the AT mode is terminated by the notification of the pressing order during the AT mode, and the transition to the AT mode causes a transition to a situation where the lottery is highly probable, and the transition to the AT mode is resumed. It is possible to realize a novel game property such that the game is more likely to occur.

  More specifically, the number of remaining games in the AT mode is set to be equal to or less than the prescribed number of games in the fourth RT state as the fixed RT state (10 so that the transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state may occur at the end of the AT mode. When the number of games is less than 10 games, which is the smaller of the 30 games and the 30 games), the transition notification flag is set so that the transition to the fourth RT state can occur. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to cause an event in which the AT mode is terminated in a situation where the benefits of the AT mode are not sufficiently enjoyed, such as at the beginning of the AT mode, and the AT mode has a high probability. The extended RT zone after the end of the AT mode can be realized by the fourth RT state as the state.

  As described above, since the AT mode shift lottery is performed during the advantageous section and is not performed during the normal section before the shift to the advantageous section, the game is diversified during the advantageous section and the game related to the instruction function in the normal section. To create an equal opportunity for On the other hand, since the upper limit number of games (1500 games) is defined for the advantageous section, the configuration is such that the AT mode shift lottery is performed during the advantageous section as described above. When a non-specific section occurs, the upper limit number of games may be eroded by the non-specific section, and a disadvantage that the benefit of the advantageous section cannot be substantially maximized may occur.

  In view of this, in the present slot machine 10, while demonstrating the relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery as described above, measures are taken to shorten the non-specific section. Hereinafter, this point will be described.

<Advantaged section winning process>
In the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 32), the advantageous section shift lottery processing (FIG. 33) is performed during the normal section, and the advantageous section winning time processing (step S807) performed when the advantageous section shift lottery is won. This will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3601, the result of the current lottery is determined. More specifically, the transition opportunity that led to the winning of the advantageous section shift lottery this time (for example, whether the winner has won the advantageous section shifting lottery with a strong cherry or has won the advantageous section shifting lottery with a strong watermelon) Figure out. In a succeeding step S3602, processing for grasping the current game state is executed. More specifically, it is determined whether the RT state is the 0th RT state to the 4th RT state. Then, in step S3603, a process of acquiring an AT mode shift lottery table according to the gaming state (RT state) is executed. That is, if the RT state grasped in step S3602 is the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode transition lottery table for the AT mode low probability state in FIG. 74 is obtained, and the RT state grasped in step S3602. Is the fourth RT state, the AT mode transition lottery table for the AT mode high probability state in FIG. 74 is acquired.

  Then, in step S3604, an AT mode shift lottery is executed. This processing is substantially the same as the processing in step S902, and the processing in step S902 is an AT mode shift lottery performed during the advantageous section, whereas the processing in step S3604 is the same as the advantageous section shift lottery. The process of step S3604 may be referred to as an AT mode destination lottery in that the lottery is performed in the selected game, that is, before the transition to the advantageous section.

  Thereafter, in step S3605, it is determined whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, processing for setting an AT mode winning flag and the like is performed in steps S3606 to S3613. Execute. The processing in steps S3606 to S3613 is the same as the processing in steps S904 to S911 in the first specific role processing (FIG. 34). If it is determined in step S3605 that the AT mode has not been won, then in step S3614 the AT non-winning second process is executed, and then the advantageous section shift winning process ends.

  The AT non-winning second process in step S3614 corresponds to the AT non-winning first process (step S912) when the AT mode shift lottery in the first specific combination process (FIG. 34) is not won. is there. Therefore, the first processing at the time of non-AT win and the second processing at the time of non-AT win will be described below.

<First processing when AT is not won>
First, the AT non-winning first process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the first processing at the time of non-AT winning is a processing in a case where the winning in the AT mode shift lottery during the advantageous section is not won.

  In step S3701, a process of setting an AT non-winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. By setting the AT non-winning flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011 in the second section display process (FIG. 54), and the third process at the time of AT non-winning in step S2012 is started.

  After the process of step S3701 is executed, in step S3702, a process of inputting 0 to the advantageous section end counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed, and then the first process at the time of non-AT winning is completed. . In the slot machine 10, the advantageous section is terminated when the AT mode shift lottery is not won. The advantageous section end counter ends the advantageous section after the AT mode shift lottery is not won. This is a counter for the CPU 102 to know the number of games up to. As described above, when 0 is input to the advantageous section end counter, it means that the advantageous section ends in the game.

<2nd processing when AT is not won>
Next, the AT non-winning second process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. As described above, the AT non-winning second process is a process performed when the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is performed when the AT mode shift lottery as the AT mode destination lottery is not won.

  The AT non-winning second process is substantially the same as the AT non-winning first process, and the difference is the value input to the advantageous section end counter. That is, in step S3801, a process of setting the AT non-winning flag is executed as in step S3701. Then, in step S3802, unlike step S3702, a process of inputting 1 to the advantageous section end counter is executed. When 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter, it means that the advantageous section ends in the game next to the game, that is, the advantageous section ends in the game that shifts to the advantageous section. After performing the processing of step S3802, the second processing at the time of non-AT winning is ended.

<Third processing when AT is not won>
Next, in the AT non-winning first processing and the AT non-winning second processing, the AT non-winning third processing of the section display second processing started by setting the AT non-winning flag is described below. This will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In step S3901, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned advantageous section end counter is 0. If the advantageous section end counter is 0, the process advances to step S3902 to execute an advantageous section end process. That is, in step S3902, a process of clearing the number AG of advantageous section games and the number ZM of increasing or decreasing the advantageous section to 0 is executed. Then, in step S3903, the display of the section display is ended by turning off the eighth display segment N8. After that, in step S3904, data initialization processing for initializing information of various counters and various flags in the advantageous section is executed, and then the third processing at the time of AT non-winning is ended. That is, the processing in steps S3902 to S3904 is the same as the processing in steps S2008 to S2010 in the second section display processing. If the advantageous section end counter is not 0 in step S3901, a subtraction process of subtracting 1 from the advantageous section end counter is performed in step S3905, and then the third processing at the time of non-AT winning is ended. For example, when 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter in the above-described AT non-winning second processing, when the input game (winning in the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery as the AT mode destination lottery is not performed). In the winning game), a negative determination is made in step S3901, the subtraction processing of the advantageous section end counter is performed in step S3905, and the processing for terminating the advantageous section in steps S3902 to S3904 is performed in the next game. The Rukoto.

<Advantageous section transition lottery and AT mode transition lottery>
The relationship between the advantageous section transition lottery and the AT mode transition lottery will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  When the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41, a lottery process is executed, and when a transition trigger is won in the lottery process, an advantageous section shift lottery is executed. At td1, a case in which the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is won is shown. In this case, the advantageous section flag is set in the game won in the advantageous section shifting lottery, and the next game started at td2 is set as the advantageous section. Become.

  When the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is performed as described above, the AT mode destination lottery (steps S3601 to S3604) is executed in the advantageous section shift winning processing. At td1, the case where the AT mode lottery is won is shown. In this case, the AT mode winning flag is set, but the AT non-winning flag is not set. As a result, in the section display second processing at the end of the current game and the section display second processing in the game having the advantageous section at td2, the AT non-winning third processing is not executed. , To the AT mode.

  At td3, a case is shown in which the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery has been won but the AT mode destination lottery in the advantageous section shifting winning processing at the time of the winning has not been won. In this case, the advantageous section flag is set at td3, the AT non-winning flag is also set, and 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter. As a result, the next game started at td5 is an advantageous section, but in the section display second processing executed at td6 when the game ends, the third processing at the time of AT non-winning is executed, The end processing of the section is executed. In other words, if the player wins the advantageous section shift lottery, the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode destination lottery) is executed in the game, but if the AT mode shift lottery is not won, the game shifts to the advantageous section. Even so, the advantageous section ends based on the non-winning of the AT mode shift lottery (based on the number of games set when the AT mode shift lottery is not won). It will be.

  At td3, 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter. Therefore, when the game won in the advantageous section shift lottery at td3 ends, even if the AT non-winning third processing is executed in the section display second processing of td4, only the advantageous section end counter is subtracted. Does not end the advantageous section and does not clear the advantageous section flag. In other words, when the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the AT mode shifting lottery is executed before shifting to the advantageous section, and when the AT mode shifting lottery is not won, the shift to the advantageous section is performed. The configuration is such that the advantageous section is terminated after the generation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent an event in which the AT mode shift lottery is executed even though the shift to the advantageous section is not performed.

  Also, by setting the advantageous section flag at td3, the next game started at td5 is an advantageous section. In this case, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is also executed in the game of td5 (first specific role processing). In the AT mode shift lottery at td5, a case in which the game is not won is shown. In this case, in the section display second processing of td6, which is the end timing of the game started at td5, as described above, AT In the non-winning third processing, the end processing of the advantageous section is executed.

  On the other hand, at td7, although the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the AT mode destination lottery in the advantageous section shifting winning processing at the time of the winning is not won, and further, the td9 performed in the shift game to the advantageous section is performed. In the AT mode shift lottery. In this case, at td7, the AT non-winning flag is set, 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter, and it is decremented to 0 at td8. By winning, the AT non-winning flag is cleared. As a result, in the section display second processing when the advantageous section transition game ends, the third processing is not executed when the AT is not won, and thereafter, the transition to the AT mode occurs.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

  A normal section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal section are provided, and the AT mode is set as a state included in the advantageous section. By setting the AT mode, the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed. With respect to the advantageous section shift lottery, there is no difference in the winning rate depending on each RT state, and with respect to the AT mode shift lottery, a difference in the win rate depending on each RT state can occur. By doing so, equality among players in selecting a gaming table in the normal section is ensured, and diversification of games using the AT mode in the advantageous section is achieved.

  Moreover, in the above-described embodiment, the push mode notification of the eleventh re-game or the twelfth re-game, in which the transition to the fourth RT state in which the AT mode shift lottery is easily won, can be generated. The timing at which the transition to the fourth RT state as the state occurs can be managed to some extent on the gaming machine side, and in the AT mode in which the push order notification occurs, the state is further shifted to the AT mode high probability state. In addition, the state called the extended zone or the retraction zone in the AT mode can be realized by the transition of the RT state, which can contribute to the realization of a novel game.

  In the AT mode, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs after the number of remaining games becomes equal to or less than the number of continuous games in the fourth RT state. It is possible to avoid the event of shifting. In this way, the timing for enjoying the staying AT mode and the timing for subsequently enjoying whether or not the user can shift to the new AT mode are determined in relation to the number of games in the AT mode. The timings can be set as separate timings, and it is possible to realize the extended play zone and the like using the fourth RT state in a range where the interest of the game in the AT mode is not reduced.

  With the configuration in which the AT mode is terminated by the transition to the fourth RT state, it is determined whether or not the transition to the fourth RT state occurs during the AT mode. In addition to the elements described above, an element such as whether or not the AT mode is terminated is added, and it is possible to determine whether or not there is a transition replay winning that may cause a transition to the fourth RT state, and to draw a great interest in the winning game. Becomes

  Since the advantageous section is terminated based on the non-winning of the AT mode shift lottery, the number of games in the advantageous section but not in the AT mode can be reduced. By doing so, in the configuration in which the upper limit game number is set in the advantageous section, it is possible to eliminate the event that the upper limit game number is eroded by the game number in a situation other than the AT mode.

  When the winning in the advantageous section transition lottery is won, an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the game result of the game. As a result, in a lottery system in which it is necessary to win the shift lottery to the advantageous section and further to win the shift lottery to the AT mode, in a so-called rare role such as a strong cherry to win the shift lottery to the advantageous section. Despite the winning, it is possible to eliminate the difficulty of the game in which a rare combination must be allocated for the AT mode shift lottery.

  The AT mode shift lottery at the time of the advantageous section shift winning can be executed in the game before the shift to the advantageous section, and even if the AT mode shift lottery is won, a transition to the AT mode is made thereafter. By doing so, at the time of winning the advantageous section shift lottery, the AT mode shift lottery can be performed before shifting to the advantageous section, and the interval between the advantageous section win game and the AT mode shift lottery game is minimized. (Set to 0).

<Modification 1>
In this modification, an example of a configuration in which a transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs when a predetermined condition is satisfied is described. In this example, the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the upper limit number of games or the maximum number of medals, which are the conditions for forcibly terminating the advantageous section, are reached before the conditions for forced ending are satisfied. A configuration for causing a transition to the fourth RT state will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the RT shift processing according to this modification.

  In this modification, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in step S4001. If the AT notification flag has not been set, the RT transfer processing ends. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4002 that the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG has become equal to or less than the specified number of games in the fourth RT state. If the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous section is equal to or less than the prescribed number of games in the fourth RT state, a transition notification flag is set in step S4003, and a process for setting a transition command in step S4004 is performed. , And terminates the RT transfer processing. The processing in steps S4001 to S4004 is the same as the processing in steps S3401 to S3404.

  If it is determined in step S4002 that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is not 10, it is determined in step S4005 whether it is known that the forced ending condition of the advantageous section will be satisfied in the future. More specifically, in step S4005, it is determined whether the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the first excess flag is determined to reach the upper limit game number (1500) of the advantageous section in the future in relation to the current number of advantageous section games AG and the remaining number of advantageous section games ZG. Is a flag that is set to In addition, it is understood that the second excess flag will reach the upper limit increase number (2400 sheets) of the advantageous section in the future in relation to the present advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG, and the expected net increase. This is a flag that is set when a call is made. If these flags have not been set, the RT shift processing ends. If either the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the process proceeds to step S4006 to determine whether or not the situation is close to the condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous section. Is 1450, and there are 50 remaining games up to the upper limit game number (1500) in the advantageous section, or the average game required for the upper limit increase number (2400) in the advantageous section when the number of increase or decrease in the advantageous section ZM is 2300. It is determined whether the number is one of the remaining 50 games (calculated with expected net increase of about +2.0). If it is any one of them, the process proceeds to step S4003, where the transition notification flag and the transition command are set, and the RT transition process ends. If neither is the case, the RT shift processing is terminated.

  That is, in the number of remaining games before the end of the advantageous section, the number of remaining games in step S4006 is larger than the number of remaining games in step S4002, and the case where the forced ending condition is satisfied is more than the case where it is not so. Also, the transition notification flag is set earlier so that the transition to the fourth RT state can occur. By doing so, it is possible to avoid an event that the transition to the fourth RT state cannot be caused by not winning the transition replays 1 and 2 even though the transition notification flag is set. Becomes possible.

  As described above, in this modified example, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by reaching the upper limit game number or the upper limit increase number of the advantageous section, a transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs. I did it. By doing so, it is possible to make the transition to the fourth RT state as a supplement to the expectation that the AT mode may have been still continued without forced termination.

  In this case, since the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the advantageous section is terminated. Therefore, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs before the forced termination, which substantially increases the upper limit number of games or the upper limit. The advantage interval will end without reaching the number. On the other hand, a transition to the AT mode may occur immediately thereafter. Therefore, for example, in the case where it is desired to reduce the number of forced terminations, it is possible to expect an effect that the number of forced terminations can be reduced without shortening the substantial length of the advantageous section. become. It should be noted that the forced termination is not preferable for the player, and the fact that the number of times the forced termination is performed is a preferable event for the player. More specifically, although the upper limit number of games, such as the forced termination, is set, by shifting to the AT mode high probability state before the forced termination and ending the advantageous section, the game can be performed through the AT mode high probability state. , The advantageous section to the AT mode can be continued, and in effect, the number of games until the forced termination can be reset to the initial value. Therefore, in the advantageous section to the AT mode, which is restarted through the fourth RT state, it is possible to realize a playability of retrying the continuation up to the upper limit number of games.

<Modification 2>
In the present modified example, when the forcible end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, whether or not to cause the transition to the fourth RT state is changed depending on the benefit of the advantageous section that cannot be obtained by the forcible end condition.

  FIG. 92 (a) is a flowchart showing the game number addition processing in the present modification. The additional game process is, for example, the process executed in step S1018 in the second specific role process (FIG. 35), and is executed when the additional lottery is won in the AT mode and the additional game number is determined. .

  In step S4101, it is determined whether any one of the first excess flag and the second excess flag has been set and it is known that the forced termination condition will be satisfied in the future. If neither the first excess flag nor the second excess flag is set, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is performed in step S4102, and in step S4103, the number of target continuous games (AT mode) After performing the process of adding the number of added games to the (continuation number), the process of adding the number of games is completed.

  If it is determined in step S4101 that any of the excess flags has been set, the process advances to step S4104. In step S4104, a process of grasping the number of additional games this time is executed. Then, in step S4105, a process of adding the number of added games this time to the number of disappeared games EG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed, and then the number of added games is terminated. When the first excess flag or the second excess flag has already been set for the number of disappeared games EG, and even if the number of games to be added is increased, the number of games to be added cannot be consumed by the forced termination process. In addition, the CPU 102 is a counter for the CPU 102 to know the number of additional games (the degree of benefit from the additional).

  FIG. 92 (b) shows an RT shift process according to this modification.

  In step S4151, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the same manner as described above, and if it is not set, the RT shift processing ends. If it is set, it is determined in step S4152 whether or not the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 10. If there are remaining 10 games, the transition notification flag is set in step S4513, the transition command is set in step S4514, and the RT transition process ends. These processes are as described above, and when the remaining 10 games are reached, a push order notification for transition to the fourth RT state at the time of transition replay winning is generated.

  If the number-of-advantageous-sections remaining game number ZG is not 10 in step S4152, the flow advances to step S4155. In step S4155, it is determined whether any one of the first excess flag and the second excess flag is set. If any of the excess flags is set, it is determined in step S4156 whether the number AG of advantageous section games is 1450 or the number ZM of advantageous section increase / decrease is 2300. If a negative determination is made in step S4155 or step S4156, the RT shift processing ends.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4156, that is, if the number-of-advantageous-section games AG is 1450, or the number-of-advantageous-section increase / decrease number ZM is 2,300, and the condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous section is almost satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4157. In step S4157, a process of grasping the number of disappeared games EG is executed, and in subsequent step S4158, a transition notification lottery process is executed. In the transition notification lottery process, the winning probability is set to increase as the value of the number of disappeared games EG increases. For example, if the number of disappeared games EG is 10, and the number of additional games generated after any of the excess flags is set, that is, the number of games that cannot be consumed by forced termination is 10, the transition notification lottery is performed. Wins with a probability of about 10%. On the other hand, if the number of disappeared games EG is 50 and the number of games that cannot be consumed by the forced termination is 50 games, the transition notification lottery is won with a probability of about 50%. The setting is such that the greater the number of games that cannot be performed, the easier it is to win the transition notification lottery.

  In step S4159, it is determined whether or not the transition notification lottery process in step S4158 has been won. If the winning has not been achieved, the RT shift processing is terminated as it is. If the winning has been achieved, the process proceeds to step S4153. In this case, by setting the transition notification flag, if a transition replay is won in a subsequent game, a push order notification that causes transition to the fourth RT state is generated.

  As described above, according to the present modification, as the additional amount exceeds the upper limit game number or the upper limit increase number, the transition to the fourth RT state is more likely to occur. By doing so, it is possible not only to reduce the feeling of loss of the above-mentioned excess, but also in situations where it is already specified that the number of games reaches the maximum number of games or the maximum number of games to increase the number of games. When it occurs, it is difficult for the player to feel that the player has lost the game, and it is possible to appropriately enhance the game performance in the situation.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, a configuration in which the transition rate to the fourth RT state differs depending on the set value will be described.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows a part of the second RT state lottery table and the third RT state lottery table. In the present modified example, the winning probabilities of the transfer replay 1 are set to be higher in the settings 3 and 4 than in the settings 1 and 2, and further to be higher in the settings 5 and 6. More specifically, the probability of winning the transition replay 1 in the settings 1 and 2 is about 8.7 /, while the settings 3 and 4 are about 1 / 6.9 in the settings 5 and 5 In the case of No. 6, it is about 1 / 5.7. In this case, the probability of winning the transition replay 1 among the remaining 10 games after the remaining game number in the advantageous section becomes 10 games and the transition notification flag is set as described above, 70%, about 79% for settings 3 and 4, and about 85% for settings 5 and 6, the probability that the transition to the fourth RT state will occur at the end of the advantageous section, that is, the probability of transitioning to the AT mode high probability state at the end of the advantageous section. Are higher in settings 3 and 4 than in settings 1 and 2, and settings 5 and 6 are even higher. As described above, it is possible to cause a difference due to the set value in the AT mode of extended play performance only by changing the winning probability of the transition replay 1 according to the set value.

  Incidentally, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), the transition to the fourth RT state with the number of games (30 games) larger than the transition replay 1 in which the transition to the fourth RT state of the ten games is permitted. The permissible winning probability of the transition replay 2 is set so that there is no difference due to the set value. In this way, regardless of the set value, regarding the transition to the fourth RT state, a game having a strong luck factor is also incorporated, for example, when it is determined that the set value is low during the game. It is also possible to boost the continuation of the game.

  Further, in the settings 1 to 6, the winning probabilities of the transition replay 1 are different as described above, but the total replay probabilities are set to be common. More specifically, the winning probability of the normal replay is also set to be different depending on the set value. The difference in the winning probability of the transition replay 1 is absorbed by the difference in the winning probability of the normal replay, and the winning probability of the normal replay is It is set so that it becomes lower as the set value becomes higher. By doing so, the expected increase in the number of games per game in the second RT state or the third RT state is not changed through the difference in the total replay probability, or the set value is predicted and specified from the replay probability. It is possible to suppress that.

  In particular, at the time of the transfer replay 1 winning, in many cases (before the transfer notification flag is set), the pressing order notification corresponding to the first replay winning is generated. Therefore, it is difficult to know from the winning mode whether the transfer replay 1 has been won and the first replay winning has been achieved, or whether the normal replay has been won and the first replay winning has been achieved. It should be noted that the configuration in which the push order information is generated even at the time of the normal replay winning determines whether the normal replay or the transition replay has been won based on the presence or absence of the push order information when the first replay winning is established. It is also possible to avoid this. In this case, at the time of the normal replay winning, it is preferable to generate a pressing order notification in a random or predetermined stop order.

  FIG. 93 (b) shows a configuration in which the winning probability of the transition notification lottery process varies depending on the number of additional games (the number of excess games) generated in the situation where the excess flag is set, as in Modification Example 2 above. An example that differs depending on the set value is shown. More specifically, in the situation where the number of excess games is 1 to 50, the probability of winning the transition notification lottery is 30% for the settings 1 and 2, 35% for the settings 3 and 4, and 40% for the settings 5 and 6. , The higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the transition notification lottery. Further, in the situation where the number of excess games is 101 or more, the probability of winning the transition notification lottery is 50% for the settings 1 and 2, 70% for the settings 3 and 4, and 90% for the settings 5 and 6. The higher the value, the higher the probability of winning the transition notification lottery, and the greater the number of excess games, the higher the probability of winning the transition notification lottery. Are set so that the difference in the setting of the probability of winning is large. By doing so, in a situation where any of the excess flags are set, the transition notification flag is set, and the likelihood of occurrence of the push order notification to the fourth RT state when the transition replay is won depends on the set value. It becomes different, and a game such as predicting a set value from the occurrence rate of the push order notification is added. In addition, as the addition occurs after the excess flag is set, that is, as the number of games that cannot be substantially consumed by forced termination increases, the prediction of the set value can be more easily predicted in the game for predicting the set value. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the increase in the number of games that cannot be digested.

  In the configuration in which the winning probability of the transition replay 1 differs depending on the set value as described above, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win the transition replay 1; Or the odds of the transition replay 1 may be different between the case where the setting value is an even number and the case where the setting value is an odd number. Further, the transition replay that changes the winning probability according to the set value is not limited to the transition replay 1, but the winning probability of the transition replay 2 may be different depending on the set value, or the winning probabilities of the transition replay 1 and the transition replay 2 may be different. It may be made different depending on the set value. In this case, for example, the transition replay 1 may have a higher winning probability as the set value is higher, while the transition replay 2 may have a lower winning probability as the set value is higher.

  In addition, even in a configuration in which the winning probability of the transition notification lottery is changed according to the set value, the number of excess games is not limited to the configuration in which the transition notification lottery is more likely to be won. The configuration, or the case where the set value is an even number and the case where the set value is an odd number, the winning probability of the transition replay 1 may be different. Also, when the number of excess games is a good number of games such as 50, 100, 150, it is easier to win the transition notification lottery than 1-49 or 51-99, 101-149 different from that. It may be configured.

  Further, in the configuration in which the winning probability of the transition notification lottery is varied depending on the set value, the description has been made on the assumption that the lottery based on the number of excess games of the second modification is described. Instead of, or in addition to, a configuration in which the transition notification flag is set uniformly when the value of the number reaches 10, the transition notification flag is set when the lottery is won through the transition notification lottery. Then, the winning probability of the lottery may be changed depending on the set value. Then, the probability that the transition notification flag is set may be different depending on the set value. For example, instead of the transition notification lottery winning probability, the predetermined number of winning combinations and the number of winning prizes (for example, pressing order) The notification flag for transition may be set when the number of times the bell has been won or the number of winnings has reached a predetermined number, and the winning probability of the predetermined combination may be different depending on the set value.

<Modification 4>
In the present modified example, the player can select whether or not to cause the transition to the fourth RT state when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won. As described above, when the transition to the AT mode occurs, the initial game number (50) in the AT mode is set in the start processing. Here, when the transition replay is won in the AT mode (the second RT state or the third RT state), the pressing order for transition to the fourth RT state is notified until the number of remaining games reaches the predetermined number of games as described above. Does not occur, but if the transition to the fourth RT state occurs and the transition to the AT mode again succeeds, assuming that no extra has occurred, the digestion is completed by then. It can be said that the number of games in the AT mode has been extended by the length of the AT mode.

  More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), in the AT mode started at te1 and the initial game number is scheduled to be exhausted at te5, it is assumed that a transition replay has been won at te2. In this case, for example, it is assumed that the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred at te2, and that the transition to the advantageous section and the success of the AT mode transition lottery have been successful in the fourth RT state. In this case, when the fourth RT state ends at te3 and the mode shifts to the AT mode at te4, if the initial game number (50) is set again as described above, the reset AT mode is up to te6. Is determined. Then, it is possible to recognize that the addition of the AT mode is caused by winning the transition replay in te2 by the number of the games in the AT mode that have been consumed from te1 to te2.

  However, in the above example, in the fourth RT state from te2 to te3, the advantage section and the AT mode shift lottery are won. If the user wins the section shift lottery but does not win the AT mode shift lottery, the AT mode ends without completely exhausting the remaining games in the AT mode from te2 to te5.

  The present modification is to incorporate a benefit and a risk by resetting the AT mode into a game by causing a player to select the benefit and the risk. In other words, in the present modified example, an effect of allowing the player to select whether or not to cause the transition to the fourth RT state while considering such a difference in the advantage depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode at the time of the transition replay winning. Is performed in the transfer replay winning game. For example, as shown in FIG. 94 (a), in the transition replay winning game, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the character "select fate !!" and, depending on the operation order, transitions to the fourth RT state. Or a notification indicating that the transition to the fourth RT state or the transition to the first RT state does not occur. In this case, notification of the remaining number of games in the AT mode (displayed as “30 G remaining” in the figure) helps to take into account the difference in the advantage due to the remaining number of games in the AT mode.

  As the winning combination in the case of winning at the index value IV = 13, 14 corresponding to the transition replay, the first replay, the eleventh replay, and the twelfth replay are set, and the second replay is not set. You may do so. In other words, depending on the operation order at the time of the transfer replay winning, the transition to the fourth RT state occurs or the transition to the RT state does not occur, and the transition to the first RT state does not occur. Is also good. In this case, the operation order at the time of the transfer replay winning can be further simplified, and as shown in FIG. 94 (a), by stopping from the left reel 32L, the first replay prize is established, and from the right reel 32R. By stopping the game, the player can easily select either the left or right, such as the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize, and the player's understanding of the game is expected to be improved.

  In addition, a specific configuration of the operation order corresponding to each replay when the transfer replay is won is, for example, as follows. When the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are operated to stop in the order of left → middle → right and left → right → middle, the first replay winning is established, and right → middle → left and right When the stop operation is performed in the order of → left → middle, the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning is established. When the stop operation is performed in the order of center → left → right, the first replay winning is established. A game prize is established.

  In addition, the transfer replay in which the operation order and the winning mode in which either the left or right can be selected and the winning mode are set is provided separately from the transfer replays 1 and 2 of the first embodiment, and these coexist. It may be configured.

<Modification 5>
In the present modified example, the transition to the fixed RT state is generated in consideration of the postponed notification. First, the post-addition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The post-addition notification process is a process performed in step S1602 in the winning result correspondence process (FIG. 49) by the main control device 101.

  In step S4201, it is determined whether an AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. If the AT notification flag has not been set, the post-addition notification process ends. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not a bonus state is being set. If it is any of the BB state based on the first BB or the second BB or the CB state based on the CB, the post-addition notification process is ended as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the flow advances to step S4203 to perform a subtraction process on the remaining display counter HG. In this case, in step S4203, a command including the value after the subtraction of the remaining display counter HG is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received such a command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 so as to update the display of the number of remaining games. The display control device 81 may be provided with a counter or the like corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG, and the display control device 81 may perform a process for updating the remaining game number display.

  In step S4204, it is determined whether or not the display remaining number counter HG has reached a predetermined value (1) as a trigger for post-notification as a processing result of step S4203. If the predetermined value has not been reached, the post-notification information processing is terminated. If the value has reached the predetermined value, it is determined in step S4205 whether or not the post-installation flag has been set. If the post-addition flag is not set, the post-addition notification processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S4205 that the post-installation flag is set, the process advances to step S4206. In step S4206, the value of the post loading counter BG is grasped. Then, in step S4207, a process of setting an additional command is performed so that an additional notification according to the value of the additional counter BG is performed. In this case, the additional command includes information indicating that an additional notification is to be performed in the game, and information indicating that the number of games is to be added according to the value of the additional counter BG. In addition, it is good also as a structure which adds a part of post loading counter BG, for example, after deciding whether to add a part by lottery, when making it a part, adding the number of games of the part May be set in an additional command.

  In the following step S4208, a process of subtracting the value corresponding to the number of additional games set in the additional command in step S4207 from the additional counter BG is performed. Then, in step S4209, it is determined whether or not the post-addition counter BG has become 0 as the processing result of step S4208. If it is not 0, the post-addition notification process ends. If the value is 0, the post-addition flag is cleared in step S4210, and then the post-addition notification process ends.

  As described above, an additional command is transmitted to the display control device 81 in the additional information notification processing in the winning result correspondence processing. As already described, in the display control device 81, a process for performing an additional notification effect is performed in the additional notification process in the all-stop effect setting process. Thereby, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG has reached the predetermined value, the additional notification is executed as the additional information after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. Therefore, in the game in which the display remaining number counter HG has reached the predetermined value (1), regardless of the winning result of the game, it is expected that an additional notification (post-addition notification) will be performed, while the third reel is displayed. The stop OFF operation is performed.

  By the way, the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation of the timing of the additional notification selected when performing the immediate loading notification may be different from the timing of the full stop when performing the late loading notification. That is, the third reel stop OFF operation is the timing at which the stop OFF operation of the third reel is performed, and the corresponding reel may stop at this timing, or may be slightly delayed with the slip control. May stop the corresponding reel. Therefore, the timing of the third reel stop OFF operation may be a timing slightly earlier than the timing at which all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop. On the other hand, the execution timing of the post-addition notification set in the post-addition notification process in the winning-result-response processing is the timing after the execution of the winning-result-response processing, and all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely completed. This is the timing after the payout is performed (after the payout determination processing in step S413 is executed) if the small win has occurred. Therefore, the timing at which the post-placement notification is executed may be later than the timing at which the third reel stop OFF operation in the immediate-placement notification is performed.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 96, of the RT shift processing in this modification.

  In step S4301, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. If it has not been set, the process for RT transfer ends. If it is set, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the number ZG of remaining games in the advantageous section is 10. If it is 10, the transition notification flag is set in step S4303, the transition command is set in step S4304, and the RT transition process ends.

  If the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is not 10 in step S4302, the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4305, it is determined whether or not the post-installation flag is set. If the rear loading flag is set, in step S4306, the display remaining number counter HG is set to 10, and it is determined whether or not the display of the remaining game number in the AT mode is apparently 10 games. If the post-addition flag is not set in step S4305, or if the display remaining number counter HG is not 10, the RT shift processing ends. If the post loading flag is set and the display remaining number counter HG is 10, the flow advances to step S4307.

  In step S4307, a process of setting a pseudo migration notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The pseudo transition notification flag is a flag for the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 to know that when a transition replay is won in a situation where postponement notification can occur, the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will perform an effect for that. After executing the processing of step S4307, the pseudo migration command is set as an output target to the display control device 81 in step S4308, and then the RT migration processing ends. The display control device 81 that has received the pseudo-transition command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the first transition period effect is generated, as in the case where the transition command is received.

  Next, a description will be given, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 97, of the pressing and succeeding processing in this modification.

  In the present modified example, generally, the processing when the transition replay is won in the situation where the transition notification flag is not set in the AT mode is different. That is, the processing in steps S4401 to S4423 is the same as the processing in steps S1401 to S1423, and the processing when a negative determination is made in step S4421 is different.

  More specifically, it is determined that the transfer replay has been won in step S4419, and that the AT notification flag has been set in step S4420, and the transfer notification flag is set in step S4421. If it is determined that there is not, in this modified example, the process proceeds to step S4428. In step S4428, it is determined whether or not the pseudo transition notification flag set in step S4307 is set. The case where the pseudo transition notification flag is set means that the value of the display remaining number counter HG is 10 in a situation where the post-addition flag is set, and apparently the remaining number of games in the AT mode is 10. This is a case where a first transition period effect has occurred, and a transition replay has been won. That is, this is a case where the AT mode is not actually approaching the end.

  In this case, in this modification, a so-called freeze effect for temporarily limiting the progress of the game is generated. That is, when it is determined in step S4428 that the notification flag for pseudo transition is set, the process proceeds to step S4429 to execute a freeze timing lottery process. In the freeze timing lottery process, the generation timing of the freeze effect is randomly selected according to the number of games in the AT mode that can be notified by the post-addition notification. More specifically, while acquiring a post-load counter BG and a lottery counter from various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, a freeze timing table is obtained from various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105, and a freeze corresponding to the value of the post-load counter BG. Timing is determined by lottery. As shown in FIG. 98, the freeze timing table sets the first stop ON operation, the second stop ON operation, and the third stop ON operation as the freeze timing, and sets the value of the rear-load counter BG as It is determined which operation will cause a freeze at the appropriate distribution rate. The setting is made such that the larger the value of the rear loading counter BG, the easier the selection is made on the rear side operation than on the front side operation.

  After executing the freeze timing lottery process in step S4429, in step S4430, a process of setting a freeze flag according to the lottery result in step S4429 in various flag storage areas 106d is performed. Specifically, if the lottery result in step S4429 is the first stop ON operation, the first stop ON freeze flag is set, and if the lottery result is the second stop ON operation, the second stop ON freeze flag is set. Is set, and if the lottery result is the third stop ON operation, the third stop ON freeze flag is set.

  If it is determined in step S4428 that the notification flag for pseudo transition has not been set, or after the processing in step S4430 has been performed, the flow proceeds to processing in step S4407 for informing the push order for the first replay.

  Note that, in this case, the pressing order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo transition notification flag is set and the pressing order notification by the instruction monitor 68 when the pseudo transition notification flag is not set are both performed. This is common in that a push order for one replay prize is reported. On the other hand, the effect contents including the push order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is set, and the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is not set. The effect contents including the push order information effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition information flag is not set are not set to the transition information flag. In the case of the first replay prize winning effect including the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 in the case, the pressing order information effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the pseudo transition notification flag is set is set. The effect contents including the effect contents for the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize by the auxiliary display unit 65 when the transition notification flag is set are common. Ri, only the order of the push order notification is informed as the first replay for winning. In other words, when the transition replay is won in a situation where the pseudo transition notification flag is set, the push order notification and the push order notification effect are informed of the operation sequence for the first replay prize, but the transition notification is performed. It is difficult to distinguish between the case where the transition replay has been won in the situation where the flag is set and the effect contents by the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like.

  The processing for freeze in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. In the freeze process, when it is determined in step S404 that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the reel control process (FIG. 18) by the main controller 101, the stop command is not set in step S405. This is the process performed before. The freeze processing may be performed during the invalid period of each of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the current stop operation is a first stop ON operation. If it is the first stop ON operation, it is determined in step S4502 whether the first stop ON freeze flag is set. If it has not been set, the freeze processing ends. If it is set, a freeze process is executed in step S4503. In the freeze process, the operation of the other stop switches 42 to 44 is temporarily disabled without stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R. That is, by the freeze process, the progress of the normal game such as stopping the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is temporarily restricted.

  After executing the freeze process in step S4503, a process of setting the special effect command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed in step S4504. The special effect command is a command for generating an effect corresponding to the freeze processing. In the display control device 81, based on the reception of the special effect command, the special effect is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the speaker. 64 and so on. Then, in step S4505 to step S4508, a process for generating a post notification is executed. That is, in step S4505, an additional command corresponding to the additional counter BG is set, and in step S4506, a subtraction process of the additional counter BG is performed. In step S4507, it is determined whether or not the add-on counter BG has become 0. If it has become 0, a process for clearing the add-on flag is executed in step S4508. If it is not 0, the freeze processing ends.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4501, the process advances to step S4509 to determine whether the current stop operation is a second stop ON operation. If the operation is the second stop ON operation, in step S4510, it is determined whether the second stop ON freeze flag is set. If the second stop ON-time freeze flag is not set, the freeze process ends as it is. If the second stop ON-time freeze flag has been set, the process advances to step S4503 to perform processing for generating a freeze effect, a special effect, and a postponement notification.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4509, the process advances to step S4511 to determine whether the current stop operation is a third stop ON operation. If it is the third stop ON operation, it is determined in step S4512 whether or not the third stop ON freeze flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S4511 (if the current stop operation is any stop OFF operation), or if the third stop ON freeze flag is not set, the freeze process is terminated. If the third-stop-on-freeze flag is set in step S4512, the process advances to step S4503 to perform processing for generating a freeze effect, a special effect, and a postponement notification.

  The appearance of the freeze effect and the special effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows a freeze effect and a special effect when the second stop ON-time freeze flag is set.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), for example, in a situation where the middle reel 32M is stopped as the first stop reel, the right stop switch 44 is turned ON to stop the right reel 32R as the second stop reel. Suppose you did. In this case, since the second stop ON freeze flag is set as described above, the stop control of the right reel 32R is limited based on the stop ON operation of the right stop switch 44. In this case, the stop control of the left reel 32L based on the stop ON operation of the left stop switch 42 is also limited, so that a so-called freeze effect is generated.

  In the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64, a special effect is generated in correspondence with the freeze effect. In the special effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), a male character wrapped in flames is displayed, and the male voice is loud, saying, "I was just looking at you!" Are described from the speaker 64, and a description is given that the display up to that time, that is, the pressing order notification for causing the first transition period effect and the transition to the fourth RT state was a pseudo display. You. In addition, it is more preferable that the words are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 as characters. The special effect is executed during a period in which a freeze effect is performed, that is, a period in which stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on a stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is limited. When the stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R based on the stop operation is restarted, the special effect ends, and the above-mentioned additional information is generated (an additional information effect is generated). The player can grasp that a special effect is generated by limiting the stop control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Then, by the special effect, it is possible to grasp that the transition to the fourth RT state is attempted based on the transition replay winning, but it is not a situation to transition to the fourth RT state, that is, that the AT mode is still continued. In addition, instead of establishing the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning and shifting to the fourth RT state, it is possible to establish the first re-game winning and maintain the infinite RT state. In addition, at the same time, an additional (later) AT mode occurs.

  As described above, in the present modification, the special effect can be generated due to the relationship with the postponing notification while utilizing the configuration for shifting to the fixed RT state immediately before the end of the AT mode. It is possible to provide an effect that can provide an intense pounding feeling such as changing the disappointment of ending to the joy of continuing the AT mode and further notifying the continuation number of the AT mode.

<Modification 6>
In the present modification, the transition route to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state is different from that of the first embodiment. FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining a game state transition route in the present modification.

  In the present modification, it is possible to shift from the third RT state to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state, and it is not possible to shift from the first RT state, the second RT state, and the normal game state. That is, in the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition from the second RT state and the third RT state to the fourth RT state is possible. In the present modification, the configuration is such that the transition from the second RT state is not possible.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing an example of the second RT state lottery table in this modification. Compared with the lottery table in the first embodiment, the point values PV of the index values IV = 13 and 14 are set as 0, and are set so as not to win the transition replays 1 and 2 in the second RT state. I have. The point values of the index values IV = 13 and 14 are added to the index values IV = 6 to 10, respectively. The total replay probability in the second RT state is the same as that of the first embodiment. It has the same probability.

  The lottery table for the third RT state in this modification is the same as that of the first embodiment. The lottery table is won with index values IV = 13 and 14, and the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is changed to the eleventh. If the game corresponds to the replay winning or the twelfth replay winning, the gaming state shifts to the fourth RT state.

  That is, in the present modified example, although the transition to the second RT state is made by entering the AT mode, when the AT mode is ended in the second RT state, the transition replay is not won even if the transition notification flag is set. Therefore, the transition to the fourth RT state does not occur. Then, after the transition from the second RT state to the third RT state occurs in the AT mode and the AT mode ends in the third RT state, the transition notification flag is set, and if the transition replay is won. , And a transition to the fourth RT state. In the first embodiment, the display mode causing the transition to the third RT state has been described as the VB mode. However, in the present modified example, the transition to the fourth RT state is possible as the mode in which the transition to the fourth RT state is possible. The mode will be described. In other words, the transition to the third RT state occurs by winning the transition lottery to the transition mode, and more specifically, by winning the transition lottery to the transition mode, the second promotion replay 1 and 2 The pressing order information corresponding to the fourth re-game winning and the fifth re-game winning is performed.

  FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the second specifying combination process in this modification. As described above, the second specific combination process is a process mainly executed based on a lottery result of each game in the AT mode.

  In this modified example, a process of grasping the number of remaining games in the AT mode is executed in step S4601. As described above, the number of remaining games in the AT mode can be grasped from the AT mode continuation counter. In step S4602, a process of acquiring a transition mode lottery table from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 is executed. The transition mode lottery table is set so that the probability of causing the transition to the transition mode differs depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. More specifically, as the remaining game number in the AT mode decreases, the transition mode to the transition mode is determined. It is set so that the probability of causing the transition is high. For example, when the number of remaining games is 50 or more, the transition to the transition mode occurs with a probability of 0% (the transition lottery to the transition mode is not won), and the number of remaining games is 49 to 30 games. In this case, the transition to the transition mode occurs with a probability of 5%. If the number of remaining games is 29 games to 10 games, the transition to the transition mode occurs with a probability of 10%, and the number of remaining games is less than 10 games. In this case, the transition mode lottery table is set so that the transition to the transition mode occurs with a probability of 30%.

  In step S4603, a transition mode lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to transition to the transition mode based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode grasped in step S4601 and the transition mode lottery table acquired in step S4602. . In step S4604, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S4603 is a winning result that causes a shift to the shift mode. If the result is a winning result, the process of setting the transition mode flag in the various flag storage area 106d in step S4605 is performed, and then the second specifying combination process ends. The transition mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the transition to the transition mode can be caused. Then, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won in a state where the transition mode flag is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1411 in the push-sequence process (FIG. 48), and a fourth replay is performed in step S1412. A process for notifying the pushing order corresponding to a winning or a fifth replay winning is performed.

  If it is determined in step S4604 that the result is not a winning result, the process advances to step S4606. The processing in steps S4606 to S4621 is the same as the processing in steps S1014 to S1029 described above, and executes processing for adding an AT mode, processing for a specialization zone, and processing for pseudo addition notification.

  The winning result handling process in this modification will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the present modified example, generally, a process in a case where the fourth re-game prize or the fifth re-game prize is established and the game state shifts to the third RT state is different from that of the first embodiment. .

  That is, the number-of-games management process, the post-addition notification process, and the process based on the third replay prize in steps S4701 to S4710 are the same as the processes in steps S1601 to S1610. If it is determined in step S4703 that the winning result of the current game is not the third replay winning, the process advances to step S4711 to determine whether the winning result of the current game is the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. Is determined. If it is the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, the process advances to step S4712 to determine whether or not the transition mode flag is set. If the transition mode flag is not set, the transition mode lottery (step S4603) is not won, and the fourth and fifth replay prizes are realized by chance and the state shifts to the third RT state. Yes, in this case, the main winning result handling process is terminated. If the transition mode flag has been set, the flow advances to step S4713.

  In step S4713, it is determined whether the transition notification flag is set. As described above, the transition notification flag is a flag for generating a push order notification corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won. If the transfer notification flag is set, the winning result handling process ends. If not set, the flow advances to step S4714.

  In step S4714, a process of setting a transition notification flag is executed. Then, in step S4715, a process of setting the transfer command as an output target to the display control device 81 is executed, and then the winning result handling process is ended.

  That is, in the present modification, the transition notification flag is set by transitioning to the third RT state after winning the transition lottery to the transition mode. If the push order information corresponding to the game prize is generated, and if the shift lottery to the transition mode is not won or the transition to the third RT state does not occur, even if the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes 10, The transition notification flag is not set, and the advantageous section (AT mode) ends without causing transition to the fourth RT state.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4711, the processing in steps S4716 to S4720 is the same as the processing in steps S1617 to S1621.

  The state of transition of the RT state in this modification will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  In the transition mode lottery process (step S4603) in the present modification, when the remaining number of games in the AT mode is less than 50 games, the transition mode lottery is won, and as the remaining game number decreases, it becomes easier to win the transition mode lottery. ing. When the transition mode lottery is won at the timing of tf1 when the number of remaining games in the AT mode is less than 50, the transition mode flag is set. Thereafter, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won at tf2, the push order information for the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is generated, and the state shifts to the third RT state as the shift mode. Upon transition to the third RT state, a state in which transition replay can be won is achieved.

  At the timing of tf3, the player wins the transition replays 1 and 2, and the gaming state transitions to the fourth RT state by the stop operation according to the push order notification. When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the AT mode ends with the advantageous section at the timing of tf3 without waiting for the timing of tf5 when the remaining game number is consumed.

  Then, when the winning in the transition to the advantageous section and the AT mode is won during the fourth RT state, the fourth RT state ends at the timing of tf4, and after the push order notification to the second RT state is notified, at the timing of tf6. The AT mode is restarted.

  Here, even at a timing before the transfer mode lottery is won at the timing of tf1, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 can be won, but the push order notification at the time of the win corresponds to the first replay winning. Even if it is in the operation order and the stop operation is performed in an operation order different from the pressing order notification to succeed in establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning, the transfer notification No flags are set. For this reason, even if the transition to the third RT state happens to succeed in the second RT state, it is difficult to transition to the fourth RT state thereafter.

  As described above, in the AT mode, the transition from the second RT state to the fourth RT state is not made directly, but the transition mode (third RT state) is executed by interposing a state that can win the transition lottery to the fourth RT state. By adopting a configuration for shifting to the state, it is possible to suppress occurrence of an event that causes an unintended shift to the fourth RT state.

<Variation 7>
In this modification, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state differs depending on the set value. FIG. 106 shows an AT mode shift lottery table in this modification.

  In the AT mode shift lottery table for the fourth RT state in the present modification, for example, in the shift lottery triggered by weak cherry or watermelon, the setting 1 and 2 wins with a probability of 55%, and the settings 3 and 4 win 60%. The setting is such that the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win the AT mode shift lottery, such as winning with a probability of% and winning with a probability of 65% in settings 5 and 6. On the other hand, in the transfer lottery triggered by a strong cherry or a strong watermelon, the setting is made so that there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value. In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the fourth RT state in the present modification, there is set one having a difference in the winning probability depending on the set value depending on the game result which is a lottery trigger.

  On the other hand, the AT mode transition lottery tables for the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state are set so that there is no difference due to the set values. That is, in the present modification, not only the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the RT state, but also the presence or absence of the setting difference of the AT mode transition lottery varies depending on the RT state. By doing so, not only the merit of providing a difference in the AT mode transition rate according to the set value to cause a change in the mode of increase or decrease of the game medium or a change in the change rate, but also to the fourth RT state in the game of predicting the set value. It is possible to bring about a merit of shifting.

  Also in the present modification, the advantageous section shift lottery has a common winning probability regardless of the RT state, and is set so that there is no difference due to the set value. That is, in the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state, it can be said that there is no setting difference in the winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery and there is a setting difference in the AT mode transition lottery winning probability. By doing so, the chance of causing the transition to the advantageous section is fair without any difference due to the set value, and when the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the level of the benefit of the AT mode is set within the advantageous section by the set value. It can be realized by. Therefore, the balance between fairness and diversification of the game can be secured.

<Modification 8>
In this modified example, there are a plurality of fourth RT states as AT mode high probability states, and the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery differs depending on each fourth RT state. FIG. 107 shows an AT mode shift lottery table in this modification.

  That is, in the present modified example, the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery is made different between the fourth RT state shifting to the eleventh replay winning and the fourth RT state shifting to the twelfth replay winning. Here, the fourth RT state to which the eleventh re-game winning is shifted is referred to as a fourth RT state A, and the fourth RT state to which the twelfth re-game winning is shifted is referred to as a fourth RT state B. As described above, when the game shifts to the fourth RT state in the eleventh replay prize, the RT state continues for 10 games, and when the game shifts to the fourth RT state in the twelfth replay prize, the RT state becomes 30. Continue throughout the game. Also in this modified example, the number of continuous games in the fourth RT state A is 10 and the number of continuous games B in the fourth RT state B is 30. From the viewpoint that the AT mode high probability state continues for a long time, the fourth RT state It can be said that the fourth RT state B is a more advantageous RT state for the player than the state A.

  As shown in FIG. 107, when the AT mode transition lottery table in the fourth RT state A is compared with the AT mode transition lottery table in the fourth RT state B, the AT mode transition lottery is higher than the 0RT state to the third RT state. Although it is set so as to be easy to win, for example, in the case of a normal replay, the game is won with a probability of 5% in the fourth RT state A, but with a probability of 10% in the fourth RT state B. In addition, for example, when a weak cherry is used as an opportunity, a winning is achieved with a probability of 60% in the fourth RT state A, whereas a winning is achieved with a probability of 100% in the fourth RT state B. The AT mode transition lottery table is set so that the fourth RT state B is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the state A. Therefore, from the viewpoint that it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery, the fourth RT state B is more advantageous for the player than the fourth RT state A.

  On the other hand, the transition replay 2 in which the twelfth replay prize can be performed has a much lower winning probability than the transition replay 1 in which the eleventh replay prize can be performed. In other words, basically, it is possible to expect which one of the fourth RT states to transition to, such as transition to the fourth RT state A and, if lucky, to the fourth RT state B.

  Then, as described above, when the transition replays 1 and 2 are won while the transition notification flag is set, a push order notification for establishing the eleventh replay winning prize and the twelfth replay winning prize is generated. . In this case, in the present modification, the push order information for establishing the eleventh re-game winning and the push order information for establishing the twelfth re-game winning are set so as to be difficult for the player to identify. That is, after the transition notification flag is set and the first transition period effect (FIG. 79 (a)) occurs, the push order notification effect (FIG. 79 (b)) generated by winning the transition replays 1 and 2 is generated. In such a manner, the player cannot determine which of the winnings in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B will be generated, or it is difficult to recognize the winning, so that the production contents and the game winning on both sides are established. The order is set. In this way, when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, whether the fourth RT state is the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B depends on the winning rate of the AT mode transition lottery, A game predicted from whether or not the number of executions of the RT state is continued after 10 games is also added, and it is possible to increase the fun of the game.

  In the above modified example, the AT mode transition lottery table is set so that in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery than in the 0RT state to the third RT state. However, the fourth RT state A is easier to win than the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, while the 4th RT state B is harder to win than the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state or has the same winning probability (AT mode low probability). State) or the reverse configuration, such as when the operation is performed in accordance with the notification of the pressing order at the time of the transition replay 1 or 2 winning, the transition to the AT mode high probability which is advantageous to the player, or the AT mode low probability state There may be a case where there is a transition and a case where there is. By doing so, it is possible to realize a playability with an intense pounding feeling that it is not known whether or not the state will be the AT mode high probability state until the actual transition.

  When the transition replays 1 and 2 are won, it may be possible to identify which transition replay has been won based on the effect contents and the pressing order. In this case, when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, it is possible to grasp in advance whether the transition to the fourth RT state A or the transition to the fourth RT state B occurs. Then, for example, after the transition to the fourth RT state A or the fourth RT state B, in the weak cherry winning game, the transition to the AT mode is not determined in the fourth RT state A, but in the fourth RT state B, the AT mode transition. Is determined, and in the strong cherry winning game, the transition to the AT mode is determined in any of the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. In the fourth RT state B, the upper or lower row of the left reel 32L is determined. When the "cherry" symbol is stopped, the transition to the AT mode is determined. For example, a pleasure after grasping which RT state is in advance is added.

  In addition, as described above, if it is possible to grasp which transition to the fourth RT state occurs during the transition replay 1 or 2 winning, for example, the transition to the fourth RT state A immediately after the transition notification flag is set. When the transition to the fourth RT state B is made (when the transition to replay 1 is won), the transition to the fourth RT state A is postponed, and the transition to the fourth RT state B becomes possible (transition replay 2). It is also possible for the player to select whether or not there is a transition depending on the type of the fourth RT state to which the transition is made, such as waiting for a win. In this case, it is preferable to apply a configuration in which the player can select whether or not to make a transition, as in Modification Example 4 described above.

<Modification 9>
As described above, the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state is the fixed RT state, and the number of executable games is predetermined. The fourth RT state is set so that the replay probability is low and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that cause the transition to the second RT state are not won. In this case, even if the player wins the advantageous section transition lottery during the fourth RT state and wins the AT mode transition lottery, the transition to the second RT state does not occur unless the prescribed game in the fourth RT state is completed. , AT mode is not started. Then, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the end of the fourth RT state after winning the AT mode shift lottery may be bothersome. In the present modified example, a description will be given of a process in the case where the lottery in the AT mode is selected early in the fourth RT state.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a process in a case where an AT mode shift lottery is won in the first specific combination process or the advantageous zone shift win process. More specifically, when it is determined that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery in the first specific combination process (step S903: YES), it is determined that the player has won the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode destination lottery) in the advantageous section shift winning process. This shows the processing when it is determined (step S3605: YES).

  That is, when the player wins the AT mode shift lottery, in step S4801, an AT mode winning flag is set, and in step S4802, processing for clearing the AT mode non-winning flag is executed. These processes are as described above.

  In the following step S4803, by checking the RT setting flag, the current RT state is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the current state is the fourth RT state. If it is not the fourth RT state but the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, that is, if it is the AT mode winning in the AT mode low probability state, the process proceeds to step S4804, and the initial number of games in the current AT mode is predetermined. A process for determining the predetermined game (50) is executed. Then, in step S4805, a process of determining the current AT mode level by lottery is executed. In the AT mode level lottery, for example, the LV. 4,5% probability of LV. 3, 16% of LV. 2, 80% probability of LV. The winning probability at the AT mode level is set so as to win 1.

  On the other hand, in step S4803, it is determined that the current state is the fourth RT state. In step S4806, the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state is determined based on the fixed RT game number counter in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in step S4807, the initial number of games in the current AT mode is determined as the number of games obtained by adding the predetermined game (50) and the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state grasped in step S4806. Execute the process to be set. In a succeeding step S4808, a process of determining the current AT mode level by the lottery is executed after executing the AT mode level lottery according to the number of remaining games grasped in the step S4806. In this case, the level lottery is set so that the higher the number of remaining games, the easier it is to win a higher level. For example, if the number of remaining games is nine or more, the LV. 4 and with a 20% chance of LV. 3 and if the number of remaining games is 5-8 games, there is a 5% probability of LV. 4, 50% probability of LV. 3, 40% of LV. 2, 15% of LV. 1 and the number of remaining games is 4 or less, there is a 2% probability of LV. 4, 8% of the LV. 3, 30% probability of LV. 2, 60% of LV. For example, the winning probability of each AT mode level is set such that each player wins one.

  At the start of the AT mode, the determined number of games and the AT mode level are referred to to set the number of games and the level.

  After executing the processing of step S4805 or step S4808, the process advances to step S4809 to determine whether or not the SAT mode with the specialized zone has been won. If the SAT mode has been won, the specialized zone flag is set in step S4810, and it is determined in step S4811 whether the current state is the fourth RT state. If it is not the fourth RT state, a process of determining the number of games in the specialization zone as a predetermined number of games (5) is executed in step S4812. If it is determined in step S4811 that the game is in the fourth RT state, a process of grasping the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state is executed in step S4813, and in step S4814, a game in which the number of remaining games is added to the predetermined number of games. As a number, a process for determining the number of games in the current specialization zone is executed.

  Then, at the start of the specialization zone, the determined number of games is referred to, and the number of games is set.

  As described above, at the time of the AT mode winning, the number of remaining games in the fourth RT state is added as the number of games in the AT mode or the number of games in the specialization zone, and the number of remaining games is reflected in the AT mode level lottery. It is made clear that it is more advantageous for the player to win the AT mode shift lottery earlier because it is easier to win a level. By doing so, it is possible to solve the trouble caused by the increase in the number of games required to start the AT mode as the number of remaining games in the AT mode increases.

  A configuration in which the fourth RT state after winning in the AT mode shift lottery can be subjected to a lottery in the AT mode, such as a configuration in which it is easier to select an additional lottery in the AT mode or a configuration in which it is easier to win a specialization zone. Also, even in a configuration in which an advantageous lottery in the AT mode can be received, it is possible to eliminate the trouble caused by the increase in the number of games required until the start of the AT mode as the number of remaining games in the AT mode increases. is there.

<Variation 10>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode destination lottery) is performed in the advantageous section winning game, and the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode post lottery) is performed during the advantageous section. It is also possible to make the winning probability between the former AT mode lottery and the latter AT mode lottery different. In this modified example, a configuration in which the winning probabilities of the AT mode lottery and the post-AT mode lottery are different will be described.

  First, FIG. 109 shows that the winning probability is different between the AT mode lottery and the post-AT mode lottery, the AT mode lottery has no difference in the winning probability depending on the RT state, and the AT mode lottery has a difference in the winning probability depending on the RT state. An example is shown.

  In the AT mode lottery, the winning probability in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state and the winning probability in the 4th RT state are common. Here, the advantageous section shift lottery is performed when the winning probability does not have a set value and is not triggered by a non-trigger role having a difference in the winning probability. The AT mode lottery executed in the game that has been executed is also executed in the transition trigger, but not performed in the non-trigger. In this regard, in the AT mode transition lottery table in the AT mode destination lottery, the AT mode winning probability for the transition trigger is set, but the AT mode winning probability for the non-trigger is not set.

  In the lottery after the AT mode, the AT mode winning probability is set to be higher than that in the AT mode destination lottery. In this modification, in each of the AT mode transition lottery in the 0th RT state to the third RT state and the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state, the winning probability is higher in the post-AT mode lottery than in the AT mode destination lottery. It is set to be. The difference between the winning probability of the AT mode lottery and the winning probability of the post-AT mode lottery is set to be larger in the fourth RT state than in the 0RT state to the third RT state, and the AT in the fourth RT state is set. The lottery after the mode is set so that the AT mode winning is most easily performed.

  Even in this case, the advantage section shift lottery in the fourth RT state is higher than the AT mode win rate in the case where the advantage section shift lottery is won in the 0th RT state to the third RT state and the AT mode shift lottery is performed. And the AT mode winning rate is higher when the AT mode shifting lottery is performed, and the advantage regarding the AT mode shifting lottery in the fourth RT state is achieved without changing the winning probability of the advantageous section shifting lottery depending on the RT state. Sex is guaranteed.

  FIG. 110 shows an example in which the winning probabilities of the AT mode first lottery and the post-AT mode lottery in the 0th RT state to the third RT state are common, but the winning probability of the AT mode first lottery and the post-AT mode lottery in the fourth RT state are different. Is shown.

  As in this example, by ensuring that there is no difference in the winning probability after the AT mode transition lottery in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode destination lottery is performed before the transition to the advantageous section. Substantial benefits from the AT mode lottery cannot be enjoyed in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, but can be enjoyed in the 4th RT state, and the scarcity and superiority of the 4th RT state are secured.

  FIG. 110 shows an example in which the winning probability is higher in the AT mode lottery than in the post-AT mode lottery in the fourth RT state. It is assumed that the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is a case where a rare role that is hard to win in each game, such as a strong cherry, is allocated. By doing so, the rare role in the AT mode destination lottery is also assumed. You will be able to receive an advantageous lottery based on it.

  FIG. 111 shows an example in which the presence / absence of a winning probability based on a set value differs between an AT mode lottery and a post-AT mode lottery.

  Specifically, although there is no difference in the winning probabilities due to the set values in the AT mode destination lottery, there is a difference in the winning probabilities due to the set values in the post-AT mode lottery, and in particular, the setting differences in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state. The setting difference is set to be larger in the fourth RT state than in the fourth RT state. By doing so, not only the effect of diversification of the game by providing the setting difference in the lottery after the AT mode, but also the game for predicting the set value, the fourth RT state is more intense than the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state. This makes the prediction easier, and also in this aspect, the superiority of the fourth RT state is ensured.

<Modification 11>
In this modified example, the processing when a non-winning in the AT mode destination lottery is different depending on the RT state. FIG. 112A is a flowchart illustrating a part of the first specific role processing in the present modification. The AT mode shift lottery in the first specific combination process corresponds to the post-AT mode lottery among the above-mentioned AT mode destination lottery and the post-AT mode lottery.

  In step S4901, it is determined whether the AT non-winning flag is set. The AT non-winning flag is a flag that is set when an AT mode shift lottery in the advantageous section winning process, that is, when an AT mode destination lottery does not win. If the AT non-winning flag is set, the process advances to step S4902 to determine whether the current gaming state is the fourth RT state. If it is determined in step S4902 that the current state is the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S4903 to acquire an AT mode transition lottery table, and executes AT mode transition lottery in step S4904. The subsequent processing is as described above.

  On the other hand, if the AT non-winning flag is not set in step S4901 or if it is determined in step S4902 that the state is not the fourth RT state but the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the first first identification is performed as it is. The winning combination process ends.

  In other words, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), in the fourth RT state, the AT mode destination lottery is executed in the game that has won the advantageous section shift lottery, and even if the AT mode destination lottery is not won, the advantage section is selected. In the transition game, a lottery is executed after the AT mode, and in the AT mode transition lottery, substantially two chances are set. On the other hand, in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode destination lottery is executed in the game that has won the advantageous section transition lottery, and if the AT mode destination lottery is not won, the advantageous section transition lottery is executed. The execution of the lottery after the AT mode of the game is restricted, and the number of times of the AT mode shift lottery is one, which is smaller than that in the fourth RT state.

  As described above, according to the number of executions of the AT mode transition lottery in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state and the 4th RT state, the advantage of the AT mode transition lottery differs between the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state and the 4th RT state. Is also good. In this case, a configuration may be used in which the probability of winning in the AT mode transition lottery is common or almost the same as the winning probability in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state and the 4th RT state. Even in this case, if the number of times of execution of the AT mode shift lottery is different, the total probability of winning in the AT mode will be different.

<Modification 12>
In this modified example, the number of advantageous section games at the time of winning in the advantageous section shift is made different depending on the RT state, so that the AT mode winning rate is made different in each RT state. FIG. 113 shows an AT mode shift lottery table in this modification. In this modification, the value input to the advantageous section end counter at the time of winning is determined according to the game state in which the player is staying and the type of the specific combination. Is set. As described above, the advantageous section end counter includes an AT non-winning first processing (FIG. 87) executed when the lottery is not won after the AT mode of the first specific combination processing, or an advantageous section winning processing. In the AT non-winning lottery, the corresponding value is inputted in the second non-winning processing (FIG. 88), which is executed when the AT mode destination lottery does not win, and the third processing at the AT non-winning of the section display second processing ( In FIG. 89), the subtraction process of the advantageous section end counter is performed, and the processing for the advantageous section end is performed when the counter becomes 0. In this case, when the AT mode destination lottery is not won. Will be described.

  In other words, if the gaming state is in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state and the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is won and the AT mode destination lottery is not won, regardless of the game result of the game, the advantageous section In each of the end counters, 1 is input. That is, similarly to the first embodiment, the game proceeds to the advantageous section in the game next to the game won in the current advantageous section transition lottery, but the advantageous section ends in the advantageous section transition game. Becomes one game. Then, the AT mode shift lottery (lottery after the AT mode) during the advantageous section is executed substantially once.

  On the other hand, in the case where the gaming state is in the fourth RT state and the advantage section shift lottery is won and the AT mode destination lottery is not won, the advantage section end counter is determined by the game result of the game. The values entered are different. Specifically, when the game result at the time of winning the advantageous section shift is strong cherry and the AT mode destination lottery is not won, 5 is input to the advantageous section end counter, and the game result at the time of winning the advantageous section shift is weak. If the AT mode lottery is not won by cherry, 2 is input to the advantageous section end counter.

  Here, in the AT non-winning first processing when the lottery is not won after the AT mode, in the processing of inputting 0 to the advantageous section end counter in step S3702, a value other than 0 has already been set in the advantageous section end counter. If it has been input, the process of inputting 0 to the advantageous section end counter is not performed, and the input value is maintained. In other words, in the configuration in which the winning is not performed in the AT mode lottery and a value other than 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter as described above, even if the winning is not achieved in the AT mode lottery of the next game, the advantageous section is not determined. The end counter is not set to 0, and the advantageous section end counter input in the AT mode destination lottery has priority.

  Then, in the above example, when the game shifts to the advantageous section in the game next to the game won in the current advantageous section shift lottery, and shifts to the advantageous section triggered by the strong cherry, the advantageous section is divided into 5 games. On the other hand, if the game shifts to an advantageous section triggered by a weak cherry, the advantageous section ends in two games. Then, the AT mode transition lottery during the advantageous section (lottery after the AT mode) is performed five times in the case of a strong cherry, but is performed twice in the case of a weak cherry. The possibility of winning the AT mode shift lottery afterwards is higher when the AT mode lottery is not won than when the AT mode destination lottery is not won with a weak cherry.

  Then, compared to the situation where the gaming state is the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the advantage section shift lottery is won in the fourth RT state, compared to the case where the advantageous section shift lottery is won in the 0RT state to the 3rd RT state. Even if the player wins the advantageous section shift lottery triggered by the same game result, the number of games in the advantageous section tends to be longer, and the number of times the AT mode shift lottery is executed during the advantageous section increases. easy. Even in this case, the winning probability of the lottery transition to the advantageous section according to each game state is made common, and the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery in each game state is set to be superior and the superiority of the fourth RT state can be secured. It is possible.

<Modification 13>
The configuration that causes the transition to the advantageous section in the game following the advantageous section winning game may be changed. In this modification, a configuration in which the game is shifted to an advantageous section in the advantageous section winning game will be described.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing an advantageous section shift lottery process in this modification. As described above, in the advantageous section shift lottery processing, in the lottery processing (FIG. 32) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) performed at the start of one game, the advantageous section flag is not set, and the advantageous section flag is not set. This is a process that is performed in the case of a section.

  In the advantageous section shift lottery process, the modification in the present modification is that the advantageous section winning game flag is generally not set. That is, in step S5001, the result of the current game lottery is grasped, in step S5002 an advantageous section shift lottery table is acquired, and in step S5003, an advantageous section shift lottery is executed. If the transfer lottery has been won (step S5004: YES), after setting the advantageous section flag in step S5005, the advantageous section transfer win is performed in step S5006 without setting the advantageous section winning game flag as described above. After performing the time process, the advantageous section shift lottery process ends. In the advantageous section winning process, the AT mode shift lottery is executed as described above.

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the section display first processing according to this modification. As described above, the section display first process is a process executed after the lottery result handling process in the lottery process (FIG. 16) performed at the start of one game.

  In the first section display processing, the modification in this modification is generally set when the advantageous section flag is set in correspondence with not setting the advantageous section winning game flag as described above. The point is that the game is shifted to the advantageous section as the start game of the advantageous section.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step S5101 that the section indicator is not being displayed, it is determined in step S5102 whether the advantageous section flag is set. If it is set, the process advances to step S5103 to determine whether or not the counting of the number of advantageous section games AG is in progress, and to determine whether or not it is already in the advantageous section. If the advantageous section flag is set in step S5102 and it is determined in step S5103 that the number of advantageous section games AG is not being measured, the advantageous section flag is set in the current game lottery result correspondence processing. Means that In this case, in step S5104, measurement start processing of the number AG of the advantageous section games is executed. As a result, the transition to the advantageous section occurs with the current game as the start game.

  If it is determined in step S5103 that the number AG of the advantageous zone games is being measured, or after the process in step S5104 is performed, it is determined in step S5105 whether the AT notification flag is set. If it is set, display start processing of the section display is performed in step S5106. If it is determined in step S5101 that the section display is being displayed, display continuation processing is executed in step S5107. The processing for the duty ratio monitoring in steps S5108 to S5111 is as described above.

  The second process at the time of non-AT winning in this modification will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the AT non-winning second process is a process that is executed when the AT mode shift lottery of the advantageous zone win process performed in the game won in the advantageous zone shift lottery is not won. .

  In step S5201, a process of setting an AT non-winning flag is executed. Then, in step S5202, 0 is input to the advantageous section end counter, and then the AT non-winning second processing ends. In the first embodiment, in the second processing at the time of non-AT winning, the value 1 is input to the advantageous section end counter. , And the processing for terminating the advantageous section is performed in the next game. On the other hand, in the present modification, since 0 is input to the advantageous section end counter as described above, the processing for terminating the advantageous section is performed in the third processing at the time of AT non-winning performed in the current game. It will be.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 116 (b), for example, when the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is triggered by the weak watermelon winning, the advantageous section is started from the game and the processing in the advantageous section winning process in the game is performed. AT mode shift lottery is performed. Then, if the AT mode shift lottery is not won, the advantageous section ends in this game, and the next game is a normal section unless it is won in the advantageous section shift lottery.

  By doing as described above, while the game in the advantageous section that is not won in the AT mode and is not in the AT mode is kept to a minimum game, the repeated execution of the AT mode shift lottery is limited. Therefore, it is possible to increase the winning probability of each AT mode shift lottery without excessively increasing the AT mode shift rate. In addition, it is possible to suppress the AT mode shift lottery from being performed a plurality of times, thereby avoiding dispersal of attention.

<Second embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a configuration will be described in which a fourth RT state as an AT mode high probability state is realized by an infinite RT state in which the number of games can change. FIG. 117 is a diagram for describing an outline of the transition of the gaming state in the present embodiment.

  Similarly to the first embodiment, the state shifts to the fourth RT state when the eleventh re-game winning or the twelfth re-game winning is established. In the fourth RT state according to the present embodiment, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 with index values IV = 2 to 5 can be won, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, and the third replay winning is achieved. Is established, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state regardless of the number of executed games in the fourth RT state. However, when the transition roll at the time of dropping the push order bell stops, unlike the other RT states, the transition from the fourth RT state to the first RT state does not occur.

  In the present embodiment, the fourth RT state will be described as a high RT state having a high replay probability.

  FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the RT state processing in this embodiment.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the processing corresponding to Steps S501 to S504 is not set, and it is first determined in Step S5301 whether or not the transition roll has stopped. If the transition has stopped, it is determined in step S5302 whether or not the fourth RT setting flag has been set, thereby determining whether or not the fourth RT state is in progress. If it is in the fourth RT state, the RT state processing ends as it is. That is, the transition to the first RT state does not occur even when the transition roll stops in the fourth RT state.

  If it is not the fourth RT state in step S5302, it is determined in step S5303 whether or not it is in the normal gaming state. If it is not in the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5306, If it is a gaming state, the process directly proceeds to step S5304, where the first RT state is set, and then the RT state processing ends. If the transition roll has not stopped, it is determined in step S5305 whether or not the second replay winning has been established. If so, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S5306. After executing the processing for setting the first RT state in step S5304, the RT state processing ends. If the second re-game winning has not been established, it is determined in step S5307 whether or not the third re-game winning has been established. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5307, a process of clearing the RT setting flag is performed in step S5308, and a process of setting the second RT state is performed in step S5309, followed by terminating the RT state process. As described above, in the present embodiment, the third replay prize can be established in the fourth RT state, and when the third replay prize is established, the transition to the second RT state is performed as in the other RT states. Will occur. The processing of steps S5310 to S5315 when it is determined in step S5307 that the third replay prize has not been established includes a fixed RT game number setting processing (step S519) for setting to the fourth RT state. Except for the absence, there is no difference from the processing of the first embodiment.

  That is, the fourth RT state in the present embodiment continues until the third replay winning is established, and the number of continuous games depends on the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

  Then, as described above, the transition notification flag is set when the transition condition to the fourth RT state is satisfied during the AT mode, and the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize can be established when the transition replay is won. A possible pressing order notification is generated. When the player operates in accordance with the notification of the pressing order and the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the AT mode ends including the advantageous section. In other words, although the transition to the fourth RT state results in the AT mode high-probability state, when the advantageous section ends, the pressing order notification at the time of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 does not occur, and these first promotion replay winnings are not performed. When the third replay prize is established at times, the AT mode high probability state can be ended as described above.

  Incidentally, the second RT state is an RT state having a high replay probability as described above. Then, since the AT mode has been completed as described above, in the second RT state, when the push order bell is won, the transition roll stops, or when the falling replays 1 to 3 are won, the second replay winning is established. Then, the second RT state shifts to the first RT state.

  FIG. 119 shows a part of the lottery table for the fourth RT state in the present embodiment. As described above, the transition to the fourth RT state is made by the eleventh re-game winning and the twelfth re-game winning. In the present embodiment, the lottery table is shared between the fourth RT state in which the eleventh re-game winning is established and the transition is made and the fourth RT state in which the twelfth re-game winning is established and the game is shifted. On the other hand, the lottery table for the fourth RT state is set such that the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are different depending on the set value.

  Specifically, for example, in the case of the setting 1, the probability of winning one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is about 1.56, and in the setting 2, about 1/64 and the setting 3 The higher the setting value, such as about 1/172, about 1 / 1.82 for setting 4, about 1/93 for setting 5, about 1 / 2.05 for setting 6, and so on. The winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are set to be low. As described above, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are set such that the replays to be won are different depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the third replays to be shifted to the second RT state. The operation order is associated with one of the six operation orders (FIG. 23A). That is, in the lottery table for the fourth RT state set as described above, the probability of the third replay prize being established is about 1 / 9.4 and about 9.8 in order from setting 1 to setting 6. It is set to be lower as the set value becomes higher, such as 1/1, about 10.3, about 10.9, about 11.6, and about 12.3. ing.

  Then, as described above, the case where the fourth RT state ends is the case where the third replay prize is established. Therefore, the number of continuous games in the fourth RT state is set to be longer as the set value becomes higher. It can be said that. The fourth RT state is an AT high probability state, which is an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, the higher the set value, the more easily the benefits of the fourth RT state can be enjoyed, and the higher the set value, the more advantageous the player. Configuration.

  On the other hand, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the operation sequence at the time of the winning corresponds to the third replay winning, the third replay winning is established. Whether or not a 3 replay winning is achieved depends largely on the luck factor. Therefore, even if the set value is high and it is difficult to win the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the third replay prize may be established early and the fourth RT state may be ended, or the set value may be low. Even if it is easy to win 1 promotion replays 1 to 4, the third replay prize may not be easily established and the fourth RT state may continue for a long time. In other words, for example, even if the setting value is the highest setting 6, the fourth RT state may be shorter than the average number of staying games in the setting 1, or the setting value 1 is the lowest setting value. Also, the fourth RT state may be longer than the average stay game number in the setting 6. In this way, by making the luck factor participate in the continuity of the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state, it is interesting to use the player's psychology, such as wanting to keep the fourth RT state long. Playability is realized.

  Also, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, while the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are made different depending on the set value, the winning probabilities of the normal replays with the index value IV = 1 are adjusted, so that the total Is set so that no difference is caused by the set value. Specifically, as described above, the higher the set value is, the lower the probability of winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is set. On the other hand, in the normal replay, the higher the set value is, the harder it is to win. Is set to the winning probability. By doing so, it is possible to provide a difference due to the set value in terms of the probability of the transition to the AT mode while preventing a difference due to the set value from occurring in terms of the increase or decrease of possessed medals in the fourth RT state. Becomes In addition, by doing so, there is also an advantage that it is possible to prevent the set value from being easily determined from the total replay probability.

  Here, the fourth RT state in the present embodiment is a high RT state in which the total replay probability is about 1.53 and the replay probability is high. Specifically, the replay probability is the same or almost the same as the second RT state or the third RT state having a high replay probability. Therefore, as described above, the transition to the fourth RT state ends the AT mode or the advantageous section, but in the present embodiment, the state with a high replay probability is maintained. Then, in this manner, in the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state, when a further advantageous section and the AT mode transition lottery are won, the transition to the second RT state is performed at the time of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 winning. The generated push order notification for the third replay prize is generated, and the AT mode is started.

  That is, by using the fourth RT state in the present embodiment, it is possible to return to the AT mode without going through a state with a low replay probability. Therefore, it is possible to play a game in a so-called extended zone, such as the AT mode high probability state, while suppressing a decrease in the number of possessed medals.

<Modification 1>
In the present modification, the lottery table is made different between the case where the eleventh re-game winning is established and the fourth RT state is entered and the case where the 12-th re-game winning is entered and the fourth RT state is entered. FIG. 120 shows a lottery table for the fourth RT state in the present modified example, and FIG. 120 (a) is a lottery table for the fourth RT state which is shifted by the establishment of the eleventh replay prize, and FIG. ) Is a lottery table for the fourth RT state, which is shifted by the establishment of the twelfth replay winning.

  The lottery table of FIG. 120A is the same as the lottery table of FIG. 119 shown in the second embodiment. On the other hand, in the lottery table of FIG. 120B, the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are lower than those of FIG. Is set. For example, when the setting is 1, in the fourth RT state (fourth RT state A) shifted by the eleventh replay prize, the player wins the first promotion replays 1 to 4 with a probability of about 1 / 1.56. In the fourth RT state (fourth RT state B) shifted by the twelfth replay prize, the player is elected to the first promotion replays 1 to 4 with a probability of about 1/182, and is in the fourth RT state B more than the fourth RT state A. Is set so that the average number of stay games is longer.

  Moreover, in the present modified example, the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are set so as to be common probabilities at different setting values in the fourth RT state A and the fourth RT state B. I have. Specifically, the winning probability of setting 4 in the fourth RT state A and the winning probability of setting 1 in the fourth RT state B are the same, and the winning probability of setting 5 in the fourth RT state A and the setting probability in the fourth RT state B The winning probability of the setting 2 in the fourth RT state A and the winning probability of the setting 3 in the fourth RT state B are the same. By doing so, for example, in a situation where the appearance rate (winning probability) of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is about 1/3, even if the player is actually in the fourth RT state B, the player Is determined to be in the fourth RT state A, a prediction of setting 5 is made, and a prediction different from the actual setting value (setting 3) is performed. Therefore, the fun of the game is increased through the complexity of the game that predicts the set value, and the type of the current fourth RT state, that is, the fourth RT state is determined by the replay prize of either the eleventh regame or the twelfth regame. It is possible to cause a great interest in whether the game has shifted to the state, and it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game in which the push order information is generated at the time of the shift replay winning.

<Modification 2>
In the present modified example, as the end condition of the fourth RT state, not only the third replay prize at the time of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 but also the second replay prize at the time of the fall replays 1 to 3 are included. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121, in the fourth RT state in the present modification, the fourth RT state is ended by shifting to the second RT state due to the third replay prize, and also in the second RT state. The transition to the first RT state due to a game winning may end the fourth RT state.

  FIG. 122 (a) shows a part of a lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modification.

  In the present modification, in addition to the normal replay with the index value IV = 1 and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 with the index values IV = 2 to 5, the fall replays 1 to 3 with the index values IV = 6 to 9 are also elected. The point value PV is set so as to be obtained. In the present modification, a configuration in which there is no setting difference in the winning probability of each replay will be described.

  In the present modification, the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is set to about 1 / 81.9, and as described above, the third promotion replays 1 to 4 at the time of 1/6 winning are the third. Since the operation order matches the order corresponding to the replay, the probability that the third replay win will be established, that is, the probability that the transition to the second RT state will end the fourth RT state is about 491.5. It will be a fraction. On the other hand, the winning probability of the falling replays 1 to 3 is set to about 1/1, and the two thirds of the falling replays 1 to 3 are operated in an order corresponding to the second replay. Since the order matches, the probability that the second replay winning is achieved, that is, the probability that the fourth RT state ends by shifting to the first RT state is about 12.1.

  Then, in the present modification, the case where the third re-game winning is established and the fourth RT state ends, and the case where the second re-game winning is established and the fourth RT state is ended, are the second re-game winning. The difference is that the fourth RT state ends in about 11.8 times when these are added. That is, the average number of stay games in the fourth RT state in this modification is about 11.8 games.

  The fourth RT state of the present modified example is a low RT state in which the total replay probability is about 7.1 / 30 and the replay probability is low. Specifically, the replay probability is lower than the second RT state or the third RT state having a high replay probability. Therefore, as described above, the transition to the fourth RT state ends the AT mode or the advantageous section, and the transition to the state with a low replay probability is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  Here, as described above, at the time of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 winning, the probability that the third replay winning is established is set as 1/6. However, as in the second embodiment, the fourth RT state is set. In the case where the number of continuous games and the probability of establishment of the end condition depend on the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the number of continuous games and the completion probability are one sixth of the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In other words, when the end probability of the fourth RT state is set by the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in which the third replay winning is established with a probability of 1/6, the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 Must be set to six times the termination probability. In this case, the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are inevitably set high, and the total replay probability in the fourth RT state is likely to be high.

  That is, in the second embodiment, the merit of making the fourth RT state function as the high RT state having a high replay probability has been described. However, as described above, the termination probability is defined only by the first promoted replays 1 to 4. In such a case, it may be difficult to set the fourth RT state to a low RT state with a low replay probability as in the first embodiment. On the other hand, if the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is larger than one of the six replays, the first RT state happens to be shifted to the second RT state. In many cases, that is also undesirable. That is, the first promotion replays 1 to 3 cause the transition of the RT state in a situation where the pressing order notification can occur, and minimize the transition of the RT state in the situation where the pushing order notification does not occur. Therefore, the operation order associated with the replay for the RT state transition (third replay) is set to be as small as possible.

  On the other hand, the fall replays 1 to 3 prevent the transition of the RT state from occurring in a situation where the pressing order information can occur, and the transition of the RT state tends to occur as much as possible in the situation where the pushing order information does not occur. In order to achieve this, the operation order associated with the replay (second replay) for transition to the RT state is set to be as large as possible. In this modification, the fall replays 1 to 3 are used as a trigger to end the fourth RT state. By doing so, the winning probabilities of the fall replays 1 to 3 that contribute to the end probability do not need to be so high, and the total replay of the fourth RT state can be performed without newly adding a replay for transition to the RT state. The replay probability can be kept low.

  Moreover, in the present modified example, the end condition of the fourth RT state is set to two routes such as the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning, so that the case where the AT mode is won during the fourth RT state and the case where the AT mode is won If not, it is possible to end the fourth RT state via a different route. In other words, since the transition to the first RT state is made by establishing the second re-game winning, if the AT mode shift lottery is not won, the second re-game winning is established and the fourth RT state is ended. This makes it possible to quickly shift to the normal state (first RT state). On the other hand, since the transition to the second RT state is made by establishing the third replay winning, if the AT mode shift lottery is won, the third replay winning is established and the fourth RT state is ended. Thus, the AT mode can be started without going through the first RT state.

  However, in the present modified example, since the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is set to be low, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won even if the player has won the AT mode shift lottery. , The transition to the second RT state may result in a relatively large number of games required before the start of the AT mode. That is, the winning probability of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 is approximately 1 / 81.9 as described above, and when the AT mode is won, the third replay prize is established to shift to the second RT state (FIG. 122). (2nd route in (b)), approximately 81.9 games are required from the AT mode winning to the start of the AT mode. On the other hand, the winning probability of the fall replays 1 to 3 is about 1/1 as described above, and at the time of the AT mode winning, the second replay winning is established and the game is shifted to the first RT state, and the first RT state is set. When the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are elected in the state and the state is shifted to the second RT state (the first route in FIG. 122A), the AT mode is won in the fourth RT state until the start of the AT mode. , About 8.1 games in the fourth RT state and about 8.1 games in the first RT state (refer to the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in the first RT state) require about 16.2 games. As a result, the transition to the second RT state may occur more quickly on the first route than on the second route.

  As shown in FIG. 123, in the push-sequence process according to the present modification, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in step S5405, it is determined in step S5406 whether the AT notification flag is set. Is set, it is determined in step S5424 whether or not the fourth RT state is being set. As described above, the transition to the fourth RT state completes the AT mode (advantageous section) and clears the AT notification flag. That is, the case where it is determined in step S5424 that the vehicle is in the fourth RT state is a case where the player has won the AT mode shift lottery again in the fourth RT state. It can be said that it is in a state of waiting for start. If it is the fourth RT state in step S5424, in step S5425, the instruction monitor 68 is controlled so as to perform the pressing order notification corresponding to the second replay that causes the transition to the first RT state. Then, in step S5426, a process of setting the push order command including the push order information corresponding to the second replay prize as an output target to the display control device 81 is performed, and then the final push winning combination process ends. The display control device 81 that has received the pressing order command controls the auxiliary display unit 65, the speaker 64, and the like so as to perform a pressing order notification effect corresponding to the pressing order of the second replay.

  If it is determined in step S5424 that the current state is not the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S5407 to perform a process for informing the first re-game of the pressing order. The processing in steps S5401 to S5423 is the same as the processing in steps S1501 to S1523 except for the above-described parts. That is, when the AT notification flag is set in the fourth RT state and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won, a positive determination is made in steps S5401 and S5402, and a third replay is performed in step S5403. A process for informing the game pressing order is performed.

  In this way, in the fourth RT state, when the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the first route for shifting to the second RT state via the first RT state and the second route for directly shifting to the second RT state are set. After the provision, the route in which the transition to the second RT state occurs quickly can be suitably selected according to the lottery result of each game.

<Modification 3>
In the present modified example, as in the above-described modified example 2, after the second re-game winning and the third re-game winning are set as the end condition of the fourth RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the falling replays 1 to 4 are set. A configuration for providing a setting difference in the winning probability of No. 3 will be described. FIG. 124 shows a part of the lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modification.

  The winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in this modified example are about 81.9 in the settings 1, 3, and 5, and about 1/819 in the settings 2, 4, and 6. The odd number setting is set to be much easier to win than the even number setting. On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the falling replays 1 to 3 are about 1/1 in settings 1 and 2, about 12.1 in settings 3 and 4, and about 24.3 in settings 5 and 6. The setting is such that the higher the setting, the more difficult it is to win. Then, the end probability of the fourth RT state triggered by the second re-game winning or the third re-game winning is about 11.8 in setting 1 and about 36.1 in setting 6; Each set value differs so that the higher the set value, the longer the average number of stay games.

  That is, in the present modification, the average number of stay games in the fourth RT state differs depending on the set value, and the enjoyment of predicting the set value from the average number of stay games is added. In addition, the odds of the set values can be determined from the winning probabilities of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the level of the set values can be determined from the winning probabilities of the fall replays 1 to 3. , Setting values can be narrowed down. By doing so, it is possible to perform not only a game such as simply winning the AT mode transition lottery in the fourth RT state, but also a game for predicting a set value, and it is possible to increase the fun of the game.

  In addition, as described above, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the fall replays 1 to 3 serve as a trigger for ending the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state when the AT mode is not elected. On the other hand, at the time of winning the AT mode, it can be a trigger for shifting to the AT mode. Therefore, regardless of the success or failure of the AT mode shift lottery, it is possible to perform a game in which the set value is predicted using the fourth RT state, and it is possible to suitably provide an opportunity to perform the game. On the other hand, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and the fall replays 1 to 3 are won, the push order information is generated when the AT mode is won, and the push order information is not generated when the AT mode is not won. Therefore, in calculating the winning probability from the number of wins in these replays and the number of trial games and predicting the set value, it is possible that information that has won the replay may be obtained multiple times in the non-AT mode. However, when the player wins the AT mode, the player can basically obtain the game only once. Therefore, when the AT mode is not won, more information can be obtained in the game for predicting the set value, and the fact that the AT mode has not been won is compensated.

<Modification 4>
FIG. 125 shows a part of a lottery table for the fourth RT state in this modification.

  In the first promotion replays 1 to 4 in this modified example, the settings 2, 4, and 6 have a common winning probability of about 1/8/10, while the settings 1, 3, and 5 have The setting is such that the higher the set value is, the easier it is to win, such as about 10.2, about 9.6, about 8.2. On the other hand, the fall replays 1 to 3 are, in order from setting 1, about 1/3/2, about 16.8, about 43.7, about 21.8, about 11.8. Different winning probabilities are set depending on the set values, such as 1 / 72.8, about 14.3. Due to such a winning probability, the end probability of the fourth RT state triggered by the second or third replay prize is the same (substantially the same) in the setting 1 and the setting 2 and is about 1 / 24.0. There is a calculation that is the same (substantially the same) about 1 / 30.7 in the settings 3 and 4 and the same (substantially the same) about 33.9 in the settings 5 and 6. You.

  In other words, from the viewpoint of the average number of stay games in the fourth RT state, that is, the ease of benefit from the AT mode high probability state, setting 1 and setting 2, setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6 are common. Although there is no difference or little difference, from the viewpoint of the distribution (ratio) of the route in which the fourth RT state ends, the setting 1 differs from the setting 2, the setting 3 differs from the setting 4, and the setting 5 differs from the setting 6. ing. Specifically, the rate of ending via the second RT state is higher in the setting 1 than in the setting 2, the setting 3 is higher than the setting 4, and the setting 5 is higher than the setting 6. I have. In the second RT state, if the eleventh replay prize can be established luckily, it is possible to shift to the AT mode high probability state again. The possibility that the AT mode high probability state can be re-challenged increases. On the other hand, when the ratio through the second RT state is increased, the winning probability of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 increases, and depending on the operation order at the time of the first promoted replays 1 to 4, the average number of stay games is reduced. The possibility that the fourth RT state ends without digestion also increases.

  Therefore, in the setting values where the average number of stay games is common, such as setting 1 and setting 2, setting 1 is more likely to be able to re-challenge in the AT mode high probability state, so that the fourth RT state is a factor of luck. It is characterized that the possibility of ending early is higher, and that setting 2 is more likely to be able to digest the average number of stay games in the fourth RT state. As described above, it is possible to greatly vary the playability in the AT mode only by varying the replay probability in the fourth RT state depending on the set value.

<Third embodiment>
In the first and second embodiments, when the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is won, the AT mode shift lottery (AT mode destination lottery) is further executed in the game. However, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section shift lottery is executed. When the lottery is won, the game result which triggered the winning is stored until after the shift to the advantageous section, and the AT mode shift lottery is performed based on the stored game result. FIG. 126 (a) is a flowchart showing the advantageous section shift winning process in the present embodiment. As described above, the advantageous section shift winning process is a process that is executed when, in the lottery result handling process, an advantageous section shift lottery process in a normal section in which the advantageous section flag is not set is won.

  In step S5501, a process of grasping the game result of the current game is executed. Then, in step S5502, a process of storing the grasped game result in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f provided in the RAM 106 (see FIG. 126 (b)) is executed. In the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f, for example, a plurality of types of areas are set according to the type of the transfer trigger, and in step S5502, the advantageous section transfer lottery winning in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f is set. After the processing for storing the winning information (for example, a flag) in the area corresponding to the transition trigger that has triggered the above, the processing for winning the transition to the advantageous section is ended. By doing so, the CPU 102 can specify which of the transition triggers has won the advantageous section transition lottery.

  Regardless of the configuration of the transfer winning time information temporary storage area 106f, it is sufficient that the CPU 102 can specify the game result in the game won in the advantageous section transfer lottery ex post facto (in subsequent games). . For example, a configuration may be adopted in which number information (for example, 15 for a strong cherry, 16 for a weak cherry, or an index value IV) associated with a transition trigger may be stored. The random number used in the current game lottery process (FIG. 16) (the value latched from the free-run counter by the hardware circuit based on the operation of the start lever 41) and the lottery table used in the current game (game state and (Set value information) may be stored. Even in this case, by performing the lottery process in steps S303 to S310 in the CPU 102 afterwards, it is possible to specify the game result that triggered the advantageous section shift lottery.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing in the present embodiment. As described above, the first specific combination process is a process performed when the advantageous section flag is set in the lottery result correspondence processing and the AT mode shift lottery is not won. This is a process for performing a mode shift lottery.

  In the present embodiment, first, in step S5613, it is determined whether or not information related to a game result is stored in the above-described transition winning information temporary storage area 106f. If it is not stored, the game result of the current game is grasped in step S5614. If it is stored, in step S5615 the game result stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f is stored. A process for grasping information, that is, a game result in the game won in the advantageous section shift lottery is executed. After the processing in step S5615, the temporary storage area is deleted in step S5616.

  After executing the processing of step S5614 or step S5616, the processing for the AT mode shift lottery in steps S5601 to S5611 and the processing according to the result of the shift lottery are executed. Steps S5601 to S5611 are the same as steps S901 to S911.

  That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, when an advantageous section shift lottery is won in a normal section, a game result in that game (in the figure, weak watermelon winning information) is stored. Then, when the advantageous section starts from the next game, in the advantageous section transition game, an AT mode transition lottery based on the stored game result is performed. The processing in the case of winning in the AT mode shift lottery and the processing in the case of not winning are the same as those in the above embodiments. In the case of winning, the AT mode is started via the precursor mode, and Means that the advantageous section is ended in the game, and the next game is a normal section.

  By doing so, the advantageous section shift lottery and the AT mode shift are ensured while the assumption that the AT mode shift lottery is allowed in the advantageous section and the AT mode shift lottery is restricted in the normal section. In a two-stage lottery such as a lottery, it is possible to solve the difficulty that it is necessary to re-allocate the game result for the AT mode shift lottery despite the fact that the game result worthy of winning the advantageous section shift lottery has been allocated. It becomes possible. That is, it is possible to restrict the execution of the AT mode shift lottery before the shift to the advantageous section, while having the configuration in which the AT mode shift lottery is performed using the game result for the advantageous zone shift lottery.

  Further, as described above, the game result is stored in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f, so that the degree of freedom of the game in which the AT mode transfer lottery is executed is greatly increased. In other words, in the above configuration, the AT mode transition lottery is executed in the advantage section transition game. For example, the game result of the game that has won the advantage section transition lottery in a game subsequent to the advantageous section transition game is used. The AT mode shift lottery may be executed. By doing so, it is possible to eliminate an increase in processing load due to the advantage section transition and the AT mode transition lottery being performed in the same game. However, in the configuration in which the advantageous section is terminated when the AT mode transition lottery is not won, as described above, the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the advantageous section transition game is more advantageous section. It is possible to reduce the ratio of games that are present and are not in the AT mode.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, when the information on the game result is stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f, the AT mode transition lottery is executed based on the information. Although the configuration is such that the AT mode shift lottery is executed based on the game result of the game, in the present modification, the AT mode shift lottery is executed in consideration of information of both game results.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the first specific role processing in the present modification.

  In step S5713, it is determined whether or not game result information is stored in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f. If it is not stored, a process of grasping the game result of the current game is executed in step S5714. On the other hand, if it is stored, the game result information stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f is grasped in step S5715, and after the area 106f is erased in step S5716, In step S5714, a process of grasping the game result of the current game is executed. That is, when the information of the game result is stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f, the information of the current game result is grasped together with the information.

  After executing the processing in step S5714, the processing for the AT mode transition lottery in steps S5701 to S5711 and the like are executed. These processes are also the same as steps S901 to S911, and in the present modification, the transfer lottery table acquired in step S5701 is different from the above.

  FIG. 130 shows a part of the AT mode shift lottery table in the present modification.

  In this modified example, the probability of winning in the AT mode shift lottery differs depending on the combination of the game result information stored in the shift winning information temporary storage area 106f and the game result information of the current game. Is set to

  Specifically, for example, when the information of normal replay is stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is a strong cherry, Is a normal replay, and if a strong cherry is won in the advantageous section shift game, the AT mode shift lottery is won with a 90% probability. On the other hand, when the information of the strong cherry is stored in the shift winning information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is the strong cherry, that is, the game result at the time of the advantageous section shift winning is strong. If it is a cherry, and if a strong cherry is won in the advantageous section shift game, the player will win the AT mode shift lottery with a 100% probability.

  Further, for example, when the information of strong watermelon is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is a normal replay, the AT mode transition lottery has a 1% probability. Win. On the other hand, when the information of strong watermelon is stored in the transfer winning time information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is strong watermelon, the player wins the AT mode transfer lottery with a 100% probability. .

  In other words, even if the game result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as the advantageous section transition game is the same, the setting is made such that the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs depending on the game result of the game that has won the advantageous section transition lottery. Have been. In addition, even if the game result of the game won in the advantageous section transition lottery is the same result, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is set to be different depending on the game result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as the advantageous section transition game. Have been. As described above, by making the information on the game that has been won in the advantageous section shift lottery and the information on the game in which the AT mode shift lottery is performed into an AT mode shift lottery, for example, at the time of the so-called advantageous section shift lottery, It is possible to eliminate the absurd feeling that the player cannot win the advantageous AT mode shift lottery because the rare role has not been won at the time of the AT mode shift lottery even though he has won the rare role.

  In addition, for example, when the normal replay information is stored in the transitional winning time information temporary storage area 106f and the game result of the current game is the normal replay, the AT mode transition lottery has a 1% probability. In the case where the information of the strong cherry is stored in the temporary storage area 106f at the time of winning and the transfer winning information, and the game result of the current game is the normal replay, the AT mode transfer lottery is won with a probability of 1%. However, the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery is the same. On the other hand, if the normal replay information is stored in the transitional election information temporary storage area 106f, the SAT mode with the additional specialization zone is won with a probability of 0.1% to the additional specialty zone. If the strong cherry information is stored in the winning information temporary storage area 106f, the special zone is won with a probability of 90%.

  In other words, when the game result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed as the advantageous section transition game is the same result, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is the same probability regardless of the game result of the game that has won the advantageous section transition lottery. In some cases, the game result information of the game won in the advantageous section shift lottery contributes to the winning probability of the additional specialization zone when the AT mode shift lottery is won. By doing so, it is possible to reflect the game result of the game won in the advantageous section shift lottery to the AT mode shift lottery without excessively increasing the AT mode shift lottery winning probability.

<Modification 2>
The third embodiment is different from the third embodiment in that when the information of the game result is stored in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f, the AT mode transfer lottery is performed based on the information of the game result. However, in the case where the AT mode shift lottery based on the information in the shift win information temporary storage area 106f is not won, the AT mode shift lottery based on the game result of the current game is performed. Is different.

  That is, in the first specific combination process in the present modification, as shown in FIG. 131, it is determined whether or not the information of the game result is stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f in step S5813. If it is not stored, the game result of the current game is grasped in step S5814, and the processing for the AT mode shift lottery in steps S5801 to S5811 is performed. The processing of steps S5801 to S5811 is the same as the processing of steps S901 to S911.

  If it is determined in step S5813 that the game result information is stored, the process advances to step S5815. In step S5815, processing for grasping the information of the game result stored in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f is performed, and in step S5816, the temporary storage area 106f is deleted. Then, in step S5817, a process of acquiring an AT mode shift lottery table is executed, and in step S5818, an AT mode shift lottery is executed. The processing in steps S5817 and S5818 is the same as the processing in steps S901 and S902, and is performed in the AT mode shift lottery table according to the gaming state (RT state) (with a winning probability according to the gaming state). Perform a transfer lottery.

  After performing the AT mode transition lottery in step S5818, it is determined in step S5819 whether the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the player has won the game, the process advances to step S5804 to perform an AT mode winning process such as setting an AT mode winning flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5819 that the game has not been won, the process advances to step S5814 to perform processing for grasping the game result of the current game. Then, processing for the AT mode shift lottery and the like after step S5801 is performed.

  As described above, in the present modified example, first, based on the game result of the game that has won the advantageous section shift lottery, the AT mode shift lottery is performed in the game (shift game) after the shift to the advantageous section, Only when the winning in the AT mode transition lottery based on the game result at the time of the advantageous section transition winning is not won, the game result at the AT mode transition lottery is referred to and the AT mode transition lottery is performed again. By doing so, the game result at the time of the AT mode shift lottery can be referred to, but the opportunity to refer to the game result at the time of the AT mode shift lottery is reduced, and the processing and the lottery table are not complicated. can do.

<Modification 3>
In the present modification, in a configuration in which the game result at the time of winning the advantageous section shift is reflected in the AT mode shift lottery performed after the shift to the advantageous section, information on the game result is obtained by the game state and the game result at the time of winning the advantageous section shift. Makes the number of times reflected in the AT mode shift lottery different.

  Although a detailed description is omitted in the figure, for example, the value of the advantageous section end counter of FIG. 113 is used for the number of games stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f and the number of times of execution of the AT mode transition lottery. I do. That is, in the advantageous section shift winning process of FIG. 126 (a), when information of the game result is stored in the shift winning information temporary storage area 106f, the value corresponding to the value of the advantageous section end counter of FIG. The data is input to an erasing counter in the various counter areas 106e. Then, in the erasing process of step S5616, step S5716, and step S5816, a process of subtracting 1 from the erasing counter is performed, and when the counter becomes 0, an erasing process of the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f is performed. If not, the information in the transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f is stored and held (not erased). As a result, the information about the game result at the time of the advantageous section shift winning stored in the shift winning information temporary storage area 106f is stored over a plurality of games or over a plurality of AT mode shift lotteries. , And the number of times varies depending on the type of game result at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous section.

  More specifically, in the fourth RT state, when the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is triggered by the strong cherry, 5 is input to the counter for erasing, and the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery is triggered by the weak cherry. In the configuration, when 2 is inputted to the counter for erasure, if a strong cherry is used as an opportunity to win an advantageous section shift lottery, the information is used for five AT mode shift lotteries. If the weak cherry is used as an opportunity to win the advantageous section transition lottery, the information is used over two AT mode transition lotteries.

  In this case, the value of the counter for erasing may be input in consideration of the information on the RT state. For example, in the case of winning in the advantageous section shift lottery triggered by a strong cherry in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state. In such a case, 1 may be input to the counter for erasing, and 1 may be input to the counter for erasing even when a weak cherry is used as an opportunity to win the advantageous section shift lottery.

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments and the modifications, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and each of the modified examples, or a part or all thereof may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and each of the modified examples. In addition, all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications can be arbitrarily combined. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exhibited) of each component to be combined is ensured. The following components may be individually applied to a new component composed of a combination of the embodiment and the modified example, or some or all of them may be combined and applied.

  (1) As an opportunity to shift to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state, an eleventh re-game or a twelfth re-game is set, and the push corresponding to the winning of the eleventh re-game or the twelfth re-game is performed. Although the order notification is performed, the transition trigger to the fourth RT state is not limited to these replays, and another transition trigger may be provided. In the case where another transition opportunity is provided, it is preferable to notify the operation mode that enables the winning. For example, when another replay is provided as another transfer trigger of the eleventh replay or the twelfth replay, a configuration may be adopted in which an operation mode for establishing another replay winning is notified. Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the fourth RT state is caused by a small role prize such as a strong cherry or a drop-off, and in this case, an operation mode for a prize or drop-out which causes a transition to the fourth RT state may be performed. The notification may be configured, or may be configured to only notify that the result of the transition has been won. The operation mode to be notified is not limited to the pressing order notification, and may be notification of operation timing or notification of a design to be aimed at (for example, notification of aiming at a “red 7” design). Furthermore, by using the result that only the transition of the RT state occurs, although the prize is not established as in the case of the transition, the push order notification that results in a bell prize and the push order notification that causes a miss and stops the transition prize are performed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the presence or absence of transition to the fourth RT state is generated.

  (2) The configuration of the assist by notifying the pressing order during the AT mode has been described so that the transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high probability state occurs during the AT mode. A configuration in which assistance to the fourth RT state is performed other than during the AT mode may be adopted. Specifically, for example, even in the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it is possible to win a result that triggers the transition to the fourth RT state such as the transition replay 1 or 2, and is advantageous in the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If a transition lottery to a section is won, the transition may be assisted based on the fact that the subsequent game has won the result of the transition to the fourth RT state. In this case, in order to prevent the advantageous section from ending in the game in which the transition to the fourth RT state has occurred, if the AT mode transition lottery based on the result of the transition trigger is not won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is selected. It is preferable that a value other than 0 (a value of 1 or more) is input to the end counter.

  (3) When the transition replays 1 and 2 that may cause transition to the fourth RT state are won, if the transition notification flag is set, the push order notification corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize is made. When the game is executed or the information lottery executed at that time is won, the push order information corresponding to the replay winning is executed. However, even if the transition information flag is set, the fourth RT state is set. It may include a result that triggers a transition that does not assist in the transition to. For example, in addition to the transfer replays 1 and 2, a transfer replay 3 is provided, and at the time of the transfer replay 3 winning, the first re-game winning prize and the like together with the eleventh re-game winning prize or the twelfth re-game prize according to the operation order. A configuration that can be established. When the transition notification flag is set as described above and the transition replays 1 and 2 are won, the push order notification corresponding to the eleventh replay winning prize or the twelfth replay winning prize may be generated. On the other hand, in the case of the transition replay 3, even if the transition notification flag is set, the push order notification corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize may not be generated. In the configuration via the lottery of whether or not to generate the push order information, in the case of the transition replay 3, the lottery of whether or not to generate the push order information may be non-winning, or the lottery may be performed. The push order notification may not be generated without even performing it.

  (4) In a configuration in which a plurality of AT mode high-probability states with different winning probabilities in the AT mode transition lottery are provided, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which conditions for generating an assist for causing each RT state transition are different. Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery is different between the fourth RT state shifting based on the eleventh replay winning and the fourth RT state shifting based on the twelfth replay winning, The condition for assisting the fourth RT state based on the eleventh re-game winning may be different from the condition for assisting the fourth RT state based on the twelfth re-game winning. For example, at the time of the transfer replay 1 winning that enables the eleventh replay prize, when the transfer notification flag is set and the information lottery that wins with the first probability is won, the push corresponding to the eleventh replay prize is performed. At the time of the transfer replay 2 winning that generates the forward notification and enables the twelfth replay prize, when the transfer notification flag is set and the information lottery is won at a probability different from the first probability. And a plurality of transition notification flags corresponding to the twelfth replay prize, and a plurality of transition notification flags. When the remaining number of games reaches the first number, a transition notification flag corresponding to the eleventh replay prize Is set, and when the number of remaining games becomes a second number different from the first number, a transition notification flag corresponding to the twelfth replay winning is set.

  (5) Transition to the Fourth RT State The transition to the fourth RT state is based on the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize at the time of the replay 1 and 2 wins. For example, the transition is made when the bonus win or the end of the bonus state is triggered. It is good also as a structure which performs. For example, although the first BB or the second BB has been won, the carry-over state before the winning may be the fourth RT state, or based on the end of the bonus state based on the first BB or the second BB winning. , The fourth RT state may be set. In these, the carry-over state based on the first BB winning is set to the fourth RT state, while the carry-over state based on the second BB winning is not set to the fourth RT state, or the fourth RT state is set after the bonus state based on the first BB winning ends. On the other hand, the fourth RT state may not be set after the bonus state based on the second BB win, and the setting of the fourth RT state may be different depending on the type of bonus.

  (6) In the 0-RT state as the normal gaming state, a transition to the 4-RT state may occur. The 0th RT state is a state where, after turning on the power and after the RAM clear processing, the state shifts after the bonus is completed, and shifts to the first RT state based on the stop of the shift. That is, in normal times, most stay in the first RT state, and stay in the 0th RT state after the end of the bonus or in the morning. In such a configuration, for example, it is possible to make a transition replay 1 or 2 winning so that a transition to the fourth RT state can occur in the 0 RT state. This can be realized in the AT mode high probability state by the fourth RT state. In this case as well, if the winning in the advantageous section transition lottery is won in the 0th RT state, an assist for transition to the fourth RT state at the time of the transition replay winning may be generated.

  (7) As an assist for shifting to the fourth RT state at the time of the shift replay winning, the push order information corresponding to the eleventh replay prize or the twelfth replay prize is configured to be performed. The configuration may be such that the pressing order corresponding to the first re-game winning and the other re-game winning as well as the pressing order one-to-one corresponding to the twelve re-game winnings is generated. Specifically, among the operation sequences of the three stop switches 42 to 44, not only the pressing order information such as the one to be stopped first, the one to be stopped next, the one to be stopped last, but also the stop first. The push order is notified only for the items to be made, and the second and third may be provided with a playability such that an eleventh replay prize or a twelfth replay prize is established when the intuition of the player matches.

  In this case, the ratio of notifying the pressing order from the beginning to the end and the ratio of notifying a part of the pressing order such as only at the beginning may be different depending on the set value, the excess of the advantageous section, and the like.

  (8) In a configuration in which a plurality of types of the fourth RT state as the AT mode high-probability state are set, it is possible to cause the transition based on the fact that the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 10. Although the configuration has been described, the configuration in which the transition can be performed may be different depending on the type of the fourth RT state. For example, the condition that the transition to the fourth RT state of 10 games can be caused is that the number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG is 10, whereas the transition to the fourth RT state of 30 games occurs. Each condition may be set such that the advantageous zone remaining game number ZG is 30, for example. In this case, for example, when the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG becomes 10, the notification flag for transfer 1 is set as the notification flag for transfer, and when the number of games in the remaining zone ZG becomes 30, the notification for transfer is made. The transition notification flag 2 is set as a flag, and if the transition notification flag 1 is set when the transition replay 1 is won, a push order notification that causes the transition to the fourth RT state of the ten games is generated, and the transition replay 2 is won. At this time, if the transition notification flag 2 is set, it is preferable to generate a pressing order notification that causes the transition to the fourth RT state of the 30 games.

  (9) Transition to the fourth RT state in a configuration in which there are a plurality of fourth RT states as AT mode high-probability states having different degrees of advantage for the player due to differences in the number of continuous games and the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery. It is good also as a structure which makes the mode and effect of notification of the push order for a user different according to the advantage at the time of transfer. Specifically, in a configuration in which the fourth RT state based on the twelfth re-game prize is more advantageous than the fourth RT state based on the eleventh re-game prize, the push order notification corresponding to the eleventh re-game prize is generated. If the operation order is to generate a pressing order notification effect in the first effect of the first color (blue) as the background color and to generate a pressing order notification corresponding to the twelfth replay prize, the operation order is May be configured to generate a push order notification effect in a second effect of a second color (red) having a background color different from the first color.

  (10) The configuration in which the presence or absence of the push order notification that causes the transition to the fourth RT state as the AT mode high-probability state is managed on the main controller 101 side (RT transition processing or the like) is used. It is good also as a structure managed by the control apparatus 81 side.

  (11) When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the advantageous section is terminated, but the advantageous section may not be terminated, and only the AT mode may be terminated. Further, a configuration in which the presence or absence of the advantageous section is different depending on the value of the advantageous section game number AG or the advantageous section increase / decrease number ZM, that is, a configuration that differs depending on the remaining game number up to the upper limit game number or the increase number up to the upper limit increase number may be adopted. .

  (12) The advantageous section is ended when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs. However, even if the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the advantageous section continues until the number of remaining games in the AT mode becomes zero. Alternatively, the AT mode may be continued.

  Further, the advantageous section at the time of transition to the fourth RT state and the presence or absence of continuation of the AT mode may be configured to differ depending on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. For example, a situation where the transition notification flag is not set, that is, the number of remaining games If the transition to the fourth RT state occurs in a situation in which the game has not reached 10, the advantageous section or the AT mode is not terminated, and the transition notification flag is set, and the number of remaining games is 10 or less. When the transition to the fourth RT state occurs, the advantageous section or the AT mode may be terminated.

  Depending on the number of games executed and the number of increase / decrease in the advantageous section, the advantageous section at the time of the transition to the fourth RT state and the presence / absence of continuation of the AT mode may be configured differently. For example, the fourth RT state when the forced ending condition of the advantageous section has not been reached yet When the transition to the state occurs, the advantageous section may not be ended, while the transition to the fourth RT state may occur when the transition to the fourth RT state occurs under conditions close to the forcible termination condition of the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, the advantageous section at the time of the transition to the fourth RT state and whether or not the AT mode is continued may be different depending on the set value.

  (13) In the configuration for terminating the advantageous section and the AT mode in the fourth RT state transition, the advantageous section and the AT mode are terminated in the fourth RT state transition game, but the advantageous section and the AT mode are terminated in the next game. The mode may be terminated, or the advantageous section or the AT mode may be terminated in a later game. For example, when transitioning to the fourth RT state, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of games up to the end of the advantageous section or the AT mode is set, and the advantageous section or the AT mode is ended by exhausting the number of games. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of games up to the end depends on the game status and the set value up to the transition to the fourth RT state, such as the number of remaining games in the AT mode at the time of transition to the fourth RT state and the number of executed games in the advantageous section.

  (14) Although the advantageous section is terminated when the AT mode is not won, the advantageous section may be terminated at a part of the time when the AT mode is not won. Specifically, when the AT mode shift lottery is not won, the process of inputting the value corresponding to the AT non-winning flag or the advantageous section end counter is performed through the advantageous section end lottery. May be executed when a win is made (when a continuous lottery is not won).

  Further, the configuration may be such that the presence or absence of the advantageous section is different depending on the game result that triggered the AT mode shift lottery, or the winning probability of the above-mentioned end lottery may be different.

  (15) In the case where the lottery is not won in the AT mode destination lottery, the advantageous section is ended in the advantageous section transition game. However, the configuration may not be shifted to the advantageous section.

  (16) Although the AT mode lottery based on the game at the time of the advantageous section transition winning is executed before the transition to the advantageous section, the starting game (transition game) of the advantageous section is higher than the next game of the advantageous section transition winning game. In the configuration of a later game, the configuration may be such that the AT mode lottery is executed from the advantageous section shift winning game to one game before the start game. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the AT mode destination lottery is executed based on the game results of each game from the transfer winning game to one game before the start game, or the game result of the transfer winning game is stored. Alternatively, a configuration may be employed in which each game uses the game result of the transfer winning game.

  (17) In the case where the bonus such as the first BB or the second BB and the advantageous section are simultaneously won, and the start game of the advantageous section is a time when the bonus is won or the time when the bonus is finished, the process from the bonus winning to the winning or the end of the bonus is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which a lottery is won and an AT mode destination lottery is executed in a game before transition.

  (18) In a configuration in which the execution of the AT mode destination lottery can be restricted depending on the lottery result, the presence or absence of the restriction is matched to the case where the execution of the advantageous section transition lottery is restricted, but the execution of the advantageous section transition lottery is restricted. In the game result, the AT mode destination lottery can be executed, while the execution of the AT mode destination lottery is not restricted by the game result in which the execution of the AT mode destination lottery is not restricted. The configuration may be different from the restriction opportunity of the AT mode lottery.

  (19) The game result at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous section is stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, and based on the game result, the AT mode transition lottery is performed after the next game. Not only the game result at the time, but also information on the game state (RT state) and information on the effect of the game, etc., or separately stored, and based on these information, the AT mode lottery is performed afterward. May be performed.

  (20) Regarding the timing of the AT mode lottery and the information stored in the transition winning information temporary storage area 106f, when the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the game results of a plurality of games, the game results of the plurality of games It may be configured to be able to perform an AT mode lottery based on the game, or to store game results of a plurality of games.

  (21) The main controller 101 stores the game result at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous period. However, when the AT mode transition lottery is performed by another control device such as the display control device 81, the other is applied. May be stored in the control device. In this case, instead of or in addition to the storage processing in the transitional-winning-time information temporary storage area 106f, processing for outputting a command for storing the information to the other control device is executed, and the command is received. Another control device may be configured to execute processing for storing the information.

  (22) The configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the advantage section transition game or a subsequent game based on the game result at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous section has been described. It is sufficient that the game result at the time of winning the advantageous section shift is stored and held until the game in which the game is performed. The game result may be stored and held.

  (23) In the configuration in which the game result at the time of the transition to the advantageous section is stored in the transition-time information temporary storage area 106f, the AT mode transition lottery (AT mode destination) is performed together with the game result of the transition to the advantage section. In the case of performing the lottery, the AT mode transition lottery table may be stored in the transition election information temporary storage area 106f. At least the AT mode transition lottery may be performed in a subsequent game, and is necessary for the transition lottery. Information may be acquired at the time of winning the transition to the advantageous section.

  (24) Although the AT mode has been described as an example of the state included in the advantageous section, the first specific game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is included in the first specific game state and are more advantageous than other states The second specific game state may be any relationship, and may be another state in an advantageous section or may not be an advantageous state with respect to the instruction function.

  (25) In the configuration in which the fourth RT state is set using the fixed RT state, the number of games in the fixed RT state may be determined by lottery or the like. In this case, the configuration may be such that the number of games to be drawn varies depending on the set value. Specifically, the configuration may be such that the number of games in the fixed RT state increases as the set value increases.

  (26) The configuration has been shown in which, when an extra occurs in a situation where any excess flag is set, the additional game number is added to the number of disappeared games EG, but the extra game is added in a situation where the excess flag is not set. If the excess flag is set when the game is executed, the excess may be added to the number of disappeared games EG.

  (27) In a configuration in which the execution of the AT mode lottery and the execution of the post-AT mode lottery are made different depending on the RT state, if the AT mode destination lottery is not won in the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state, the AT mode is executed. In the case where the lottery after the AT mode is not won at the fourth RT while the lottery after the AT mode is not performed, the example where the lottery after the AT mode is performed is shown. Only the lottery after the AT mode may be performed without performing, and in the fourth RT state, the lottery after the AT mode and the lottery after the AT mode may be performed.

  (28) As the transition replay, transition replay 1 that is the first replay, second replay, and eleventh replay win, and transition replay 2 that is the first replay, second replay, and twelfth replay election Although provided, a configuration may also be adopted in which a replay that causes a transition to another RT state can be won. Specifically, by winning a transition replay, an eleventh replay or a twelfth regame win is achieved. At the same time, the third re-game, the fourth re-game, and the fifth re-game may be won.

  Further, the eleventh re-game winning and the twelfth re-game winning may be generated in the same transition replay. In this case, if the transition replay is won in a situation where the transition notification flag is set, It is good also as a structure which determines whether to generate the pressing order information corresponding to the eleventh re-game winning or the pressing order information corresponding to the twelfth re-game winning by lottery or the like.

  (29) In the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state is prevented from occurring based on the transition stop, but the transition to the first RT state also occurs in the fourth RT state based on the transition stop. Is also good.

  (30) In the configuration for realizing the fourth RT state in the fixed RT state, the configuration is such that the game shifts to the 0th RT state after the specified number of games are exhausted. However, the configuration may shift to the first RT state, or the second RT state. Or a transition to the third RT state. In this case, it is preferable that the first RT state to the third RT state are normal game states.

  (31) In the configuration in which the fourth RT state is realized by the infinite RT state, the transition to the first RT state or the second RT state is performed based on a predetermined replay winning, but the 0 RT state or the third RT state. It is good also as a structure which shifts to.

  (32) Although the fourth RT state is mainly described as the AT mode high probability state, the fourth RT state may be an AT mode low probability state in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is lower than the 0th RT state to the third RT state. It is sufficient that the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery is different from the 0th RT state to the 3rd RT state.

  (33) The configuration in which the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery differs between the fourth RT state and the other RT states has been described. For example, the configuration in which the winning probability of the VB mode transition lottery differs between the fourth RT state and the other RT states. Alternatively, the special zone shift lottery winning probability may be different between the fourth RT state and the other RT states.

  (34) The advantage section transfer lottery is configured to be executed in the transfer trigger having no setting difference in the winning probabilities, but not executed in the non-control trigger having the setting difference in the winning probabilities. In either case, the configuration may be such that it is executed, or it may be executed in a non-trigger role, but not executed in a shift trigger.

  (35) Regarding the AT mode lottery, not only the configuration which is executed in the transition trigger having no difference in the winning probability but is not executed in the non-trigger having the difference in the winning probability is set. In either case, the configuration may be such that it is executed, or it may be executed in a non-trigger role, but not executed in a shift trigger. Further, the lottery after the AT mode may be executed at the transition trigger, but not executed at the non-trigger, or may be executed at any of the transition trigger and the non-trigger. The configuration may be such that it is executed at the opportunity, but not executed at the transition opportunity.

  (36) Regarding the AT mode lottery and the post-AT mode lottery, there may be a setting difference in the AT mode winning probability, or there may be no setting difference.

  (37) Although the winning probability of the AT mode shift lottery as the winning probability of the mode shifting lottery during the advantageous section is different depending on the RT state, the winning probability may be different depending on other states. For example, the winning probability may be different between the bonus state and the normal gaming state (non-bonus state), or the winning probability may be different between the bonus state and the bonus carryover state before the bonus transition.

  (38) The ratio monitor 77 is configured to display the ratio between the specific section in which the pressing order notification can occur and the section in which the push order notification is not generated, but in addition to or instead of the ratio, May be externally output to a hall computer or the like of a game hall, and may be displayed at the external output destination.

  (39) The information of the specific section and the section other than the specific section, such as the value of the first combination ratio counter and the value of the second combination ratio counter, of the combination ratio monitor 77, based on the power-off of the gaming machine. The configuration may be cleared or may not be cleared.

  (40) The configuration in which the role ratio monitor 77 is mounted on the main control device 101 has been described. However, a configuration provided in another control device or a device dedicated to the role ratio monitor 77 may be provided. In these, it is preferable that the main control device 101 outputs information on a specific section and a section other than the specific section to the apparatus having the duty ratio monitor 77.

  (41) At the start of the AT mode, the configuration is such that the level of the AT mode is displayed. However, the level is not displayed or the level cannot be clearly grasped. It is good also as a structure which performs. For example, LV. 1, the effect on the auxiliary display section 65 is likely to be a suggestive effect with a blue background. 2 indicates that a suggestion effect with a green background is likely to occur. 3 indicates that a suggestion effect with a red background is likely to occur, and LV. For example, a configuration in which a suggestion effect of a rainbow-colored background is likely to be generated is possible. By doing so, the transition to the fourth RT state during the AT mode is performed, and the game performance in resetting the AT mode is improved.

  (42) Even in a configuration in which the transition to the fourth RT state is caused when the advantageous section ends due to the forcible termination condition being satisfied, or the transition to the fourth RT state is caused based on the excess, the advantageous section is also provided. Although the transition notification flag is set when the number of remaining games ZG becomes 10, priority is given to whether or not the forced termination condition is satisfied or a lottery based on the excess amount, so that the number of remaining zone remaining games ZG is set to 10 In some cases, the setting may not be performed.

  (43) In a configuration in which a freeze is generated when a transition replay is won in a situation where the post-addition flag is set, it is determined whether or not a freeze is generated depending on the relationship between the number of post-addition games and the initial number of games in the AT mode. It is good also as composition which makes it. More specifically, a freeze may be generated when the number of added games is greater than the initial number of games in the AT mode, 50 games.

  (44) In the configuration in which the third RT state is set as the transition mode in which the transition to the fourth RT state can occur, the transition probability of the transition to the fourth RT state in the third RT state as the transition mode is the previous state ( Any configuration may be used as long as it is higher than the second RT state, and the transition to the fourth RT state may occur with a low probability in the previous state (the second RT state).

  (45) In the configuration in which the game result of the advantageous section winning game is stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f, the AT mode destination lottery in the advantageous section winning game may be executed.

  (46) In the configuration in which the game result of the advantageous section winning game is stored in the transitional winning information temporary storage area 106f, the number of games and the number of times of the AT mode transition lottery that store and retain the information in the storage area 106f vary depending on the RT state. Although an example has been described, the presence or absence of storage may be changed depending on the RT state. For example, in the case of winning in the advantageous section shift lottery in the fourth RT state, the game result of the game is stored while the 0th RT state is stored. In the case where the winning in the advantageous section shift lottery in the fourth RT state from the state to the third RT state is won, the game result of the game may not be stored.

  (47) In the configuration for executing the AT mode lottery in the advantageous section shift winning game, different effects may be generated depending on whether the AT mode lottery is won or not. That is, even if the lottery has been won in the advantageous section shift lottery, if it has not been won in the AT mode destination lottery, the first effect is generated, and both the advantageous section shift lottery and the AT mode destination lottery are won. If so, it may be configured to generate a second effect different from the first effect.

  (48) The configuration is such that the payout rate changes according to each set value, and the setting 1 has the lowest payout rate and the setting 6 has the highest payout rate, but the payout rate (game media) depends on the set value. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of change is changed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the payout rates of some of the set values are the same and the payout rates of the other set values are different, for example, the payout rates of the setting 1 and the setting 2 are the same. Further, the settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a configuration in which the change rate of the payout is high, and the settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a configuration in which the change rate of the payout is low. In addition, the settings 1, 5 increase the predetermined amount in a short time, and decrease the predetermined amount in a long time, and the settings 2, 3, 4 require a longer time to increase the predetermined amount than the settings 1, 5. The predetermined amount may be reduced in a shorter time than the settings 1 and 5, and the setting 6 may be configured to cause almost no increase or decrease in payouts. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

  (49) Although the slot machine provided with three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reels and corresponding stop switches are provided in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing an erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are required. Further, the slot machine in which the number of valid lines is set to one in the situation where the number of bets is three has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the number of valid lines may be five.

  (50) Although the specific example of the slot machine 10 has been described, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, among the slot machines, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function (a so-called ball-using rotary game machine) may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  For example, in a pachinko machine or a ball-use spinning-type gaming machine, a configuration having a plurality of levels of setting values that change the payout rate or the like is used, and the above-described respective inventions are applied as suggestions and teaching effects of these setting values. Good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability becomes high and low and a low-probability state, the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 may be applied as a high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the ball rate becomes high and low, the respective inventions described above may be applied by setting the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 to a high ball entry state.

<About the inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses or the like.

  The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is described as "Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as a kind of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition being satisfied. It is known that a bonus is given to a player in accordance with the result of the internal lottery.Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is performed, the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. In the case where the result corresponds to the result, the benefit according to the result is given (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). In the gaming machine illustrated above and the like must increase player's interest in the game, in this regard, in which the invention that there. "Is still room for improvement has been made with the problems to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Feature A1. A plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are provided in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to perform processing),
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantage section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) which is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, a first shift lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section shift lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first specific game state;
The first specific game based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section win) corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state. First specific shifting means for shifting to a state (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by main controller 101);
A second shift lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode shift lottery by the main controller 101) for executing a second shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
The second specific game is performed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state. Second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by main controller 101);
With
The game state further includes a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is different. (For example, the fourth RT state) is set,
The first transition lottery means can execute the first transition lottery so that the probability of the first transition result in the first special state and the second special state is the same probability,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained at the first probability in the first special state, while the second transition lottery means is greater than the first probability in the second special state. The second transfer lottery can be executed so that the second transfer result is obtained with a high second probability;
Second special shifting means for shifting to the second special state based on the fact that the predetermined second shifting pattern combination has stopped at the effective position (function of executing RT state processing by main controller 101) When,
In the second specific game state, based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied, a specific mode notification including a specific stop operation mode that enables the second transitional pattern combination to be stopped is given to predetermined notification means ( A specific mode notifying unit (a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order at the time of the transfer replay winning in the main control device 101) executable on the auxiliary display unit 65, the instruction monitor 68);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operating means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body during orbiting is stopped, and the stop is performed. In a so-called slot machine in which an award is given by the awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state is provided, Since the second specific game state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state, is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. It is possible to realize a gaming property on the premise of a state transition which is advantageous in terms of interest, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, as the game state, there are provided a first special state and a second special state corresponding to a so-called RT state in which the probability of a payout result is common but the probability of a replay result may be different. The first specific game state and the second specific game state are transitioned through the first transitional lottery and the second transitional lottery. The first transitional lottery to the first specific game state is the first special state and the first special state. In the second special state, the lottery is performed so that the transition to the second specific game state is more likely to occur in the second special state than in the first special state. Regardless of the type of the RT state, a chance of transition to the first specific game state, which is advantageous to the player regardless of the type of the RT state, is equally given, while the chance of transition to the second specific game state differs depending on the type of the RT state. In addition, diversification of games is being attempted.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the mode notification including the specific stop operation mode in which the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state can be performed. Therefore, the transition to the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur is made in a situation where the second specific game state is already in progress. For example, the second specific game state ends. In such a case, a transition to the second special state is generated to create a so-called pullback zone, or a transition to the second special state is performed when the second specific game state is reset, for example. It is possible to greatly contribute to realization of a great game.

  It should be noted that, as the gaming state, a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a first special state (for example, a second RT state) in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is different. The second special state (for example, the fourth RT state) is set, and the first special state (where the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the re-game result may be different as the gaming state). For example, a second RT state) and a second special state (e.g., a fourth RT state) are set. "And" a game state, and further, a first special state (e.g., a different degree of advantage for the player). , A second RT state) and a second special state (e.g., a fourth RT state) are set. "And" a gaming state, and further, a first special state (e.g., a second RT state) and a second special state. State (for example, The first 4RT state) are set, "and may be expressed. These changes in the expressions relating to the “first special state” and the “second special state” can be applied to other feature groups and features.

Feature A2. Ending means (a function of executing a process for ending the AT mode by the main control device 101) for ending the second specific game state based on satisfaction of a predetermined ending condition,
The feature A1 is characterized in that the specific mode notification means can execute the specific mode notification so as to enter the second special state before the second specific game state is ended by the ending means. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the above configuration, when the second specific game state advantageous to the player ends, the specific mode notification is executed so as to be the second special state. By doing in this way, after the second specific game state ends, a situation such as the second special state where the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur occurs, and a so-called pullback zone to the second specific game state occurs. Can be added.

In addition, the above-described configuration includes, for example, “a termination unit that terminates the second specific game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition (a function of executing a process for terminating the AT mode by the main control device 101). )
The feature A1 is characterized in that the specific mode notification means can execute the specific mode notification so as to be in the second special state when the second specific game state is ended by the ending means. The described gaming machine. ".

Feature A3. As the end condition, the number of executed games in the first specific game state reaches the upper limit number of games, or the difference between the game medium paid out in the first specific game state and the used game medium reaches the upper limit increase number. Have set a mandatory termination condition
The specific mode notification means executes the specific mode notification so as to be in the second special state when the second specific game state is terminated by the termination means based on the satisfaction of the forced termination condition. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the gaming machine is capable of being operated.

  According to the above configuration, the transition to the second special state occurs when the condition for forcibly terminating the first specific game state including the second specific game state is satisfied. In this case, after the forced termination of the first specific game state, the transition to the first specific game state does not easily occur, but the transition to the second specific game state easily occurs. The return zone of the second specific game state can be set without violating the significance of the determination of the forced termination condition.

Feature A4. First grasping means for grasping the number of executed games or the difference number in the first specific game state (a function of executing a process of managing the number of advantageous section games AG and the number of advantageous section increase / decrease ZM by the main control device 101);
Adding means (a function of executing an AT mode game number adding process by the main control device 101) capable of executing an addition of the remaining number of the first specific game state based on a predetermined additional condition being satisfied; ,
Based on the grasp result of the first grasping unit and the remaining number, a second grasping unit (by the main control device 101) capable of grasping that the forcible termination condition is satisfied before the forcible termination condition is satisfied. Function to execute the remaining game number management processing and the remaining number management processing),
When the additional condition is satisfied in a situation where the second grasping means determines that the forced ending condition is satisfied, the upper limit game number is included in the remaining number of additions based on the satisfaction of the additional condition. Or specific information storage means for storing specific information corresponding to an excess exceeding the upper limit increase number (a function of executing a process of storing the number of games added to the number of disappeared games EG by the main control device 101);
With
When the second specific game state is ended by the ending means based on the establishment of the forced ending condition, the specific mode notifying means is configured to respond to the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, An execution lottery unit (a function of executing a transition notification lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing an execution lottery of the specific mode notification is provided, and the specific mode notification can be executed based on a lottery result of the execution lottery unit. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein:

  According to the above configuration, when an additional event exceeding the forced termination condition occurs, the specific mode notification execution lottery is performed according to the excess, and the specific mode notification can be performed. In this way, the specific mode notification that causes the transition to the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur can be compensated for the inability to consume the excess. Becomes

  Feature A5. The specific mode notification means is configured to execute the specific mode based on a specific situation where the number of games until the end condition is satisfied is smaller than the number of continuous games in the second special state or the average number of continuous games. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, which can execute notification.

  By specifying the execution timing in the specific mode notification in relation to the number of continuous games in the second special state and the average number of continuous games as in the above configuration, the second special state is forcibly completed at the end of the second specific game state. The effect of the feature A2 can be achieved with a relatively simple configuration without using a complicated configuration such as shifting to the above.

  Feature A6. The feature A5 according to the feature A5, wherein the specific mode notification unit is capable of executing the specific mode notification when the specific situation is reached and a lottery result by the lottery unit is a predetermined specific result. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, it is not always possible to generate the specific mode notification immediately before the end of the second specific game state and to cause the transition to the second special state, and the lottery result by the lottery means of each game. Must be specific. In other words, the luck element is added to the transition to the second special state at the end of the second specific gaming state, and the point is excited as to whether or not the specific result is obtained, that is, the transition to the so-called pullback zone. The game can be performed while giving high interest whether or not the game occurs.

  Feature A7. If the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result before the specific situation is reached, a means capable of restricting the execution of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means (step S1521 by the main control device 101) The gaming machine according to Feature A6, characterized by having a function of making a negative determination in the processing of (1).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid an event in which the transition to the second special state occurs before the transition to the second special state, regardless of whether the transition to the second special state is to occur immediately before the end of the second specific game state. can do.

  The second special state has a configuration in which it is easy to win the second shift lottery to the second specific game state. In order to prevent the advantage of the second special state from being excessively increased, for example, the second special state is reset. A configuration is also conceivable in which the winning probability of the game result is set low or the second specific game state is terminated based on the transition to the second special state. On the other hand, if the above configuration is not provided, if the specific result is obtained before the specific situation is reached, the transition to the second special state occurs, and a disadvantageous event for the player may occur. In order to avoid such a situation, a configuration may be considered in which the lottery table is switched before and after the specific situation, and the specific result is not obtained before the specific situation is reached. However, the configuration may be complicated. . In that regard, as described above, a relatively simple configuration is realized by permitting the specific result winning before the specific situation is reached, and restricting the execution of the notification of the specific mode at the time of the specific result winning. It is possible to avoid shifting to the second special state before the specific situation.

Feature A8. A remaining number notification executing means (a function of executing a notification based on a display remaining number counter HG by the display control device 81) capable of executing a remaining number notification corresponding to the remaining number of games in the second specific game state;
Additional processing executing means for executing an additional processing of the remaining number of games in the second specific game state (a function of performing an additional processing of the number of games in the AT mode by the main control device 101);
Based on the fact that the additional processing has been performed by the additional processing executing means, additional information means for performing additional information on the additional processing (a function of performing an additional information presentation process by the display control device 81);
Updating means for updating the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification executing means based on the additional notification being performed by the additional notification means (a function of executing a processing for an additional notification effect by the display control device 81); ,
When the number of games corresponding to the remaining number notification by the remaining number notification executing means is in the second specific situation in which the number of continuous games in the second special state or the average number of continuous games becomes smaller, the additional processing is executed. Means for restricting the execution of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means (by the main control device 101) if the additional processing by the means is executed and the additional notification by the additional notification means is not executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, further comprising a function of making a negative determination in the processing of step S1521).

  According to the above configuration, in a situation where so-called post-notification notification is performed in which post-addition processing is executed but post-addition notification has not been performed, the number of games corresponding to the remaining number notification is close to the end of the second specific game state. Even if it is, the execution of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification executing means is restricted, and the transition to the second special state does not occur. In this way, even if the actual remaining number of games in the second specific game state is larger than the content of the remaining number notification, an event such as transition to the second special state does not occur. Can be Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the transition to the second special state occurs near the end of the second specific game state while ensuring the effect of the so-called post-notification information.

Feature A9. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result, it is possible to shift to the second special state,
In the specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a means capable of executing a predetermined special effect (the eleventh replay or the twelfth replay at the time of the transition replay winning by the display control device 81) Function to perform a process for performing a press order notification effect corresponding to),
In the second specific situation, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, a means capable of executing the special effect and an effect in which the player is indistinguishable or difficult to identify (when the transition replay is won by the display control device 81). A function of executing a process for performing a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay of
The gaming machine according to feature A8, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the transition to the second special state can occur based on the specific result winning, the special effect is generated when the specific result is won in the specific situation, and the second specifying is performed. Even in the situation, when the specific result is won, an effect similar to the special effect is made to occur, so that the special effect and the like do not occur, so that the second specific situation is reached, that is, the additional processing is not executed (after It is possible to avoid an event in which it is realized that the ride notification) exists. Therefore, the effect of shifting to the second special state can be enjoyed within a range that does not obliterate the effect of the post-attachment notification that has been prepared.

  Feature A10. A feature is provided of a specific ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S1626 by the main control device 101) for ending the second specific gaming state based on the transition to the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A9.

  According to the above configuration, by operating in the second specific game state in accordance with the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means, a transition to the second special state occurs, and the second specific game state ends. By doing so, the second special state in which the transition to the second specific gaming state is likely to occur can be made to function as a pullback zone for the second specific gaming state, and the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible. It is also possible to prevent a wasteful situation, such as the occurrence of the second special state in which the second special game state easily occurs during the second specific game state.

  In addition, the above-mentioned "specific end means" is based on "the transition to the second special state, and the specific end means for ending the second specific game state regardless of the number of remaining games in the second specific game state. ".

Feature A11. In the game state, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common to the first special state and the second special state, while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is at least the first special state. Different third special state (first RT state) is set,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the replay result is set so that the third special state is lower than the first special state,
The probability that the lottery result by the second transition lottery means will be the second transition result is set so that the first special state and the third special state are lower than the second special state,
Third special shifting means for shifting to the third special state based on the fact that a predetermined third shifting pattern combination has stopped at the effective position (function of executing RT state processing by main controller 101) With
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, the pattern combination for the second shift can be stopped at the effective position by the stop operation in the specific stop operation mode, and a third operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode The feature A1 is characterized in that a specific result (transition replay 1, 2) is set at the effective position where the pattern combination for the third transition can be stopped by the stop operation in the specific stop operation mode. A gaming machine according to any one of A10 to A10.

  According to the above configuration, when the specific result is won, when the stop operation is performed in the specific stop operation mode, the transition to the second special state occurs in which the probability of being the second transition result increases, and the specific state is determined when the specific result is won. If a stop operation is performed in a third specific stop operation mode different from the stop operation mode, a transition to a third special state in which the probability of a replay result being low may occur. In other words, depending on the stop operation mode at the time of the specific result winning, the subsequent gaming state becomes the second special state in which the transition to the second specific gaming state is likely to occur, or the transition to the second specific gaming state is less likely to occur. Further, whether the third special state in which the probability of the replay result is low is different. As described above, in the game in which the transition to the second special state can occur, at the same time, the transition to the third special state, which has a great advantage for the player from the second special state, can occur. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the game in which the transition to the second special state may occur, and to increase the interest in the stop operation mode that causes the transition.

  Feature A12. When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the stop operation is performed in a second specific stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode and the third specific stop operation mode, so that the lottery result is determined in the effective position. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the maintenance pattern combination for maintaining the first special state can be stopped.

  According to the above configuration, the first special state is maintained, that is, the state of the state is changed, in addition to the case of shifting to the second special state and the case of shifting to the third special state, depending on the stop operation mode at the time of the specific result winning. In some cases, no transition occurs. By doing so, in a case where it is inconvenient if the transition to the second special state or the third special state occurs, it is possible to realize, with a relatively simple configuration, to prevent the transition from occurring. Becomes More specifically, the playability such as making a transition to the second special state or the third special state or preventing a transition to these states is made, by using a lottery table that can be a specific result. This can be realized without making any changes.

Feature A13. A specific ending unit (a function of executing the process of step S1626 by the main control device 101) for ending the second specific game state based on the transition to the second special state;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the specific result, special notification including the specific stop operation mode and the second specific stop operation mode can be executed by a predetermined notification section by a special notification execution section (display control device 81). 94. The gaming machine according to feature A12, further comprising a function of executing a process for performing the notification of FIG.

  According to the above configuration, although the second special game state is ended when the state is shifted to the second special state by the specific stop operation mode, the current second state can be easily selected in the transition lottery to the second specific game state. Realizing novel game characteristics such as letting the player choose whether to challenge the transition to the new second specific game state while maintaining the specific game state or to maintain the current second specific game state It becomes possible.

Feature A14. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the replay result is set such that the first special state is higher than the second special state,
The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A13, wherein the specific mode notification means is capable of executing the specific mode notification in the first special state.

  According to the above configuration, when the state transitions from the first special state to the second special state, the probability of a re-game result is reduced. Therefore, from the viewpoint that it is possible to play a game while reducing the decrease in game media. The transition from the first special state to the second special state is not preferable for the player. On the other hand, as described in the feature A1, the second special state is superior from the viewpoint of the transition rate to the second specific game state. Therefore, for example, in a situation where the game is already in the second specific game state, the first special state is more preferable to the player than in the second special game state. It is possible to make the impressions of both special states different (directly opposite), such as that the second special state is more preferable to the player than the state, and this greatly contributes to the realization of gaming ability using that. It becomes possible.

Feature A15. A setting means (main control device) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in an increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. 101) to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the
An execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification unit when the first setting value is set by the setting unit;
An execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification unit when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting unit;
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the difference between the increase / decrease rate of the game medium and the set value of the increase / decrease mode is embodied by the transition rate to the second special state, that is, the transition rate to the state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur. It is possible to realize novel game characteristics such as performing.

Feature A16. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (transition replay 1 or 2), the pattern combination for the second transition can be stopped at the effective position,
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific result when the first setting value is set by the setting means, and the lottery means when the second setting value is set by the setting means. The gaming machine according to feature A15, wherein the execution rate of the specific mode notification performed by the specific mode notification unit is different due to a difference between the probability that the lottery result obtained by the specific mode is the specific result.

  According to the above-described configuration, the winning probability as a specific result differs depending on the setting value, and the difference in the winning probability realizes a difference in the transition rate to the second special state. This makes it possible to realize a difference in the transition rate to the second special state with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature A17. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined specific result (transition replay 1, 2), and when the stop operation means is operated in the specific stop operation mode, the lottery is moved to the effective position. This is a configuration in which the pattern combination for the second shift can be stopped,
In the second specific game state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result in the second specific game state, the specific mode notification is executed by the execution lottery means (the transition notification lottery by the main control device 101). And a function of executing the specific mode notification based on a lottery result of the execution lottery means.
A probability that a lottery result by the execution lottery means when the first setting value is set by the setting means is a result of executing the specific mode notification; and a setting of the second setting value by the setting means. The probability that the lottery result by the execution lottery means when executing the specific mode notification is different from the probability that the specific mode notification is executed, the execution rate of the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification means is different. The gaming machine according to A15 or Feature A16.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the execution lottery of the specific mode notification differs depending on the set value, and the difference in the winning probability realizes a difference in the transition rate to the second special state. This makes it possible to realize a difference in the transition rate to the second special state with a relatively simple configuration. In particular, since it is only necessary to change the winning probability of the execution of the specific mode notification, it is not necessary to change the lottery table by the lottery means. Therefore, in the control device having the lottery means, it is not necessary to store a plurality of lottery tables for it, and the storage capacity can be reduced.

Feature A18. A setting means (main control device) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in an increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. 101) to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the
The second shift lottery means determines whether the first setting value has been set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value has been set. The second transition lottery can be executed so that the probability of the second transition result becomes the same probability, while the second transition lottery is performed so that the probability of the second transition result becomes different in the second special state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, wherein a 2 shift lottery can be executed (for example, there is a setting difference in the AT mode shift lottery based on the normal replay in FIG. 106).

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the transfer lottery to the second specific gaming state is common regardless of the set value in the first special state, but differs depending on the set value in the second special state. In this case, as the number of games in the second special state increases, the number of game trials for estimating the set value increases, and the set value may be easily predicted in the second special state. On the other hand, in such a configuration, the transition to the second special state is realized by the specific mode notification by the specific mode notification executing means, so that the second special state can be shifted to the second specific game state in the second special state. The transition rate to the second specific game state can be set to be equal to or greater than the setting difference of the transition lottery. In other words, even if the setting difference of the lottery transition to the second specific gaming state in the second special state is not so large, a setting difference is provided for the transition rate to the second special state, for example, as in features A14 to A16. By doing so, it is possible to increase the setting difference of the transition rate to the second specific game state. The number of transitions to the second special state should be overwhelmingly less than the number of games in the second special state, and the number of trials in the game for estimating the set value also decreases. Therefore, it is possible to provide a setting difference in the transition rate to the second specific game state while preventing the setting value from being easily predicted.

  Feature A19. The second special state is set so as to end based on the predetermined number of games being consumed, and is set so that the transition from the second special state to the first special state does not occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18.

  According to the above configuration, the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur is a so-called fixed RT state in which the number of executable games is determined. When a configuration called a so-called infinite RT state in which the number of executable games is variable is applied, the length of the second special state is lengthened or shortened. Although it may vary greatly depending on the situation, the above-described configuration makes it possible to enjoy the benefits of the second shift lottery to the second specific gaming state as evenly as possible.

  Feature A20. When the second shift lottery is won in the second special state, information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is added to the second specific game state won in the second shift lottery. The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  When the second special state is set to the fixed RT state, the second special state is terminated as long as a predetermined number of games is not exhausted, even though the lottery to shift to the second specific game state is won. And the transition to the second specific game state may not be easily caused. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, the state after the lottery-winning transition to the second specific gaming state is configured to be reflected in the winning second specific gaming state. Disadvantages of the fixed RT state are eliminated.

  Note that the specific configuration of “the information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is added to the second specific game state won in the second shift lottery” includes “the second special state”. Is added to the number of games in the second specific game state that has won the second transfer lottery, or "the information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is 2 is added to the degree of advantage in the second specific game state that has won the transfer lottery ”, or“ a special state in which the probability of the additional processing being performed is high ”is set in the second specific game state. Then, "the information corresponding to the number of remaining games in the second special state is determined by the transfer rate to the special state in the second specific game state or the number of games in the special state in the second specific game state selected in the second shift lottery. Be taken into account Configuration can be considered.

  Feature A21. The second special state can be terminated when a lottery result by the lottery means reaches a predetermined end result, and a transition from the second special state to the first special state can occur. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein

  According to the above configuration, the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur is a so-called infinite RT state in which the number of executable games is variable. In this case, although the benefit from the second special state is large, it may fluctuate greatly depending on the situation, but the transition to another RT state, for example, the first special state is allowed. In the configuration in which the state is digested, it is possible to shift to the first special state without going through another state when the lottery to shift to the second specific game state is won during the second special state. . Therefore, the transition to the second specific game state can be performed relatively smoothly.

Feature A22. A setting means (main control device) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in an increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. 101) to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the end result is determined. The gaming machine according to Feature A21, which can be different.

  According to the above configuration, since there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the end result that defines the continuation rate of the second special state, there is a setting difference in the continuation rate of the second special state. This makes it possible to realize the difference in the ease of enjoying the benefits of the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur by the set value.

Feature A23. Terminating means for terminating the first specific game state based on the satisfaction of a predetermined termination condition (a function of executing a section display second process by the main control device 101);
When the first specific game state is ended by the ending means, initialization means capable of executing initialization processing of information relating to the first specific game state (initialization processing in the section display second processing by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
With
When the end means terminates the first specific game state, the second specific game state is also terminated,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A22, wherein the second special state is maintained even when the initialization processing is performed by the initialization unit.

  According to the above configuration, when the end condition is satisfied and the first specific game state ends, the second specific game state included in the first specific game state also ends, and the initial information on the first specific game state is initialized. Conversion processing is performed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly manage whether the first specific game state or the second specific game state is continued. In addition, since the second special state is configured to be maintained even after the initialization process is performed, when the transition to the second special state occurs due to the notification of the specific mode in the second specific game state, the state is changed to the second special state. It is possible to carry over after the end of the first specific game state, and it is possible to realize continuity of the first specific game state and the second specific game state via the second special state.

Feature A24. A plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are provided in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to perform processing),
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantage section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) which is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, a first shift lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section shift lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first specific game state;
The first specific game based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section win) corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state. First specific shifting means for shifting to a state (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by main controller 101);
A second shift lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode shift lottery by the main controller 101) for executing a second shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
The second specific game is performed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state. Second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by main controller 101);
With
The game state further includes a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is different. (For example, the fourth RT state) is set,
The first transition lottery means can execute the first transition lottery so that the probability of the first transition result in the first special state and the second special state is the same probability,
The second shift lottery means executes the second shift lottery so that the second shift result is obtained at a first probability in the first special state, while the first probability is not equal to the first probability in the second special state. The second transfer lottery can be executed so that the second transfer result is obtained with a different second probability,
Second special shifting means for shifting to the second special state based on the fact that the predetermined second shifting pattern combination has stopped at the effective position (function of executing RT state processing by main controller 101) When,
In the second specific game state, based on a predetermined specific condition being satisfied, a specific mode notification including a specific stop operation mode that enables the second transitional pattern combination to be stopped is given to predetermined notification means ( A specific mode notifying unit (a function of executing a process for notifying the pressing order at the time of the transfer replay winning in the main control device 101) executable on the auxiliary display unit 65, the instruction monitor 68);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operating means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body during orbiting is stopped, and the stop is performed. In a so-called slot machine in which an award is given by the awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state is provided, Since the second specific game state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state, is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. It is possible to realize a gaming property on the premise of a state transition which is advantageous in terms of interest, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, as the game state, there are provided a first special state and a second special state corresponding to a so-called RT state in which the probability of a payout result is common but the probability of a replay result may be different. The first specific game state and the second specific game state are transitioned through the first transitional lottery and the second transitional lottery. The first transitional lottery to the first specific game state is the first special state and the first special state. While the two special states are performed with a common probability, the second transition lottery is performed so that the transition rate to the second special game state can be different between the first special state and the second special state. Regardless of the type of the RT state, a chance of transition to the first specific game state, which is advantageous to the player, is equally given, while the chance of transition to the second specific game state differs depending on the type of the RT state. The game is being diversified.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, the mode notification including the specific stop operation mode in which the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state can be performed. Therefore, the transition to the second special game state is different from the first special state, and the transition to the second special state is caused in the second special game state. For example, the second special game state is changed. In a configuration in which the state is more likely to shift to the second specific game state, when the second specific game state ends, the state is changed to the second special state to create a so-called pullback zone, (2) When resetting the specific game state, it is possible to cause a transition to the second special state or the like, and it is possible to greatly contribute to realizing a novel game property.

  In addition, each configuration shown in the features A1 to A23 may be applied to the feature A24. In this case, each configuration may be applied individually or in combination.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. A plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are provided in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to perform processing),
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantage section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) which is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, a first shift lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section shift lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first specific game state;
The first specific game based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section win) corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state. First specific shifting means for shifting to a state (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by main controller 101);
A second shift lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode shift lottery by the main controller 101) for executing a second shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
The second specific game is performed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state. Second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by main controller 101);
With
When the result of the second shift lottery by the second shift lottery means is not the second shift result, the specific end means for terminating the first specific game state (first processing at the time of AT non-winning by the main control device 101 to Function to execute the third process when AT is not won),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operating means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body during orbiting is stopped, and the stop is performed. In a so-called slot machine in which an award is given by the awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state is provided, Since the second specific game state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state, is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming ability on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the game, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

  In addition, in the above-described configuration, the first specific game state ends when the second transition lottery to the second specific game state is not won, so that the difference in the degree of advantage in the success or failure of the second transition lottery is extreme. And an intense pounding feeling is provided when the second transfer lottery is performed. By doing so, it is possible to appropriately enhance the interest of the game aimed at the second specific game state.

Feature B2. First grasping means for grasping the number of remaining games in the first specific game state (a function of executing a process of managing the number ZG of advantageous section remaining games by the main control device 101);
A first ending means for ending the first specific game state based on the grasping result by the first grasping means (the advantageous section is determined based on a normal ending condition being satisfied in the section displaying second process by the main control device 101); Function to execute the process to end)
Second grasping means for grasping the number of executions of the first specific game state (a function of executing a process of managing the number AG of advantageous zone games by the main control device 101);
A second ending means for ending the first specific game state irrespective of the grasping result by the first grasping means based on the fact that the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means has reached a predetermined upper limit number (Function of executing forced termination process in section display second process by main controller 101);
The gaming machine according to feature B1, comprising:

  In the above configuration, a so-called forced termination condition in which the first specific game state is terminated based on the remaining number grasped by the first grasping means and a case where the number of executions grasped by the second grasping means reaches the upper limit number. May be terminated when the condition is satisfied. In such a configuration, for example, when an increase in the number of game media can be expected by shifting to the second specific game state included in the first specific game state, the shift to the second specific game state does not occur. However, if the situation of the first specific gaming state continues despite the fact, the possibility that the first specific gaming state is terminated by the forcible termination condition increases. In this regard, as in the feature B1, the first specific game state is ended when the second transfer lottery is not won in the first specific game state, so that the number of games up to the upper limit is not the second specific game state. It is possible to suppress an event such as erosion depending on the state.

Feature B3. The first transition lottery means executes the first transition lottery based on a lottery result obtained by the lottery means being a predetermined specific result,
The second transfer lottery means uses the specific result that is the first transfer result based on the result of the first transfer lottery by the first transfer lottery means being the first transfer result. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the second shift lottery can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, in a configuration that is a multi-stage lottery system such as the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, the first stage transition lottery is performed based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a specific result, The second stage transfer lottery will be performed using the result of the lottery by the lottery means when the first stage transfer lottery is won, and both transfer lotteries will be performed based on the result of the lottery by the same game lottery means Can be done. That is, for example, if the second transfer lottery is performed when the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a certain result after winning the first transfer lottery, the game in which the first transfer lottery is performed starts. In the game up to the game in which the second transfer lottery is performed, a feeling of slack may occur, and the game until the second transfer lottery is performed is in the first specific game state. This is not preferable in a configuration in which there is a situation where the situation other than the specific game state should be shortened. In this regard, by making both shift lotteries performed using the lottery result of the same game as in the above configuration, the second shift lottery can be executed immediately after shifting to the first specific game state. Both shift lotteries to be enriched can be expected to have an effect of dramatically increasing the degree of attention, and a game that is in the first specific game state but not in the second specific game state can be shortened.

Feature B4. Based on the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means being the first transition result, the second transition lottery that can execute the second transition lottery in the game in which the first transition lottery was performed 2 transfer destination lottery means (function of executing AT mode shift lottery in the process of winning an advantageous section by the main controller 101);
When the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is not the second transfer result, the specific end unit can execute a process for ending the first specific game state to be transferred to thereafter. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

  According to the above configuration, the second shift lottery can be performed in the game based on the fact that the lottery result by the first shift lottery means is the first shift result. By doing so, in the configuration in which the first specific game state is ended when the second shift lottery is not won, the processing for the end is performed in advance (before the first specific game state shift). In the case where the first specific game state is substantially ended immediately, for example, when the first transfer lottery is won but the second transfer lottery is not won, the For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being delighted by performing an effect for the game.

  In addition, "the process for ending the first specific game state to be shifted to thereafter" is, for example, "a configuration in which the first specific game state to be shifted to thereafter can be executed over a specific number of games. , A process for setting the number of specific games ”.

Feature B5. The second transfer lottery means includes a second transfer lottery correspondence information group (hereinafter referred to as a second transfer lottery correspondence information group) in which the relationship between the lottery result information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means and the second transfer result information corresponding to the second transfer result is determined. The second shift lottery is executed by using the AT mode shift lottery table),
The second transfer destination lottery means, based on a result of the first transfer lottery by the first transfer lottery being the first transfer result, the lottery means in a game having the first transfer result. The second shift lottery can be executed in the game having the first shift result by using the lottery result information according to the second shift lottery correspondence information group and the second shift lottery correspondence information group. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the second transition lottery means is configured to determine the relationship between the lottery result information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means and the second transition result information corresponding to the second transition result. The second transfer lottery is performed using a so-called lottery table such as an information group, and the second transfer destination lottery means performs the first transfer lottery based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transfer lottery becomes the first transfer result. The second transfer lottery is performed by using the lottery result of the lottery means in the game that resulted in the first transfer result and the lottery table when the second transfer lottery means performs the second transfer lottery. In this way, the difference between the second transfer lottery means and the second transfer destination lottery means is only the lottery result in the game in which the second transfer lottery is performed. In other words, the second transfer lottery means performs the second transfer lottery using the result of the lottery performed by the lottery means in the game in the first specific game state, and the second transfer lottery means selects the game that has won the first transfer lottery. The second shift lottery is performed using the lottery result by the lottery means in the above. Therefore, the configuration of the second transfer destination lottery means becomes relatively simple, and when the second transfer destination lottery means causes the transition to the second specific game state, the lottery method of the first transfer lottery is changed. It is possible to eliminate the need for unnecessary changes such as the above, and to ensure the transparency of the game.

Feature B6. Even if the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is not the result of the second transfer, the second transfer lottery means may switch the second transfer lottery in the first specific game state to which the second transfer lottery is performed thereafter. Lottery can be executed,
Means for preventing the specific ending means from ending the first specific game state when the result of the second shift lottery in the first specific game state to be shifted to thereafter is the second shift result (main control The gaming machine according to Feature B5, further comprising a function of executing a process of clearing an AT mode non-winning flag when the device 101 wins the AT mode.

  According to the above configuration, even if the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is not won, if the second transfer lottery in the first specific game state to be subsequently transferred is won, the first transfer lottery is not performed. The game state does not end. In other words, the first specific game state ends when both the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means and the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means are not won. By doing in this way, a situation occurs in which it is easy to win the second transition lottery after the transition to the first specific game state, while having the effect of executing the second transition lottery means before the transition to the first specific game state. In such a case (for example, when a rare role is won, etc.), it becomes possible to flexibly respond to the change in the situation, and a situation has arisen that makes it easy for the player to win the second transfer lottery. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent a feeling of disappearance due to invalidation or the like.

Feature B7. As the game state, the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becomes the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result becomes the replay result is different from the first special state (for example, the second RT state) and the second special state (for example, the second RT state). , 4th RT state) are set,
In the first special state, the probability of the first transition result when the first transition lottery is performed by the first transition lottery means, and the first transition result by the first transition lottery means in the second special state. When the transfer lottery is performed, the probability of the first transfer result being common,
In the first special state, the probability that the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is the second transfer result, and the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means is the second transfer lottery. 2 While the probability of the transition result is common,
In the second special state, the probability that the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is the second transfer result, and the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means is the second transfer lottery. 2. The gaming machine according to Feature B5 or Feature B6, wherein the probability of the shift result may be different.

  According to the above configuration, for example, a so-called RT state such as a first special state and a second special state in which the probability of a payout result is common, and the probability of a replay result is different, is set. In the first special state and the second special state, the winning probability of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is common to the first special state and the second special state. The winning probability of the second transition lottery by the two transition lottery means may be different between the first special state and the second special state. In a configuration in which a two-stage lottery system such as the first transfer lottery means and the second transfer lottery means is set, the winning probability of the first transfer lottery means is common to both special states, and the second transfer lottery means wins. By making the probabilities different between the two special states, the chances of shifting to the first specific game state can be given equally, and the ease of transition to the second specific game state can be different depending on the special state. In addition, an effect of achieving both equality and diversity of the game can be expected. In this regard, as described above, since the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means can be performed before the transition to the first specific game state (winning game), the winning by the second transfer destination lottery means is performed. By setting the probabilities common to the first special state and the second special state, the second transfer lottery can be performed within a range in which the winning probability of the first transfer lottery does not contradict the significance of being assumed to be common to both special states. This can be performed before shifting to the first specific game state.

  Feature B8. The probability that the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means will be the second transfer result, and the probability that the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means will be the second transfer result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B7, wherein the gaming machine may be different.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability of the second transfer lottery performed before the first specific game state transition and the second transfer lottery performed after the first specific game state transition is different. When the value is increased, the game result at the time of the first transition lottery winning is given priority over the game result after the transition to the first specific game state. When the winning probability after the transition is increased, the game result at the time of the first transition lottery winning is obtained. In this configuration, the game result after the transition to the first specific game state is prioritized. By doing in this way, it greatly contributes to the creation of new gaming properties utilizing the difference in the winning probability between the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means and the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means. Becomes possible.

Feature B9. If the result of the second shift lottery is not the second shift result, an end game number setting means for setting the number of games until the first specific game state ends (sets an advantageous section end counter by the main control device 101) Function to execute the process)
Updating means capable of updating the number of games set by the ending game number setting means in each of the games in the first specific game state (subtraction processing of the advantageous section end counter in the third processing when the AT is not won by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
With
The specific ending means changes the first specific gaming state based on the fact that the number of games set by the ending game number setting means has become the number of games (0) corresponding to the end of the first specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is terminated.

  According to the above configuration, the first specific game state ends based on the number of end games set when the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is not won. Specifically, for example, if the number of end games is set as one game, the first specific game state ends with one game, and if the number of end games is set as two games, the first specific game state becomes two. End with game. By doing so, in the configuration in which the first specific game state is ended based on the fact that the second shift lottery is not won, the number of games until the end of the first specific game state is made highly flexible. Becomes possible.

  Feature B10. In a situation where the number of games is set by the end game number setting means, if the lottery result of the second shift lottery by the second shift lottery means is the second shift result, the specific end means sets the second shift lottery to the second shift lottery. The gaming machine according to Feature B9, further comprising: means for restricting termination of the one specific gaming state (function of executing a process of clearing the AT mode non-winning flag by main controller 101).

  According to the above configuration, even in a situation where the second transfer lottery is once non-winning and the number of games until the end of the first specific game state is set by the end game number setting means, the second transfer lottery is performed again. , The termination of the first specific gaming state by the specific ending means is restricted. In this way, even if the second shift lottery is not won, it is not determined that the first specific game state will end, and it is possible to re-challenge not to end according to the set end game number. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to draw a high interest in the number of end games and the second shift lottery in the re-challenge, thereby greatly improving the playability.

Feature B11. As the game state, the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becomes the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result becomes the replay result is different from the first special state (for example, the second RT state) and the second special state (for example, the second RT state). , 4th RT state) are set,
In each game until the first specific game state ends, the second shift lottery can be executed,
The end game number setting means may determine whether the result of the second shift lottery executed in the first special state is not the second shift result, and whether the second shift lottery executed in the second special state may be different. The game according to Feature B9 or B10, wherein the number of games until the first specific game state ends is different between a case where the result of the lottery is not the second shift result. Machine.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the first specific game state is terminated when the second transfer lottery is not won, the so-called RT state is different in the probability of the payout result but different in the probability of the replay result. The first special state and the second special state are provided. In the first special state and the second special state, a game up to the end of the first specific game state when the second shift lottery is not won. The numbers are different. And since it is the structure which can perform the 2nd transfer lottery in each game of the 1st specific game state, the substantial transition rate to the 2nd specific game state between the 1st special state and the 2nd special state is The number of executions of the 2 shift lottery, that is, the number of games until the end of the first specific game state, is defined by the number of games until the end of the first specific game state in the first special state and the second special state. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which the transition rate to the second special game state is made different between the first special state and the second special state.

Feature B12. The first specific transition means can transition to the first specific game state in a game in which the result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result,
The second shift lottery means is capable of executing the second shift lottery in the game shifted to the first specific game state by the first specific shift means. 2. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the above-described configuration, the game is shifted to the first specific game state in the game that has won the shift lottery to the first specific game state, and the second shift lottery can also be performed in the game. By doing so, in the configuration in which the transition to the second specific game state is performed through a two-stage lottery system such as the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery, the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery are performed in the same game. This is a configuration that can be implemented. Therefore, when the second transfer lottery is not won in the game, even if the first specific game state is ended by the specific end means, the first specific game state is changed by the specific end means from the first transfer lottery. Until the game is completed, the game is substantially completed in one game. By consolidating the games that the player should pay attention to, the effect of providing a strong pounding feeling is further enhanced. For example, as shown in the feature B2 The number of games that are in the first specific game state and are not in the second specific game state (the number of games that are in the first specific game state and have not been won in the second shift lottery) may be reduced. In, the number of games can be set to the minimum number of games.

  Feature B13. If the result of the second shift lottery is not the second shift result, the specific end means can end the first specific game state in the game, wherein B1 to B12. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the above configuration, when the second shift lottery is not won, the first specific game state is ended without continuing the first specific game state. This makes it clear that the number of games that are in the first specific game state but not in the second specific game state can be set as the minimum number of games.

Feature B14. The first specific transition means transitions to the first specific game state with a game next to the game won in the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means as a start game,
If the result of the second shift lottery executed in the game in which the first shift lottery is performed or the result of the second shift lottery executed in the start game is not the second shift result, the specific ending means The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B13, wherein the first specific gaming state can be ended in the start game.

  According to the above configuration, it is clarified that the transition to the first specific gaming state occurs even when the lottery to the transition to the second specific gaming state is not won. With this configuration, the player has won the transition lottery to the first specific game state, compared to a configuration in which the lottery process is simply performed in multiple stages by the internal processing of the gaming machine. Can be clearly grasped, and the degree of attention to each of the two shift lotteries can be appropriately increased.

Feature B15. When the result of the first transfer lottery by the first transfer lottery means is the first transfer result, a lottery result storage means for storing a lottery result by the lottery means of the game which triggered the first transfer lottery. (Transition winning information temporary storage area 106f of main controller 101).
The second shift lottery means can execute the second shift lottery in the first specific game state by using information of the lottery result stored by the lottery result storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B14.

  According to the above configuration, the second transfer lottery triggered by the specific end unit is performed during the first specific game state, and the game result of the game that has won the first transfer lottery is used. It will be. By doing so, it is necessary to allocate the game result (so-called rare role) to be a trigger for the lottery separately in the first shift lottery and the second shift lottery while reliably causing the shift itself to the first specific game state. After the transition to the first specific game state while avoiding the difficulty of having to perform the second transitional lottery, it is possible to immediately execute the second transition lottery.

  Feature B16. It is characterized by comprising a specific display means (competition ratio monitor 77) capable of displaying a ratio of the number of games between a state where the transition to the second specific game state is possible and a state where the state is not so. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B15.

  Since the ratio of the number of games between the situation in which the transition to the second specific gaming state is possible and the situation in which the transition to the second specific gaming state is not possible is displayed, the percentage of the increase in the game medium caused by the second specific gaming state Can be grasped by the manager of the game hall. Thus, for example, it is possible to specify an act of illegally shifting to the second specific game state, or to enter the second specific game state at a rate exceeding the ratio intended by the designer, and the like. This can be used to ensure the safety and soundness of the aircraft.

  In particular, as in the feature B1, the first specific game state is terminated when the second transfer lottery is not won in the first specific game state, so that the ratio displayed by the specific display means has a significantly small value. . In this way, the situation in which the ratio is eroded can be avoided by continuing the situation in which the state is the first specific game state even though the transition to the second specific game state has not occurred.

In addition, the above-described configuration is configured such that “a lottery result by the lottery means, a first result in which a prize is established when each of the stop operation means is operated in the first stop operation mode, And a second result of winning when the player operates in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode,
Based on a lottery result by the lottery means, a mode notification (push order notification) relating to an operation mode including the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is given by predetermined notification means (first display on the instruction monitor 68). Notifying means (a function of executing the pushing sequence process by the main control device 101) which can be executed in the display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7),
It is possible to make a transition to the second specific game state by making a transition to the second specific game state, so that the mode notification is executed by the mode notifying means. The significance of calculating and displaying the ratio between the situation where the situation is and the situation where the situation is not so is clarified. That is, by performing such a limitation, the display by the “specific display means” is configured to display the ratio of the situation where the mode notification can be executed and the situation where the mode notification is not performed, and the status of the situation where the mode notification can be executed is displayed. It is possible to easily confirm whether the ratio is not far from the design value.

  In addition, regarding the "specific display means", "displacement means (the front door 12) capable of displacing the specific display means between a position where visual recognition is impossible from the front of the gaming machine and a position where visual recognition is possible from the front of the gaming machine. ), And the position of the displacement means is switched between a state in which the displacement means can be displaced and a state in which the displacement means cannot be displaced by a predetermined locking means. " It is possible for the manager of the gaming hall to be able to confirm, and for the player to be unable to confirm.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. A plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are provided in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to perform processing),
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantage section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) which is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, a first shift lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section shift lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first specific game state;
The first specific game based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section win) corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state. First specific shifting means for shifting to a state (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by main controller 101);
A second shift lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode shift lottery by the main controller 101) for executing a second shift lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
The second specific game is performed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state. Second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by main controller 101);
With
The game state further includes a first special state (for example, a second RT state) and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means is the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is different. (For example, the fourth RT state) is set,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained at the first probability in the first special state, while the second transition lottery means is greater than the first probability in the second special state. The second transfer lottery can be executed so that the second transfer result is obtained with a high second probability;
In the second specific gaming state, a specific ending means (a function of executing the processing of step S1626 by the main control device 101) for ending the second specific gaming state based on the transition to the second special state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by that:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operating means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body during orbiting is stopped, and the stop is performed. In a so-called slot machine in which an award is given by the awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state is provided, Since the second specific game state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state, is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming ability on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the game, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Further, as the game state, there are provided a first special state and a second special state corresponding to a so-called RT state in which the probability of a payout result is common but the probability of a replay result may be different. The first specific game state and the second specific game state are transitioned through the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery. In particular, the second transition lottery is in the second special state rather than the first special state. Since the lottery is performed so that the player can easily shift to the second specific game state, chances of shifting to the second specific game state differ depending on the type of the RT state, and the game is diversified.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, when the transition to the second special state occurs in the second specific game state, the second specific game state is ended. Therefore, when a transition to the second special state that easily transitions to the second specific game state occurs, the second specific game state is temporarily terminated. For example, a so-called pullback zone of the second specific game state is set. It is possible to greatly contribute to the realization of a novel game, such as creating a new game state or prompting resetting of the second specific game state.

Feature C2. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a predetermined second special result (transition replay 1, 2), a second special transition means (main control device 101) capable of shifting to the second special state Function to execute RT state processing by the
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result in the second specific game state, the specific end means can end the second specific game state. A gaming machine according to feature C1.

  According to the above configuration, the transition to the second special state occurs based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means has become the second special result, and the transition to the second special state in the second specific game state. It is clarified that the setting is not forcibly caused by the setting on the gaming machine side (for example, the number of games or the number of medals, etc.), and is not set by the player at any time. As described above, the transition to the second special state that is both happy and sad for the player, such as ending the second specific game state and becoming a zone for returning to the second specific game state, can be performed by each game. It is generated in association with an element of luck such as a lottery result, and interest in the lottery result of each game is greatly increased.

  Feature C3. The second special transition means shifts to the second special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is stopped in the first stop operation mode. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the stop operation means is operated to stop in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, the state changes to the second special state. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the game machine is not shifted.

  According to the above configuration, in addition to the luck factor such as the lottery result of each game, the viewpoint of the operation mode of the stop operation unit operated by the player is added to the presence or absence of the transition to the second special state. By doing so, the player who wants to cause the transition to the second special state will play with the aim of being in the first stop operation mode at the time of winning the second special result, and will be in the second special state. As a player who does not want to cause a transition to the game, the player is encouraged to participate in the game, such as playing a game aiming at the second stop operation mode at the time of winning the second special result. Is improved.

  Feature C4. When a lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, a mode notification about a stop operation mode including at least one of the first stop operation mode and the second stop operation mode is given by predetermined notification means ( The gaming machine according to Feature C3, further comprising a mode notification execution unit (a function of executing a pressing sequence process by the main control device 101) executable on the instruction monitor 68).

  According to the above configuration, since the mode notification about the first stop operation mode that causes the transition to the second special state and the second stop operation mode that does not cause the transition is performed by the predetermined notification means, the operation is performed according to the mode notification. By doing so, the transition to the second special state can be made to occur or not to occur. As described above, the presence or absence of the mode notification enables the gaming machine to assist in the presence or absence of the transition to the second special state, thereby realizing the playability using the second special state as the pullback zone as designed. Becomes possible.

Feature C5. A first state (for example, a third RT state) in which the lottery result by the lottery means can be the second special result, and a first state in which the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the second special result or is less likely than the first state. Two states (for example, a second RT state) are set,
In the second specific game state, a state transition unit that transitions from the second state to the first state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition (for transition to the transition mode for the main control device 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C4, further comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the presence or absence of the transition to the second special state is likely to be influenced by the factors of luck, such that the transition to the second special state may occur when the lottery result of each game becomes the second special result. In the configuration, the presence or absence of the second special result and the probability of winning, which trigger the transition to the second special state, are different between the first state and the second state, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second special result is won. This is a configuration in which the transition to the first state, which is easy to perform, occurs. With such a configuration, at the timing when the transition to the second special state should not be performed, the second special result is prevented from being won by staying in the second state (not transitioning to the first state). 2 It is possible to shift to the first state at the timing of shifting to the special state and to be able to win the second special result, and the shift to the second special state occurs at an unintended timing and the second specific game state Is terminated.

Feature C6. When shifting to the second specific gaming state by the second specific shifting means, shifting to the first special state can also occur.
When the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined first special result (first promotion replays 1 to 4), a first special transition means (main control) capable of shifting to the first special state Function for executing the RT state processing and the pushing sequence processing by the apparatus 101)
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein in the second special state, a lottery result by the lottery means is set to be the first special result.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the transition to the second special state during the second specific game state ends the second specific game state, in the second special state after the transition, the state transitions to the first special state. It is possible to win the first special result in which a transition can occur. Based on the premise that the second special game state is played in the first special state, if the lottery to shift to the second special game state in the second special state is won, the first special result is won. Based on this, it is possible to promptly shift to the first special state. Therefore, in the second special state as a so-called withdrawal zone, despite the fact that the player has won the lottery transition to the second specific game state, the transition to the first special state is difficult due to the intervening other game states. Through this, it is possible to solve the inconvenience that the second specific game state is not started.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the transition from the second special state to the first special state ends the second special state regardless of whether or not the second transition lottery has been won. .

  In the above configuration, in the configuration in which it is possible to return to the second special game state by transitioning to the first special state, if the second transition lottery is not won, only the transition to the second specific game state does not occur. However, the second special state is obviously ended. In this way, by making the transition from the second special state to the first special state not only a merit for the player but also a demerit, the interest in the first special result winning time and the winning timing is raised. Can be.

Feature C8. A setting means (main control device) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in an increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. 101) to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the
In a case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and a case where a second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the lottery result by the lottery means in the second special state is The gaming machine according to Feature C6 or Feature C7, wherein the probability of the first special result can be different.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific game state is shifted to the second special state, the second specific game state ends, and it is easy to return to the second specific game state. The probability that the first special result and the direct return to the second specific game state after being won in the second transfer lottery may differ depending on the set value. In other words, as the winning probability of the first special result is higher, the return to the second specific gaming state is performed more smoothly in the situation where the second shift lottery is won. Also, in view of the fact that the second special state can be ended by becoming the first special result, the higher the probability of winning the first special result, the easier the second special state is to win the transition to the second specific game state. It is easy to finish the game, but in this way, by making the winning probability of the first special result different depending on the set value, it is possible to provide a difference due to the set value in the playability and characteristics of the second special state.

Feature C9. The first special transition means shifts to the first special state when a lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is stopped in a third stop operation mode. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated to stop in a fourth stop operation mode different from the third stop operation mode, the first special state is entered. It is a configuration that does not migrate,
If the second shift lottery has been won and the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, a stop operation including at least one of the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode A first mode notification executing means (a function of executing a pressing sequence process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification of the mode by a predetermined notification means (instruction monitor 68);
When the second shift lottery is won in a state different from the second special state, the mode notification by the first mode notification execution unit is performed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery unit becomes the first special result. Through which the transition to the second specific game state by the second specific transition unit occurs.
In the second special state, based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a third special result (fall replays 1 to 3) different from the first special result, the third special state is ended. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C8, further including a special state transition unit (a function of executing a RT state process and a pushing sequence process by the main control device 101).

  According to the above configuration, the first special result can be won even in a state other than the second special state, and even when the lottery to the second specific game state is won in a state different from the second special result, the first special result can be obtained. The transition to the second special game state occurs through the transition to the first special state based on the first special result winning. In this case, in order to increase the advantage of the second special game state, for example, a configuration in which the winning probability of the replay result in the first special state is considered to be possible. , The mode of the stop operation, etc., may accidentally correspond to the transition to the first special state, and the second special state despite the fact that the transition to the second specific game state has not been won. If the transition to, the design of the game is not preferable. From such a point of view, when the first special result is won, the transition to the first special state is prevented from occurring as much as possible, and when the second transition lottery is won, the assisting of the gaming machine is performed. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the transition to the first special state can be smoothly performed via (the mode notification by the first mode notification execution unit). Specifically, when the third stop operation mode in which the transition to the first special state occurs when the first special result is won is compared with the fourth stop operation mode in which the transition to the first special state does not occur, the fourth stop operation mode is determined. The operation mode is more likely to be operated, and it is considered that a configuration in which the third stop operation mode is performed by the assist of the gaming machine is preferable.

  If the first special result having such a premise is used to return to the second special gaming state in the second special state and is also used to trigger the end of the second special state, the first special result is not used in the second special state. The probability of shifting to the first special state in a situation where the 2 shift lottery has not been won, that is, the probability of ending the second special state, tends to be relatively low, and the second special state tends to continue for a long time. In this regard, in the above configuration, in the second special state, in addition to the first special result, the third special result is also set as an end trigger of the second special state. It is possible to suppress an event in which the special state is likely to be prolonged, and prevent the advantage of the second special state from being too high.

Feature C10. When shifting to the second specific gaming state by the second specific shifting means, shifting to the first special state can also occur.
The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the replay result is set so that the first special state is more likely to be higher than the second special state. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second specific game state is played in the first special state, the probability of a replay result decreases when the state shifts to the second special state. In other words, in the second specific game state, when the mode transitions to the second special state in which the transition to the second specific game state is likely to occur and the second specific game state ends, basically, the probability of a re-game result becomes lower. Lower than before. Then, by shifting to the second special state, it is easy to shift to the second specific game state again, but in the second special state, the amount of the game medium is likely to increase, and until the shift to the second specific game state. In the game of the above, there is a possibility that the number of game media is reduced. By doing so, in the second special state, not only the viewpoint of whether or not to win the second shift lottery, but also the timing (the number of digested games) of winning the second shift lottery, the player is interested in the game. Fun is added.

Feature C11. A remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number in the second specific game state (a function of executing a process of grasping the number of advantageous section remaining games ZG by the main control device 101);
Second ending means capable of executing an end process for ending the second specific game state based on the grasping result by the remaining number grasping means (an advantageous section based on a normal ending condition established by the main control device 101). Function to execute processing for terminating the AT mode);
The second special state is entered based on the fact that the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means is before the end processing by the second ending means and is a predetermined specific number. Means for permitting the transition of the second special state before the specified number is reached (a function of executing a process of setting a transition notification flag by the main control device 101); ,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the remaining number of the second specific game state is grasped by the remaining number grasping means, and based on the grasp result, the remaining number of the second specific game state is determined to be the specific number. Before the transition, the transition to the second special state is restricted, and the transition to the second special state is permitted by being a specific number. As described above, by adopting a configuration in which the transition to the second special state occurs at the end of the second specific game state, the transition to the second special game state ends immediately due to the transition to the second special state. At the end of the game, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to whether the game should be shifted to the second special state and the game should be ended, or whether the game should be ended in the remaining number of games. Through the diversification of games, the interest in games can be improved.

  Feature C12. When the second specific gaming state is ended by the second ending means, it is more difficult for the player than when the second specific gaming state is ended by the specific ending means based on the transition to the second special state. The gaming machine according to feature C11, wherein the gaming machine is easily disadvantageous.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration of the feature C10, when the second specific game state ends based on the grasp result by the remaining number grasping means, when the second specific game state ends based on the second special state transition Would be more disadvantageous for the player. Because of this, the merit that the second specific gaming state is ended by the specific ending means can be produced, and the effect of the feature C1 can be suitably expected.

Feature C13. When shifting to the second specific gaming state by the second specific shifting means, shifting to the first special state can also occur.
After the second specific game state is ended by the second ending means, a predetermined end condition (second re-game winning, stop of transition) is satisfied in the first special state, so that the first special state is obtained. From the second special state to a state different from the second special state,
After the second specific game state is ended by the second end means and before the predetermined end condition is satisfied, a predetermined transition condition (an eleventh re-game winning prize or a twelfth re-game winning prize) is set. The game machine according to the feature C11 or the feature C12, wherein when the condition (2) is satisfied, the game machine shifts to the second special state.

  According to the above configuration, the first special state is shifted to another state even when the second end state is ended by the second end means based on the remaining number of the second end state as usual. The transition to the second special state can occur before the user performs the operation. Therefore, in a configuration having different ending means such as the second ending means and the specific ending means, the transition to the second special state is not completely denied just because the second ending means terminates, and a chance is obtained. Will remain.

  Feature C14. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C13, wherein when the second specific gaming state is ended by the specific ending means, the first specific gaming state is also ended.

  According to the above configuration, when the second specific game state is ended by the specific end means, the first specific game state is also ended together, so in the second special state, the first transfer lottery is won, and If the second shift lottery is not won, the game will not return to the second specific game state. In this way, the soundness of the game can be secured without increasing the advantage of the second specific game state or the second special state too much.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are provided in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to perform processing),
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantage section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) which is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, a first shift lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section shift lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first specific game state;
The first specific game based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section win) corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state. First specific shifting means for shifting to a state (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by main controller 101);
In the first specific game state, a second transition lottery means (a function of executing an AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state;
The second specific game is performed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state. Second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result, it is possible to execute the second transition lottery before transitioning to the first specific game state. 2 transfer destination lottery means (the function of executing the AT mode shift lottery in the advantageous section winning process by the main controller 101);
With
The first specific transfer means shifts to the first specific game state even when the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is not the second transfer result. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operating means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body during orbiting is stopped, and the stop is performed. In a so-called slot machine in which an award is given by the awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state is provided, Since the second specific game state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state, is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming ability on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the game, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, after the first specific game state transition, in addition to the second transition lottery means capable of executing the second transition lottery to the second specific game state, the first transition to the first specific game state is performed. A second transfer lottery means capable of executing a second transfer lottery to the second specific game state based on winning in the lottery before the transfer to the first specific game state is provided. Even when the 2 shift lottery is not won, the shift to the first specific game state occurs. With this configuration, when the first shift lottery is won, the second shift lottery can be substantially performed a plurality of times, and a large number of chances of shifting to the second specific game state are provided. However, by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of chances are given, even if the winning probability of one chance (second shift lottery) is reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to be disadvantaged. Then, by adopting a configuration in which a plurality of chances are given, the number of patterns to be won in the second shift lottery increases, and the game can be greatly diversified.

  Feature D2. The probability that the second transfer result will be obtained when the second transfer lottery is performed by the second transfer lottery means, and the second probability when the second transfer lottery is performed by the second transfer lottery means. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein a probability of a transition result is different.

  According to the above configuration, the winning probability is different between the second transfer lottery performed after the first specific game state transition and the second transfer lottery performed before the first specific game state transition. Or the second transition lottery before the transition to the first specific game state and the second transition lottery after the transition are repeatedly received, and only the second transition lottery after the transition to the first specific game state is repeatedly received. In some cases, even if the number of executions of the second transfer lottery is the same, the degree of advantage may greatly differ. By doing so, it is possible to cause a great interest in when to receive the second shift lottery. Therefore, the degree of attention to the game can be appropriately increased.

Feature D3. A setting means (main control device) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in an increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. 101) to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the
In the case where the first setting value is set by the setting means and the case where the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means is performed. Therefore, while the probability of the second shift result is common,
When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value is set, the second shift lottery by the second shift lottery means determines the second shift result. The gaming machine according to Feature D1 or Feature D2, wherein the probability of the game machine being different is different.

  In the above-described configuration, the difference between the increase / decrease rate and the increase / decrease mode of the game medium is determined by the winning probability of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means, that is, the probability of the transition to the second specific game state in the first specific game state. Although the configuration is set, there is no setting difference in the winning probability of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means performed before the transfer to the first specific game state. In a state that is already advantageous to the player, such as the first specific gaming state, the player is unlikely to end the game, and the gaming table on which the player starts a new game is located before the first specific gaming state transition. It is highly likely that the player is in the normal gaming state. Then, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means before the transfer to the first specific gaming state, there is a difference in the advantage in the normal game state, and depending on the gaming table on which the player is seated. Equality between players is less likely to be ensured. In this regard, as in the above-described configuration, the winning probability of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is not set differently, so that the second specific game is ensured while ensuring equality between players. It is possible to diversify the gaming ability using the state.

  Feature D4. When the first set value is set by the setting means and when the second set value is set, the first transfer result is obtained by the first transfer lottery by the first transfer lottery means. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the gaming machines have a common probability.

  According to the above configuration, the significance of setting the first transfer lottery to have no difference in the advantage in the normal gaming state and the setting of the winning probability of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means to be more significant. .

  Feature D5. In the case where the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is the second transfer result, after the transfer to the first specific game state, the second transfer lottery means performs the second transfer lottery. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein execution is restricted.

  According to the above configuration, even if the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is won, the wasteful processing that the second transfer lottery is further performed after the transfer to the first specific game state is omitted. I will By avoiding duplication of processing in this way, the significance of providing the second transfer destination lottery means can be increased.

Feature D6. The second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means and the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means are executed based on a predetermined lottery opportunity (game lottery result),
When a first lottery trigger (transfer trigger) of the predetermined lottery trigger occurs, the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means and the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means are executed. On the other hand, if a second lottery opportunity (non-opportunity) different from the first lottery opportunity (transition opportunity) of the predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, the second transition lottery means is executed. There is provided a means capable of restricting the execution of the second transfer destination lottery means (the function of making the presence or absence of the AT mode lottery different between the transfer triggering role and the non-triggering role by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5.
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second transfer lottery means or the second transfer lottery means is performed by the second transfer lottery means at a predetermined lottery occasion, the execution of the second transfer destination lottery may be restricted. is there. In this way, by setting restrictions on the irregular lottery such as the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means performed before the transfer to the first specific gaming state, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that such a lottery is performed indefinitely. be able to.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, "the second transfer destination lottery means executes the second transfer lottery using a lottery result by the lottery means,
The second shift lottery means executes the second shift lottery using a lottery result by the lottery means,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (transition trigger), the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means and the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means are executed. On the other hand, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a second result (non-trigger) different from the first result, the second transfer lottery means is executed but the second transfer destination lottery means is executed. Is limited. "

Feature D7. Based on the predetermined lottery opportunity, the first shift lottery means is configured to execute the first shift lottery,
When the first lottery trigger (transition trigger) occurs among the predetermined lottery triggers, execution of the first transition lottery by the first transfer lottery means is permitted, and the first lottery trigger is executed. (2) When a lottery opportunity (non-opportunity) occurs, a means capable of restricting the execution of the first transition lottery by the first transfer lottery means (a transition opportunity and a non-opportunity by the main controller 101) The gaming machine according to Feature D6, characterized in that the gaming machine has a function of differentiating whether or not there is an advantageous section shift lottery.
Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, when the execution of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is restricted, the execution of the first transfer lottery by the first transfer lottery means is also restricted. In other words, when the execution of the first transition lottery is restricted before the transition to the first specific gaming state, the execution of the second transition lottery by the second transition destination lottery means performed before the transition to the first specific gaming state is also performed. Will be limited. By doing so, in a configuration that goes through a two-stage transition, such as a transition from the first specific game state to the second specific game state, the second specific game state before the transition to the first specific game state It is possible to match an irregular configuration such as performing the 2 shift lottery with the shift lottery to the first specific game state.

Feature D8. A setting means (main control device) is provided with a plurality of setting values capable of causing a change in an increase / decrease rate or an increase / decrease mode of the game medium, and one of the plurality of setting values is set. 101) to execute the setting process of the winning probability by the
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value different from the first setting value is set, the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means is performed. While the probability that the result is the second transition result is common,
When the first setting value is set by the setting means and when the second setting value is set, the result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means is the second transfer result. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, wherein the probabilities of being different can be different.

  In a configuration in which a transition from the normal gaming state to the first specific gaming state occurs and further a transition from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state occurs, the transition to the second specific gaming state is defined as a game target. If so, the first specific game state can be regarded as a so-called chance zone. By providing a setting difference in the transition rate to the second specific game state in such a chance zone, it is considered that the game is diversified.

  However, in a gaming machine that can be installed in a plurality of gaming machines, there is a thought that even if a player selects any gaming machine, chances should be given equally, and when the player selects, the chance is unequal. There is also a thought that such a setting difference is not preferable.

  In that regard, if the first specific game state is taken as a chance zone as described above, the player is unlikely to end the game in that chance zone. In other words, the player ends the game and takes over the successor. The state in which the player starts the game is likely to be the normal game state. That is, in a configuration in which the state transitions through two stages as in the present gaming machine, it is considered that the difference in the transition setting should be eliminated by the transition rate in the normal gaming state.

  Therefore, as in the above configuration, there is no difference in the setting of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means executed before the transfer to the first specific game state, and the second transfer lottery means to be executed after the transfer to the first specific game state. It is possible to diversify the game at the transition rate to the second specific game state while eliminating the setting difference in the normal game state by making the setting difference of the second shift lottery possible.

  In addition, the said structure is "when the said 1st set value is set by the said setting means, and when the said 2nd set value is set, the said 1st transfer lottery means The probability that the result will be the first transition result is common, "and the equality of the game in the normal game state is further ensured.

Feature D9. As the game state, the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becomes the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result becomes the replay result is different from the first special state (for example, the second RT state) and the second special state (for example, the second RT state). , 4th RT state) are set,
In the first special state, the execution of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is limited, while in the second special state, the execution of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein

  According to the above configuration, while the probability of the payout result is common, the so-called RT state, such as the first special state and the second special state, in which the probability of the replay result is different, is used to win the second transition lottery. Can be different. That is, in the first special state, the execution of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is restricted, and in the second special state, the execution of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer destination lottery means is permitted. In the case of winning the first transition lottery in the second special state, the case of winning the first transition lottery in the second special state, including the subsequent second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means, than in the case of winning the first transition lottery in the first special state, The possibility of winning the second transfer lottery increases. Therefore, it is easy to vary the winning probability of the second transfer lottery depending on the state by simply combining the configuration of the existing RT state such as the first special state or the second special state with the feature D1 such as the second transfer lottery means. It becomes feasible.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. A plurality of revolving bodies (each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) on which a plurality of types of patterns are provided in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) for making a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies;
Starting operation means (start lever 41) for starting orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
Drive control means (reel control by the main control device 101) for starting the rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when the start operation means is operated, and for stopping the orbiting of each of the orbiting bodies when the stop operation means is operated. Function to perform processing),
A lottery means (a function of executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to a predetermined result (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state (normal section) and a first specific game state (advantage section) that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state (AT mode) which is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal game state, a first shift lottery means (a function of executing an advantageous section shift lottery by the main control device 101) for executing a first shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the first specific game state;
The first specific game based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result (advantageous section win) corresponding to the transition to the first specific game state. First specific shifting means for shifting to a state (a function of executing a process for shifting to an advantageous section by main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result, specific information corresponding to the game result of the game that triggered the first transition lottery is stored. Specific information storage means (transition winning time information temporary storage area 106f by main controller 101);
In the first specific game state, based on the specific information, a second transition lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to transition to the second specific game state (AT mode transition lottery by the main control device 101) Function to execute)
The second specific game is performed based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is the second transition result (AT mode winning) corresponding to the transition to the second specific game state. Second specific transition means for transitioning to a state (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by main controller 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when the start operating means is operated, the lottery by the lottery means is performed, and the orbiting of the orbiting body is started. When the stop operating means is operated, the orbiting body during orbiting is stopped, and the stop is performed. In a so-called slot machine in which an award is given by the awarding means if the result corresponds to a lottery result, a first specific game state which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state is provided, Since the second specific game state, which is more advantageous as the state included in the first specific game state, is provided, the normal game state is shifted to the first specific game state, and the second specific game state is aimed at. Therefore, it is possible to realize a gaming ability on the premise of a state transition that is advantageous to the game, and it is possible to greatly contribute to the improvement of interest.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, when the first shift lottery to the first specific game state is won, the specific information corresponding to the game result of the game that triggered the first shift lottery is stored, and the first specific game state is stored. In the state, a second shift lottery to the second specific gaming state based on the specific information may be executed. By doing so, in a configuration in which the gaming state shifts through a plurality of stages of lottery from the first specific gaming state to the second specific gaming state, for example, a transition to the first specific gaming state by winning a so-called rare role To eliminate the absurd feeling that the lottery result by the subsequent lottery means does not give birth (but does not win the rare role) and cannot shift to the second specific game state despite winning Becomes possible.

  Feature E2. Means for erasing the specific information based on the fact that the second transfer lottery based on the specific information has been performed by the specific information storage means (transfer winning information temporary storage area 106f by main controller 101) The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising: a function of executing an erasing process.

  According to the above configuration, when the second transfer lottery based on the specific information is performed, the specific information is erased, so that the specific information is stored forever, which may affect the subsequent playability. Unlike the above, the number of times the specific information is used is limited. Therefore, the information at the time of the first shift lottery winning can be taken over without increasing the degree of advantage too much.

Feature E3. The specific information by the specific information storage means can be stored and held over a plurality of games or a plurality of times of executing the second shift lottery,
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit, the number of games or the number of executions in which the specific information is stored and held is set based on a result of the lottery of the game, wherein the specific information is stored in the specific information storage unit. Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, the number of times the second transfer lottery is executed using the specific information is set based on the lottery result by the lottery means at the time of the first transfer lottery winning. By doing so, it is possible to set the ease of winning in the second shift lottery according to the game result at the time of the first shift lottery win.

Feature E4. In the first specific game state, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a second transition normal lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to shift to the second specific game state (by the main control device 101) A function of executing an AT mode shift lottery based on the result of the game)
The second specific transition means transitions to the second specific game state based on the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition normal lottery means being the second transition result (AT mode winning). It is a configuration that can be
When the specific information is stored in the specific information storage means, the second transfer lottery is executed by the second transfer lottery means, and when the specific information is not stored in the specific information storage means. And means for executing the second shift lottery by the second shift normal lottery means (the function of executing the processing of steps S5613, S5713, and S5813 by the main controller 101). The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

  According to the above configuration, if the specific information is stored, the second transfer lottery using the specific information is performed, and if the specific information is not stored, the second transfer lottery using the lottery result in the game is performed. Done. In this way, while securing the merit that the second transfer lottery based on the specific information is performed, there is no inconvenience that the second transfer lottery is not performed when the specific information is not stored. You can do so.

  Feature E5. The second transfer lottery means uses the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and a result of the lottery by the lottery means in the game for executing the second transfer lottery, and The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein a transfer lottery can be executed.

  According to the above configuration, as in the case where the so-called rare role is won in the game in which the second shift lottery is executed, the superiority in the case where the rare role is allocated even after shifting to the first specific game state is secured. Thus, it is possible to provide a gaming ability that does not make the player feel that the player has been lost, and that is compensated even if the player does not win the rare role after the transition as in the feature E1.

  Feature E6. In the second shift lottery by the second shift lottery means, the lottery result by the lottery means in the game that executes the second shift lottery is greater than the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein the second shift result has a high degree of influence.

  According to the above configuration, the game result in the game in which the second shift lottery is performed is used while using the configuration in which the game result at the time of the first shift lottery win is taken over to the second shift lottery, as in the feature E1. Since the second transfer lottery has a high degree of influence, the result of the game in which the second transfer lottery is performed is rare while leaving the premise of a general game such as performing the second transfer lottery based on the game result. Even if it is not a role or the like, it is possible to realize a surprising game property that the second transfer lottery may be won depending on the result of the game at the first transfer lottery.

In addition, as a specific configuration of the above configuration, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result when the result of the first transfer lottery is the first transfer result, the identification of the specific result is performed. When the second transfer lottery is performed based on the information and the predetermined result when the lottery result by the lottery means when the second transfer lottery is performed is a predetermined result including the specific result, the second The probability of the result of the second shift is the first probability,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the predetermined result when the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result, the specific information on the predetermined result and the second transition lottery are performed. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, the probability that the second transition result is obtained when the second transition lottery is performed based on the specific result is higher than the first probability. There are two probabilities. "

Feature E7. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific result when the result of the first transfer lottery is the first transfer result, when the specific information on the specific result and the second transfer lottery are performed When the second shift lottery is performed based on the specific result when the lottery result of the lottery means is the specific result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result when the result of the first transfer lottery is the first transfer result, the specific information on the specific result and the second transfer lottery are performed. In the case where the lottery result by the lottery means is another result different from the specific result, the probability that the second transition result is obtained when the second transition lottery is performed based on the other result is higher. The gaming machine according to Feature E5 or Feature E6, wherein the gaming machine is easily lowered.

  According to the above configuration, it is better to allocate the same lottery result in the game selected as the first transfer lottery in the second transfer lottery execution game to the second transfer lottery than in the case where the result is different. easy. By doing in this way, the game is easy to understand, and if the first transition lottery winning is not a rare role but a result that appears frequently during normal times, it is based on the result that it is difficult to win the first transition lottery. In the case of winning, it is not necessary to draw a rare role in the second transfer lottery, and it is possible to ensure the superiority of the first transfer lottery winning as a result of the above-mentioned appearance in a large number of normal times.

Feature E8. In a case where the lottery result by the lottery means is a first specific result when the result of the first transition lottery is the first transition result, the specific information on the first specific result and the second transition lottery When the second transfer lottery is performed based on the second specification result when the lottery result by the lottery means is a second specification result different from the first specification result in the case where The probability of a transition result,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second specification result when the result of the first transfer lottery is the first transfer result, the specifying information on the second specification result and the second transfer The probability that the second transfer result will be obtained when the second transfer lottery is performed based on the first specification result when the lottery result by the lottery means is the first specification result when the lottery is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E5 to E7, wherein

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second shift lottery is executed by a combination of the lottery result in the first shift lottery execution game and the lottery result in the second shift lottery execution game, the order is also taken into account. By doing in this way, it is possible to realize a gaming property that takes into account the weighting in the game between the first transition lottery and the second transition lottery. Specifically, if the game is such that the first shift lottery is frequently won but the second shift lottery is not easily won, the lottery result in the second shift lottery execution game should be given priority. If it is the opposite, the lottery result in the first shift lottery execution game should be given priority, and even if the same lottery result is combined, the winning probability depends on which lottery execution game result should be given priority. Should be different.

Feature E9. In the first specific game state, based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a second transition normal lottery means for executing a second transition lottery as to whether or not to shift to the second specific game state (by the main control device 101) A function of executing an AT mode shift lottery based on the result of the game)
The second specific transition means transitions to the second specific game state based on the result of the second transition lottery by the second transition normal lottery means being the second transition result (AT mode winning). It is a configuration that can be
Means for causing the second transfer lottery means to execute the second transfer lottery when the lottery result of the second transfer lottery by the second transfer lottery means is not the second transfer result (main control device) 101. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E8, further comprising: a function of executing steps S5813 to S5819 of step S101.

  According to the above configuration, when the second transfer lottery based on the specific information is not won, the second transfer normal lottery means performs the second transfer lottery based on the lottery result by the lottery means in the game. By doing so, it is possible to ensure a superiority in the case where the specific information is stored, and to complicate the configuration in a case where the result of the lottery of a plurality of games is to be reflected in one second shift lottery. It is possible to eliminate.

Feature E10. As the game state, the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means becomes the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result becomes the replay result is different from the first special state (for example, the second RT state) and the second special state (for example, the second RT state). , 4th RT state) are set,
In the first special state, storage of the specific information by the specific information storage unit is restricted, while in the second special state, storage of the specific information by the specific information storage unit is permitted. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9.

  According to the above configuration, the so-called RT state, such as the first special state and the second special state, in which the probability of the payout result is common while the probability of the replay result is different, is used to perform the second transition based on the specific information. Whether or not the lottery is executed can be made different. That is, since the specific information is not stored in the first special state, a second shift lottery based on the game result after the first specific game state shift will be performed, and the specific information is stored in the second special state. A second shift lottery based on a game result at the time of winning the first specific game state is performed. On the assumption that the game result at the time of winning the first specific game state will be a rare role, it is considered that the latter is easier to win the second shift lottery. Therefore, it is easy to change the winning probability of the second transition lottery depending on the state by simply combining the configuration of the existing RT state such as the first special state or the second special state with the feature E1 such as the specific information storage means. It becomes possible.

  It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the respective configurations of the other features A to E to the configurations of the features A to E described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply the respective technical ideas in combination. When applying the technical ideas in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  Hereinafter, a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied will be described.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operating means operated by a player, gaming ball firing means for firing game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball path for guiding the fired game balls to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine comprising: a plurality of game parts arranged in a region; and a bonus granted to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passage portion of the respective game parts.

  Spinning-type gaming machines such as slot machines: equipped with variable display means for variably displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols and then finally displaying the symbol row, and starting to change the symbol due to the operation of the starting operation means The variation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and a special game advantageous to the player on condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol is required. A gaming machine that generates a state (such as a bonus game).

  Ball-based belt-type gaming machine: equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row composed of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displaying the symbol row as a final stop. The fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for the game or after a lapse of a predetermined time, and a special game state (bonus) which is advantageous to the player on condition that the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol is required. And a payout device for paying out game balls to the ball tray, and a payout device for providing a ball tray and taking in game balls from the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is enabled by throwing in a game ball.

  Reference Signs List 10: slot machine as a gaming machine, 32: reel as a revolving body, 41: start lever as start operation means, 42 to 44: stop switch as stop operation means, 64: speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display unit constituting an auxiliary effector, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102: CPUs constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (8)

A plurality of orbiting bodies in which a plurality of types of patterns are attached in the circumferential direction,
A display unit that makes a part of the pattern visible for each of the orbiting bodies,
Starting operation means by which the circling of each circulating body is started when operated;
Stop operation means for stopping rotation of each of the orbiting bodies when operated;
A drive control unit that starts circling of each of the circulating bodies when the start operating unit is operated, and stops circling of each of the circulating bodies when the stop operation unit is operated.
Lottery means for performing a lottery on whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and the predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result is stopped at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized through the display unit, A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result;
With
As a lottery result by the lottery means, a re-game result in which a re-game that enables the next game to be executed by the privilege providing means without requiring a new game medium is provided as the privilege, and a predetermined number of And a payout result in which the payout of the game medium is provided as the privilege,
As the game state, a normal game state and a first specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state are provided,
As a state included in the first specific game state, a second specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than other states in the first specific game state is set,
In the normal gaming state, a first transitional lottery means for executing a first transitional lottery as to whether to transition to the first specific gaming state,
Based on that the lottery result of the first transition lottery by the first transition lottery means is the first transition result corresponding to transition to the first specific game state, 1 specific transition means,
A second shift lottery means for executing a second shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the second specific game state;
Based on the fact that the lottery result of the second transition lottery by the second transition lottery means is a second transition result corresponding to transition to the second specific game state, a step of transitioning to the second specific game state 2 specific transition means,
With
As the game state, a first special state and a second special state in which the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means is the payout result is common, while the probability that the lottery result is the replay result is different, are set. ,
The second transition lottery means executes the second transition lottery so that the second transition result is obtained at the first probability in the first special state, while the second transition lottery means is greater than the first probability in the second special state. The second transfer lottery can be executed so that the second transfer result is obtained with a high second probability;
In the second specific gaming state, a game machine further comprising a specific ending means for ending the second specific gaming state based on the transition to the second special state. When a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined second special result, a second special transition means capable of shifting to the second special state is provided,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result in the second specific game state, the specific end means can end the second specific game state. The gaming machine according to claim 1.   The second special transition means shifts to the second special state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result and the stop operation means is stopped in the first stop operation mode. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the second special result, and the stop operation means is operated to stop in a second stop operation mode different from the first stop operation mode, the state changes to the second special state. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the game machine is not shifted. A first state in which the lottery result by the lottery means can be the second special result, and a second state in which the lottery result by the lottery means does not become the second special result or is less likely to be made than the first state are set. Yes,
3. The apparatus according to claim 2, further comprising a state transition unit that transitions from the second state to the first state based on a predetermined condition being satisfied in the second specific game state. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3. When shifting to the second specific gaming state by the second specific shifting means, shifting to the first special state can also occur.
When a lottery result by the lottery means becomes a predetermined first special result, a first special transition means capable of shifting to the first special state is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein in the second special state, the lottery result by the lottery means is set to be the first special result. The first special transition means shifts to the first special state when a lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is stopped in a third stop operation mode. If the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result and the stop operation means is operated to stop in a fourth stop operation mode different from the third stop operation mode, the first special state is entered. It is a configuration that does not migrate,
If the second shift lottery has been won and the lottery result by the lottery means is the first special result, a stop operation including at least one of the third stop operation mode and the fourth stop operation mode A first mode notification execution unit capable of executing mode notification of the mode by predetermined notification unit;
When the second shift lottery is won in a state different from the second special state, the mode notification by the first mode notification execution unit is performed based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery unit becomes the first special result. Through which the transition to the second specific game state by the second specific transition unit occurs.
In the second special state, there is provided a third special state transition means for terminating the second special state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a third special result different from the first special result. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein: When shifting to the second specific gaming state by the second specific shifting means, shifting to the first special state can also occur.
7. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the replay result is set so that the first special state is more likely to be higher than the second special state. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims. Remaining number grasping means for grasping the remaining number of the second specific game state;
A second ending means capable of executing an ending process for ending the second specific game state based on a grasp result by the remaining number grasping means;
The second special state is entered based on the fact that the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means is before the end processing by the second ending means and becomes a predetermined specific number. Means that allows the transition of the second special state before the specific number is reached,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising:

Images